Pektron Group 003 Key Fob User Manual Owner Manual P13 US English

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	2868745
Application ID	HTZFcPHzsitISqtNUrbRDA==
Document Description	Users Manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	465.42kB (5817759 bits)
Date Submitted	2016-01-11 00:00:00
Date Available	2016-01-11 00:00:00
Creation Date	2015-11-30 09:25:48
Producing Software	PDFCreator 2.1.1.0
Document Lastmod	2015-11-30 09:25:48
Document Title	Owner Manual - P13 - US - English
Document Creator	PDFCreator 2.1.1.0
Document Author:	pthomps

SPORTS SERIES
OWNER’S HANDBOOK
☎
✄
❆
✂
✁!
✆
McLaren Beverly Hills
✏
✚
✎
✏
✏
✛
✚
✙
✘
✘
✗
✖
✕
✔
✠
✓
✒
✑
✏
✎
✟
✌
☛
✟
✍
✌
☞
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
Retailer Network
▼
❆
ASSISTANCE
24 hours: +1 818 585 9620
McLaren Calabasas
24 hours: +1 818 585 9620
McLaren Chicago
24 hours: +1 773 547 3877
McLaren Dallas
24 hours: +1 214 497 1082
McLaren Greenwich
24 hours: +1 203 537 9128
McLaren Long Island
24 hours: +1 516 478 4326
McLaren Mexico City
24 hours: To be confirmed
The Collection McLaren (Miami)
24 hours: +1 305 442 9696
McLaren Newport Beach
24 hours: +1 714 252 3284
McLaren Philadelphia
24 hours: +1 610 886 3000
McLaren San Francisco
24 hours: +1 650 815 4472
McLaren Santiago
24 hours: +56 994 496 824
McLaren Scottsdale
24 hours: +1 480 544 5592
McLaren Tampa Bay
24 hours: +1 727 537 0626
McLaren Toronto
24 hours: +1 416 877 2620
McLaren Vancouver
24 hours: +1 888 683 3757
McLaren Washington DC
24 hours: +1 610 886 3000
McLaren Client Services
UK business hours:
+44 148 326 1500
client.services@mclaren.com
If you have been unable to obtain assistance using the number(s)
listed for towing/roadside assistance, or the dealer is unable to
provide towing/roadside assistance, please call 855-4McLaren (855462-5273).
❇
CONTENTS
EFORE YOU DRIVE.............................................................................. 1.1
DRIVING CONTROLS ........................................................................... 2.1
INSTRUMENTS......................................................................................... 3.1
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE.................................................. 4.1
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN ................................................... 5.1
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY .............................................. 6.1
INDEX .................................................................................................................7.1
✄
✁✜
✂
☎
✣
✢
✜
■
✂
✁✄
INTRODUCTION
✡
✑
✌
☛
✒
☛
✒
✥
✌
✟
✧
✠
✒
✦
☛
✥
✔
☛
✥
✟
✌
☛
✒
✽
✻
✝
✸
☛
✒
✥
✌
✝
✪
✿
✡
✯
✭
✔
❈
✤
✡
✡
☛
✓
✮
✭
✒
✽
✬
✽
☛
✼
✴
❋
✤
☛
✟
✔
✧
✡
✌
✔
✔
✥
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
▼
✠
✓
✴
✒
✸
✪
☛
✥
✳
☛
✥
✟
✌
✭
❈
❃
❀
❂
☛
✥
✭
✟
✯
✬
✧
✮
☛
✹
✒
✸
☛
✱
✒
✸
✥
✌
✟
✱
❈
✻
✸
✧
✠
here. Also included is advice on using your
McLaren in winter weather and if you choose
to drive your vehicle abroad, what to do if
●
✡
✑
✍
❑
✍
✍
✥
❋
✡
❏
✤
☛
✥
✡
✑
✌
✤
☛
✟
✔
✌
☛
✡
✌
☛
✒
✝
✦
✒
✡
✍
❍
✟
✌
✪
✰
✡
✑
❚
✸
✾
✴
✔
✡
✔
✒
✪
❀
✸
✑
✌
✪
✱
✸
☛
✒
☛
✪
✲
✒
✥
✸
✌
✬
✟
✺
✧
✠
✰
✒
✦
✸
❈
☛
✥
✻
✔
✭
✬
☛
✥
✫
✟
✌
✡
✑
☛
❊
❈
✰
✥
✒
❈
✸
✝
✌
❈
✻
✡
✔
✥
✑
✶
❀
✼
✱
❅
✪
❱
✪
✌
✒
✌
✠
✡
✦
✡
☛
✒
✥
✌
✟
✧
✠
✒
✦
☛
✥
✤
✡
✍
✥
✟
✌
✡
✤
✔
☛
✥
✟
✌
☛
✒
✝
☛
✒
✥
✌
✝
✡
✔
❘
✽
✼
✬
✭
✻
✸
✬
✺
✹
✸
✱
✔
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✡
✟
✧
✵
✒
✌
✤
✡
✡
☛
✓
✒
✪
✴
✱
✲
✔
✭
✰
✯
✬
✳
☛
✥
✌
✌
✡
✔
✪
✭
✬
✫
✪
✩
✮
✡
✑
✌
✔
✍
✥
✟
✌
✡
❉
✲
✭
✶
✱
✔
✑
✥
✻
✸
✽
✔
✥
✑
❚
✿
✺
✬
☛
✒
❁
❈
❂
✱
✒
❄
The information is divided into specific
sections, to assist in finding the particular
information you require:
features which make the cockpit a pleasant
environment in which to spend time.
✦
The documents supplied with your McLaren
are an integral part of the vehicle. Ensure that
you pass them onto the new owner if you sell
the vehicle.
The technical glossary contains a brief
explanation of some of the more complex
systems fitted to your McLaren. Your McLaren
Retailer will be able to assist should you need
more information.
instrument cluster, including information of
how to view and change vehicle settings.
☛
NOTE: The images shown in this
publication may not exactly reflect your
unique vehicle.
information regarding the fluids and
quantities that are required for the various
systems on your McLaren, or when you need
to know a specific piece of data relating to
your McLaren or its performance.
regarding the equipment and driving controls
fitted to your McLaren and how to use those
controls to best effect during a journey.
✾
This publication describes all options and
features available for the McLaren Sports
Series. Certain descriptions, including those
for display and menu functions, may not apply
to your vehicle due to model variant, country
specifications, optional equipment or the
fitment of McLaren approved accessories.
cockpit to ensure you are fully prepared and
have safe and easy access to all controls
before driving.
❚
yourself with your McLaren and its features
before you drive. This provides the necessary
information for you to get the optimum
benefit and enjoyment from your McLaren.
✷
something should go wrong and how to
manage any possible problems which arise as
a result. Information on fuses, lights and what
to do if you experience a puncture.
✡
★
✥
✠
✟
✥
✍
✥
✧
✟
✦
✒
✌
☛
✒
✥
✌
✟
✧
✠
✒
✦
☛
✥
✔
✥
✑
✌
✤
✟
✡
✠
✡
✔
✟
✡
✍
Introduction
you find information quickly, when you need
it.
INTRODUCTION
This publication must not be reproduced,
translated or reprinted, in whole or in part,
without written permission from McLaren
Automotive Limited.
The equipment fitted to your McLaren may
vary from that shown depending on vehicle
and market specification. Your McLaren may
vary from the images shown depending on
vehicle and market specification.
All information, illustrations and
specifications in our applications are based on
data available and are correct at the time of
issue. The availability of options may vary
from market to market due to local
restrictions and regulations. Some
illustrations in this applications may not
necessarily reflect the specifications or
options available in your local market and
may show optional equipment. The
✠
✡
✔
✓
✝
✥
☛
✒
✠
✌
✝
✡
✍
✡
☛
✟
✑
✌
✥
✡
✌
✤
❋
✌
✥
✦
✔
✥
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✠
✓
✒
✦
manual, the Owner!s Handbook and IRIS User
Guide are available on the IRIS screen.
This vehicle may be covered by patents. See
cars.mclaren.com/patents.
Printed in United Kingdom, 13Q0071CP.01
To access the manuals, navigate to the APPS
screen and select USER MANUAL. This will
launch the user manual application.
▲
© McLaren Automotive Limited.
specifications contained in these applications
are for information purposes only and
McLaren Automotive reserves the right to
change product specifications at any time
without notice or incurring obligation. For full
specification details and information on
standard and optional equipment, please
consult your authorized McLaren Retailer.
❄
✓
❑
✍
✌
☛
✴
✟
✌
✔
☛
✒
✝
✔
✥
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
▼
dating its vehicles to
meet and exceed the latest technologies.
McLaren therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in design, equipment and
technical features at any time.
Electronic User Manual
✴
Information about this document
❖
❙
❳
❘
❪
❙
❄
❄
✠
✒
GUIDE to access the information.
❘
❭
◗
◗
❬
☞
❲
❉
❩
❙
❨
❳
❲
❘
❯
◗
✡
✑
✌
✌
✝
✡
✍
✡
❙
INTRODUCTION
Select the chapter required, this will take you
to the chapter contents page.
Select the section required from the chapter
contents to access the required information.
NOTE: Selecting the INDEX from the
main contents page will navigate you to
an alphabetical index of topics covered
in the Owner!s Handbook. The INDEX is
not available for the IRIS User Guide.
When the section is displayed, the screen can
be scrolled by touching the screen and
dragging a finger up or down as required.
Hotspot links are identified by orange
underlined text. Selecting a hotspot link will
navigate you to the information identified in
the text.
INTRODUCTION
✿
✽
✪
✻
✽
❀
✮
✽
✱
✸
❀
✬
✭
✻
✪
✼
✪
❡
✪
❞
❅
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
✔
✥
✑
✌
☛
✥
✔
✍
✒
✧
❍
✔
✴
✥
☛
✳
✒
✍
✍
✒
❋
✦
✡
✑
✦
✒
✽
Additional work or modifications
made to the vehicle, which have been
carried out incorrectly can also affect
its operating safety.
Environmental notes give you tips on
minimizing the impact of you and
your vehicle on the environment.
✠
✓
✒
✴
✥
✔
✓
☛
✳
☛
✡
✑
❋
✳
☛
✥
❋
✒
✍
✍
✒
✦
✪
✡
✽
✑
✌
✯
✼
✱
❅
✪
❱
✪
✡
◆
✡
✔
McLaren:
• the safety notes throughout this
information
• road traffic laws and regulations
WARNING: There are various warning
labels attached to your McLaren.
These are intended to make you and
others aware of various risks. Do not
remove any warning labels from the
vehicle.
❫
Environmental notes
◗
Notes draw your attention to
activities that contain possible risks
to your McLaren, provide advice that
you may find useful, or give additional
information regarding a particular
subject.
❀
Notes
✠
✹
✸
✱
✸
A warning draws your attention to
activities that could cause injury or
death.
❍
The icons at the bottom of the
screen (end of the section) can
be used to navigate to the previous or next
section as required.
✭
The Home icon appears at the top and
the bottom of each page. Selecting the
home button will return you to the main
contents page.
fitted to your McLaren interact with
each other. Tampering with these
systems could cause malfunctions in
other interconnected systems. Such
faults could seriously endanger the
operational safety of your McLaren
and your own safety.
Owner!s handbook. These symbols are
intended to give you an instant visual
message on what type of information is being
displayed.
❈
the main contents page. Selecting the
library button will return you to the library
where all available owner information can be
accessed.
❵
✌
✒
❑
✡
✑
✌
✌
✟
✔
✠
✟
✡
☛
✟
❑
❑
✒
✝
✥
✟
✠
✠
✴
✥
✞
✡
❍
✑
❚
✌
✤
☛
✥
✦
✍
✍
✥
✓
✒
Operating safety
❋
❴
Symbols
❀
❈
❡
✹
✸
✱
✲
✱
✭
✰
❥
✤
☛
✟
✡
✝
☛
✟
✧
✠
✒
✦
❑
❑
✪
of the vehicle may occur when
approaching steep inclines or
declines.
reliability it is important to ensure the
following preconditions are met before
attempting to drive your vehicle on a track:
Drive with care when:
• engine oil is at normal operating
temperature
• approaching kerbs
• engine coolant is at normal operating
• approaching steep inclines
temperature
• departing steep declines
• tires should not exceed the safe
• driving on rough roads
operating temperatures
• driving in areas where traffic calming
NOTE: Before you use your vehicle on
the track, consult your McLaren Retailer.
McLaren recommend that your vehicle
is inspected before and after track use.
measures have been deployed
• driving in any other environment where
sudden change of road surface height or
elevation are encountered such as car
parks
✡
✑
✌
✍
✒
✒
✝
✒
✌
✡
✧
✥
✌
✡
✌
✓
✟
✵
✴
✒
✸
✤
☛
✡
❣
✰
✬
✧
✧
✹
✒
✱
✼
✡
✬
✬
✠
✡
❯
✺
See Vehicle dimensions, page 6.7.
✸
NOTE: Always drive within your limits and
the limits of the vehicle.
✝
✰
✱
✽
✭
✪
✰
✸
✯
✪
❅
✻
✬
✻
✪
✹
✶
❊
✠
✡
✧
✓
✧
✥
✌
✒
✡
◆
✡
✥
✑
✝
✟
✒
❈
✿
❈
❞
❝
✾
❝
❚
✪
✭
❀
❈
❈
✸
✭
✪
✼
✸
✯
✬
✭
✰
❜
❛
you or others may not then be aware
of dangers, which may result in an
injury.
❵
❊
✐
✽
✼
✪
❤
✼
✹
✸
✱
✸
✭
❣
✪
✽
✪
❅
✻
✪
✲
✬
✪
✭
✯
✬
✮
✫
❀
❈
❈
✿
✾
INTRODUCTION
❢
vehicle during track driving due to the high
temperatures that may be generated by the
brakes and transmission which could affect
performance. Time should be taken to drive
the vehicle at a slower speed without using
INTRODUCTION
✠
✓
✒
✥
✔
☛
✴
✌
☛
✡
☛
✒
✒
✧
❑
✝
✦
✒
✠
✡
✧
✓
✠
changes, this uses the airflow to cool the
vehicle.
We recommend that time is allowed for your
vehicle to return to normal operating
temperatures before leaving the track.
NOTE: When stopping the vehicle
directly after performance driving we
recommend that the ignition is not
immediately switched off or the parking
brake is applied. We recommend that the
engine is left to idle prior to the ignition
being switched off.
NOTE: Please refer to your Service &
Warranty Guide for track and
competition use implications.
vehicle which collect data and store it
temporarily or permanently. This technical
data provides information relating to areas
such as the condition of the vehicle, any
events which have taken place and any
malfunctions your vehicle may be
experiencing or has experienced in the past.
These include, for example:
• operating conditions of system
components, e.g. fluid levels
• the vehicle!s status messages and those
of its individual components, e.g.
Windscreen Washer Fluid Low
• malfunctions and defects in important
system components, e.g. Light Switch
Fault
• vehicle reactions and operating
conditions in special driving situations,
e.g. air bag deployment
• ambient conditions, e.g. outside
temperature
• assist in recognizing and rectifying faults
and defects
• analyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an
accident
• optimize vehicle functions
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle!s
movements.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical
information can be read from the vehicle
including:
• repair service history
• warranty events
• quality assurance
This information can be read by employees of
the service network (including
manufacturers) using special diagnostic
testers. More detailed information can be
obtained from it, if required.
After a fault has been rectified, the
information is deleted from the fault memory
or is continually overwritten.
This data is of an exclusively technical nature
and can be used to:
❦
✟
✡
◆
✥
✡
✳
✔
✔
✡
✝
✌
✡
❏
✓
✒
✥
☛
✳
✠
✟
✠
✴
✝
✠
✒
✥
✟
☛
✳
✠
✵
✤
✠
❍
✟
✑
❍
☛
✟
✡
✠
✟
✡
✠
✡
✑
❚
Stored Data
✧
✟
✴
✔
☛
✒
✥
✌
✟
✓
✌
✥
✔
✍
✝
✥
✡
♠
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
✌
✥
✌
✟
☛
✳
✠
✡
✒
☛
❑
✡
✑
❯
INTRODUCTION
occur where technical data, in connection
with other information, could be traced to a
person.
Examples include:
• accident reports
• damage to the vehicle
• witness statements
McLaren will not access your behavior related
information about a crash event or share it
with others except:
• with the consent of you or, if the vehicle
is leased, of the lessee
• in response to an official request of
police or similar government office
• as part of the manufacturer!s defense in
case of legal proceedings
• as required by law
In addition, McLaren may use the collected or
received diagnostic data:
❧
• for McLaren!s research needs
• to make it available for research needs
where appropriate confidentiality is
maintained and need is shown
• to share summary data which is not tied
to a specific vehicle with other
organizations for research purposes
✘
✎
✗
①
②
④
❻
✚
✗
⑦
✉
✇
✳
☛
✥
✌
✑
✳
✥
✍
✠
✒
✥
✠
✡
✌
③
⑥
❺
①
✉
⑧
⑩
③
⑥
①
✇
③
❼
✏
✗
✔
✠
✡
✥
❑
✡
☛
✛
✏
✗
☛
✒
✥
✌
✟
✠
✡
❑
◗
②
✌
✦
✉
✥
✞
✡
①
✔
✒
③
⑨
❋
✡
✠
✝
✔
✤
☛
✥
❯
❷
❲
⑤
❸
⑨
❷
❶
⑦
✉
⑥
①
①
③
⑩
⑨
①
①
✇
⑧
⑦
✉
⑥
①
①
✴
✌
✡
✦
③
⑥
❷
⑥
⑥
⑤
✉
✟
❙
⑦
⑨
✉
❳
⑧
✘
✗
✗
✴
✌
✡
✦
✟
❙
Manual seats ................................................................................................... 1.17
Racing seats .................................................................................................... 1.18
Electric seats................................................................................................... 1.19
1.40
1.41
1.42
1.43
1.43
1.44
1.44
1.45
③
①
.....................................................
Light switch.....................................................................................................
Hi beam headlamps.....................................................................................
Daytime running lamps..............................................................................
Rear fog lamp .................................................................................................
Turn signals.....................................................................................................
Hazard warning lamps................................................................................
Parking lights..................................................................................................
❏
✏
✗
✗
Interior mirror ................................................................................................ 1.38
Exterior mirrors.............................................................................................. 1.38
⑤
①
③
③
④
✧
✡
②
✌
✴
✔
①
✇
✔
✧
Supplementary Restraint System.......................................................... 1.29
Child passengers........................................................................................... 1.35
Immobilizer ..................................................................................................... 1.14
Tow-away protection .................................................................................. 1.15
Interior motion sensor................................................................................ 1.16
♥
♦
✌
☛
✡
✧
✌
✔
✓
❹
✤
✟
✍
✡
✡
✑
❋
✥
✠
☛
✳
✡
✡
✌
✔
✍
✟
✓
☛
✟
▼
............................................. 1.24
Electric steering wheel adjustment ...................................................... 1.24
Horn ................................................................................................................... 1.26
♥
③
❍
♣
✈
✉
✠
✟
✍
☞
Opening a door................................................................................................. 1.5
Locking a door .................................................................................................. 1.6
Mislock ................................................................................................................. 1.7
Individual settings ........................................................................................... 1.8
Locking and unlocking from inside.......................................................... 1.8
Opening a door from inside......................................................................... 1.9
Closing a door.................................................................................................... 1.9
Automatic locking ........................................................................................ 1.10
Service Cover.................................................................................................. 1.11
Luggage compartment .............................................................................. 1.12
③
③
❺
✔
✌
✍
❸
✡
✌
✟
✡
✎
✗
✍
✟
✠
✡
☛
✡
❙
❶
❷
OPENING AND CLOSING
❶
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➃
➂➁
➈
❾
➇
➆
➅
❽
➄
➃
➂➁
➁
➀
❿
❾
➁
PENING AND CLOSING
✠
✡
✑
✌
✥
✡
✤
✡
✝
✸
❈
✬
✱
❈
✻
❀
✼
✪
✶
✺
✺
➉
✭
✒
✍
This device complies with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
✵
✠
✒
✤
✡
✒
✍
✝
✵
☛
✓
✡
☛
✟
❍
✝
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
❚
General
by using the keyless entry feature, or by
pressing the appropriate button on the key
fob.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio
transmitter may only operate using an
antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser)
gain approved for the transmitter by Industry
Canada.
✑
✌
✡
❁
❁
➋
✦
✒
✌
✠
✗
➊
✟
✑
✌
✥
✔
❋
✡
✥
✍
❑
✧
✒
✝
✡
✝
✥
◆
✡
✤
✔
✥
✑
For your convenience, provided that the
engine is not running, the car can be locked
irrespective of the electrical status, see
Vehicle electrical status, page 2.2.
❚
The keyless entry feature requires the key to
be within 3 feet 11 inches (1.2 meters) of the
sensors.
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
No changes shall be made to the equipment
without the manufacturer!s permission as this
may void the user!s authority to operate the
equipment.
✷
♦
♥
This device complies with Part 2.1091 of the
FCC Rules for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and
operated with a minimum distance of 20cm
between the radiator and your body.
To reduce potential radio interference to
other users, the antenna type and its gain
should be so chosen that the equivalent
isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not
more than that necessary for successful
communication.
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
✍
✒
✠
✌
☛
✒
✝
✡
✌
✒
✧
✡
✠
✒
✌
✔
✡
❋
✤
✓
✍
✭
✻
✸
✪
❤
✬
✫
✮
✪
➌
✮
✝
☛
✥
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
▼
✠
✓
Four sensors detect where the key fob is
around the vehicle.
✒
key fobs. The key fob allows you to remotely
lock and unlock the vehicle.
disarm the vehicle by simply opening the
door when the key fob is within 3 feet
11 inches (1.2 meters) of the sensors. The key
fob needs only to be on the driver!s person or
in a non-metallic container such as a bag. It
does not need to be exposed or handled.
NOTE: To prevent theft, only use the key
fob in the immediate vicinity of the
vehicle.
The key fob locks and unlocks the following:
• the doors (including fuel filler flap)
• the luggage compartment
• the center console stowage
compartment
▲
In vehicle sensor
Left-hand door sensor
Right-hand door sensor
Cup holder sensor
♦
1.
2.
3.
4.
♥
✤
☛
✟
✒
✍
☛
✝
✵
✓
✒
✌
✠
✡
◆
✥
✠
✤
✡
✑
✌
✔
✍
✍
✟
✒
❋
✌
☛
✠
✴
✡
✔
✔
✡
✍
✡
✴
❭
Keyless entry
❴
❽
PENING AND CLOSING
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
❀
❥
✬
✼
✸
WARNING: The key fob allows the
engine to be started and is also used
to activate other features on the
vehicle.
➍
❽
PENING AND CLOSING
Take the key fob with you, every time
you leave the vehicle.
the unlock button. The front, rear and side
turn signals (market specific) flash twice and
the anti-theft alarm system will be
deactivated.
❖
♦
♥
The unlock button operation changes
depending whether the DRIVER or BOTH is
selected in the vehicle settings, see Door
Unlock, page 3.24.
✔
✔
✡
✠
❑
✦
✒
♠
❍
✡
✑
✌
✡
✴
✵
✥
✔
☛
✳
✓
✍
✝
✥
✡
♠
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
✌
✝
✒
✍
✵
☛
✓
✒
❚
NOTE: Do not expose the key fob to high
levels of electromagnetic radiation.
Doing so may cause it to function
incorrectly. For example close proximity
to laptops, tablets, personal media
players, or cell phones.
Outcome
Button
Single Press
If BOTH is selected, a single
press of the button unlocks
both doors.
If DRIVER is selected, a
single press of the button
unlocks the driver!s door. A
second press (after a pause)
unlocks the passenger!s
door.
If BOTH is selected, a
double press of the button
unlocks both doors and
unlatches the driver!s door.
Double Press
If DRIVER is selected, a
double press of the button
will unlock and unlatch the
driver!s door only.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
❽
PENING AND CLOSING
Opening a door
fully discharged battery, the vehicle can still
be opened using the mechanical key, see
Unlocking - discharged battery, page 5.24.
WARNING: Always stand to the rear of
the door before opening it, as the
opening action may cause injury. The
speed that the door opens will be
affected by ambient temperature.
NOTE: When the door is opened, the
window will lower slightly. It will raise to
the closed position once the door is
shut. If the window does not lower, for
example, due to a discharged battery or
freezing temperatures, take care when
opening and closing the door. Do not
force the door during opening or closing,
as this could lead to the door seals or
window becoming damaged.
❫
☛
✒
✌
✌
✓
✡
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
✠
❍
NOTE: Ensure the key is within a 3 feet
11 inches (1.2 meters) range of the door
sensors when using the keyless entry
feature.
✟
✡
✝
☛
✡
✥
✠
✡
(1) firmly to unlock and
unlatch the door.
❑
❏
✡
✒
✌
✑
✳
✓
✒
☛
✡
✡
✮
✌
✭
✟
☛
✪
❈
✻
✻
✓
✌
✠
❤
✒
✦
✰
✪
☛
✓
✹
❈
❅
✭
✡
✠
✟
✓
✽
✱
✒
✦
✴
❄
✶
❀
NOTE: Do not stow the key fob in the
center console stowage compartment,
in the cup holders, in the stowage nets
between the seats, or on the shelf
immediately behind the seats as the
system may not detect its presence and
the engine will not start.
✗
NOTE: If the message "key not found in
vehicle! appears on the instrument
cluster, reposition key fob until it is
detected.
♦
fob stays on your person when you are in the
car. If, however, you wish to stow the key fob
within the car, ensure that it is not left in plain
view.
♥
✡
NOTE: Because the door opens outwards
and then upwards, ensure sufficient side
and overhead clearance before opening
a door, see Vehicle dimensions,
page 6.7.
2. If keyless entry is used, the front, rear
and side turn signals (market specific)
will flash twice, and the anti-theft alarm
system will be deactivated.
3. The door latch will then release, allowing
the door to be partially raised before it
automatically swings outwards and
upwards. The mirrors will unfold if folded.
✴
✡
✑
✵
✌
✌
✟
✑
✌
✤
✡
✤
☛
✡
✧
✧
✒
✝
✡
✠
✔
✥
✌
✥
✥
✠
✌
♠
✓
✴
✝
✡
✔
✠
➋
✒
Stowing the key fob
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
❽
PENING AND CLOSING
➜
➝
➞
➢
➜
➙
↔
➔
➔
➛
➡
➠
➟
➙
➞
➝
➜
➛
➙
↕
↔
➣
➔
→
➔
➓
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
Locking a door
on the unlock button will automatically
lower the windows. The windows will
continue to lower until the unlock
button is released or the windows are
fully lowered.
✒
✒
✠
♠
✤
✟
✥
✔
☛
✳
✒
✍
✡
✡
❁
❙
✒
✒
✠
✤
✡
✑
✌
✡
✔
✒
✍
❁
✗
NOTE: If the vehicle is unlocked using
the key fob but the doors or luggage
compartment are not opened, the
vehicle will relock after 30 seconds.
❢
♦
♥
page 1.9.
2. To lock the vehicle using the key fob,
press the lock button. The front, rear and
side turn signals (market specific) flash in
a rapid, circular sequence around the
car. The anti-theft alarm system is
activated.
3. If using the keyless entry feature, pass
your hand over the non-contact lock
sensor (1) on in the side pod.
NOTE: Ensure the key is within a 3 feet
11 inches (1.2 meters) range of the door
sensors when using the keyless entry
feature.
NOTE: The lock sensor will recognize a
single touch.
PENING AND CLOSING
NOTE: The car can be locked/alarmed
with the luggage compartment open. A
long tone sounds to alert you to this
condition, and differs to the short tone
sounded for door open/key in car
mislock. The luggage compartment will
become alarmed as soon as the luggage
compartment lid is closed. This will allow
you to connect a McLaren supplied
battery charger to the charging point in
the luggage compartment whilst leaving
the rest of the vehicle locked.
➜
✌
☛
✡
✧
✌
✠
✟
✒
✧
❑
✝
✡
✟
✳
✍
✓
✳
✳
✡
✑
✌
✔
✠
✒
♠
✒
✤
✡
✑
✌
✠
✡
✑
✌
✥
✡
✦
lid or the service cover are left open, or the
key fob is still inside the vehicle, an audible
"mislock! signal will sound when an attempt to
lock the vehicle is made.
NOTE: If the doors are open or the key
fob is still inside the vehicle, a
momentary sounding of the alarm horn
will alert you.
❦
Check that the doors, the luggage
compartment lid and the service cover are all
closed, then relock the vehicle.
♦
NOTE: When the door is opened the door
glass will lower slightly to avoid contact
with other parts of the vehicle. When the
door is closed the glass will raise to the
closed position automatically. If for any
reason the door glass does not raise it is
likely that the system has sensed a #trap$
event. This can be caused by debris in
the glass channel or misalignment of the
glass. Ensure there are no obvious signs
of debris in the glass channel, and hold
the lock button. The glass will raise
providing the door is correctly closed
and there are no obstructions
preventing it raising. If the glass does not
close, or the glass repeatedly fails to
automatically raise, contact your
McLaren Retailer.
❄
on the lock sensor will automatically
raise the window. The window will
continue to raise until the lock sensor is
released or the window is fully closed.
4. The turn signals flash to indicate that the
anti-theft alarm system is activated.
♥
➝
➞
➢
➜
➙
↔
➢
➤
→
➞
➣
➟
➙
➞
➝
➜
➛
➙
↕
↔
➣
➔
→
➔
➓
➒
➑
➐
➏
Mislock
➎
❽
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
❽
PENING AND CLOSING
✠
✡
✔
♠
✡
✔
☛
✳
✔
✟
✓
✌
❑
✒
✑
✌
✥
✍
✡
◆
Locking and unlocking from inside
❋
✟
✠
✌
✍
✌
☛
✴
✡
✓
➥
✡
✠
✦
✓
✒
✦
✴
❄
Individual settings
you can change the locking system so that
only the driver!s door is unlocked, see Auto
Door Lock, page 3.23.
✒
✍
✝
✵
✒
✌
☛
✒
✌
✌
✓
✥
☛
❍
✳
✒
✍
✍
✝
✵
✟
✠
✌
☛
✡
✝
✡
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
✠
✗
If only the driver!s door has been configured
to unlock, the passenger!s door can only be
unlocked by either pulling the passenger!s
door internal handle, pressing the unlock
button on the key fob again or by unlocking
the car from the central locking button on the
center console.
❧
♦
♥
the vehicle, the light in the button will
illuminate to indicate that the vehicle is
locked.
2. Press the central locking button again to
unlock the vehicle and the light in the
button will be extinguished.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
✤
☛
✟
✔
✤
✠
✟
☛
❋
✤
✠
✒
❋
✒
✒
✤
✡
✑
✌
✍
✍
✓
➧
✑
✔
❑
✓
WARNING: Keep hands and other
objects clear of the door edge when
closing. This is particularly important
for vehicles fitted with soft close
latches as the door will automatically
continue to the fully closed position
when the first catch has engaged.
There is no anti-trap feature
preventing the door closing if an item
or body part is trapped between the
door and the door aperture, serious
injury and vehicle damage may occur.
If the window does not close, this may be due
to an anti-trap event. Try one of the following:
• reopen and close door
• press lock button on key fob to request
window close
• lock vehicle using button on underside
of door panel
➦
NOTE: When the door is opened, the
window will lower slightly. It will raise to
the closed position once the door is
shut. If the window does not lower, take
care when opening and closing the door.
Do not force the door during opening or
closing, as this could lead to the door
seals or window becoming damaged.
ensure that it latches securely.
♦
NOTE: Because the door opens outwards
and then upwards, ensure sufficient side
and overhead clearance before opening
a door.
1. Pull door handle upwards, in direction of
arrow, and push the door outwards until
the opening mechanism takes over. The
door will then swing outwards and
upwards automatically.
♥
at any time, even if it has been locked. Open
the doors only if the vehicle is stationary and
road and traffic conditions permit.
✗
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
✌
✡
✤
✥
✔
☛
✥
✧
✒
✠
✦
✤
✡
☛
✡
✒
✡
Closing a door
❑
☛
✟
❍
✝
✠
✒
✒
✤
☞
Opening a door from inside
❽
PENING AND CLOSING
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
❽
PENING AND CLOSING
✒
✍
✝
✵
✌
☛
✡
✧
✌
✠
✟
✒
✧
❑
✝
✡
✟
✳
✍
✓
✳
✡
✳
✑
✌
✤
☛
✟
✔
✠
✒
✒
✤
✡
✑
❚
Automatic locking
automatically after the vehicle has driven
away.
NOTE: The doors unlock automatically in
an accident if the force of the impact
exceeds a predetermined level.
✌
☛
✔
♠
✡
◆
✡
✠
✌
✥
✟
❑
✌
☛
✟
➩
✔
✓
✒
✓
☛
✥
✌
☛
✒
✝
✦
✒
✌
☛
✡
◆
✡
✡
✑
✌
☛
❄
The automatic locking function is selectable
in the vehicle settings section of the
instrument cluster, see Auto Door Lock,
page 3.23. If automatic locking is ON, the
interior central locking button will illuminate
once the vehicle locks on drive away.
press the button (1) for a few seconds. The
window will continue to raise until you
remove your hand from the button. Only
attempt this if the above methods do not
resolve the problem.
➨
♥
♦
♥
NOTE: Do not force the door closed, the
door seals or window could be damaged.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
❽
PENING AND CLOSING
❀
❈
✸
➭
➭
✽
✪
✱
❈
✼
✱
✻
✻
●
❈
✽
✯
❅
✪
❞
❡
✪
❅
❝
❊
✾
✸
✱
✹
❝
❜
❛
be very hot and there is a risk of
severe burns. Only open the service
cover from the side of the vehicle.
WARNING: There is a risk of injury if
the service cover is open, even when
the engine is not running.
Engine components become very hot
and there is a risk of severe burns.
♥
2. From the side of the vehicle, lift the
service cover. The hinge will support the
cover in the raised position.
See Topping up the engine oil, page 5.3.
See Topping up the coolant, page 5.6.
♥
WARNING: If the engine is stopped
due to the Eco Start-Stop System, the
engine may restart without warning.
1. Press the release button on the rear
edge of the driver!s door, the service
cover will open slightly.
♦
The engine ignition system carries a
high voltage. Never touch ignition
system components; ignition coils,
ignition wiring (spark plug
connections).
♥
❵
✸
➭
✪
➫
Service Cover
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
❽
PENING AND CLOSING
➲
➝
➝
↕
➣
➙
➛
➣
➡
↔
➠
➞
➤
➛
➟
↔
➟
➟
→
➝
➛
➢
➐
➒
➑
➐
➯
be very hot and there is a risk of
severe burns. Only close the service
cover from the side of the vehicle.
NOTE: The luggage compartment is
located at the front of the vehicle.
✹
✸
✱
➭
✸
➫
A message will display on the instrument
cluster if the luggage compartment is
open when pulling away.
✪
Press the service cover down squarely from
the side of the vehicle and ensure that the
cover latches securely.
➏
➎
❈
❀
only open if the vehicle is stationary and
neutral is selected.
✸
➭
➭
✽
✪
✱
❈
✼
✱
✻
✻
●
❈
✽
✯
❅
✪
❞
❡
✪
❅
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
Closing
➯
Luggage compartment
✷
♥
♦
♥
key fob, the luggage compartment will
fully unlock and open slightly.
✡
✑
✌
☛
✒
☛
✒
✌
✌
✓
❍
✡
✔
✟
✡
✍
✡
✠
✡
✳
✟
✳
✳
✓
✍
✡
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
✠
✗
2. Alternatively, press the center console
button to fully unlock and slightly open
the luggage compartment.
3. Lift the front of the luggage
compartment lid, the gas struts will
support it in the fully open position.
1. Pull the luggage compartment lid down
firmly and ensure that it is latched
securely.
NOTE: Do not leave the key fob in the
luggage compartment, as the vehicle
may lock, and you may be locked out of
the car.
NOTE: If the vehicle had previously been
locked, it will still be locked and the turn
signals will flash as the lid closes.
2. The luggage compartment will become
alarmed as soon as the luggage
compartment lid is closed.
❈
✪
✽
✪
✼
❈
✪
✭
✼
✸
✭
✪
✻
✸
✱
✻
✿
✸
✪
➭
❈
✻
✭
✿
❀
✬
✹
✪
✸
✪
✭
✰
✼
✱
❅
❀
✰
✪
✽
✱
✲
✭
✪
➭
✯
✽
✸
➍
❞
❊
❝
✾
❝
❜
❛
button
❵
trapped as you close the luggage
compartment.
✹
❃
✯
✪
❀
❈
❤
✸
✪
✸
✬
✬
❈
✸
✻
❅
✻
✪
✭
✯
✽
❞
✸
➳
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
could lock themselves in an open
luggage compartment and risk injury.
Children should be taught not to play
in or around the vehicle.
A mechanical luggage compartment internal
release button is provided as a means of
escape for children and adults in the event
they become locked inside the luggage
compartment.
The button is located in the front luggage
compartment area. The button is illuminated
green when the car is awake and flashes when
the vehicle is locked or shut down. This
operation is completely independent of
ignition state. There are 2 modes to the
button:
1. If the vehicle is in motion when the
button is pressed, the primary latch
releases to allow air to enter the luggage
compartment, but is prevented from
opening by the secondary latch.
2. If the vehicle is stationary, both latches
will release to allow the occupant to exit
the luggage compartment.
▲
♥
♦
NOTE: The car can be locked/alarmed
with the luggage compartment open.
This will allow you to charge the battery
while leaving the rest of the vehicle
locked. A long tone sounds to alert you
to this.
♥
❵
Closing
❈
PENING AND CLOSING
✹
❽
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➾
NOTE: The alarm remains triggered even
if you close the open aperture. To
silence the alarm, unlock the vehicle.
• tow-away protection
✿
✔
✔
✡
✍
✡
✴
✵
✡
✑
✌
✳
☛
✥
✪
✔
✻
➚
✓
✽
✮
✡
✍
✝
✥
✽
✿
✑
✡
✭
❈
❈
✼
◆
❅
✪
✡
✑
✻
✵
✌
✸
✹
✝
✒
✞
✱
✿
✭
❛
system or the key fob). The anti-theft
alarm system will be armed after
approximately 5 seconds.
✿
✔
✔
✡
✍
✡
✴
✡
✵
✑
✻
✪
✌
✳
☛
✥
✔
✓
✽
✿
✮
✽
✍
✝
✥
✡
➚
❈
❈
✭
✪
❅
✼
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
✻
✵
✌
✹
✱
✸
✝
✍
✒
❈
✭
✱
✶
✽
❪
✗
NOTE: The center console stowage
compartment must be closed for the
interior motion sensor or the Auto Alarm
to become armed.
☛
• center console stowage compartment
✿
2. The light in the central locking button
will illuminate for approximately
60 seconds after locking the vehicle
• interior motion sensor
✗
✧
✒
✠
✦
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
▼
✠
✓
✒
✌
✔
✴
☛
✡
◆
✡
✠
✡
★
✠
❑
✥
✍
✥
NOTE: Immobilization will only occur if
the engine is not running
The alarm system also incorporates the
following features:
✒
Remobilization occurs when a key fob is
sensed inside the vehicle.
• the luggage compartment lid
❖
✧
❍
The vehicle is automatically immobilized
when it senses that there is no key fob
present in the vehicle.
• the service cover
♥
✧
being started by an unauthorized person.
• a door
♦
✥
➵
alarm system is armed and any of the
following are opened:
♥
✡
❚
✡
✑
✌
✦
✥
✤
✡
✠
✡
✠
✌
✥
✳
✔
✳
✥
✧
✠
✟
✍
✟
✡
✍
✥
✤
✓
Immobilizer
❍
✟
✤
☛
✟
✍
✟
✓
✔
✥
◆
☞
Alarm system
✑
➀
➸
➈
➽
➈
➸
➀
➻
➺➸
➂
➸
➁
➄
➼
NTI-THEFT SYSTEM
system or the key fob), the alarm will
disarm and the light in central locking
button will stop flashing.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➵
NTI-THEFT SYSTEM
✌
☛
✡
◆
✡
✠
✒
✌
❑
✤
✡
☛
✥
✔
✡
✤
✳
✔
✥
☛
✒
✥
✌
✝
✡
✌
✒
✠
✟
❑
✟
✴
❋
➩
✒
❋
❚
Tow-away protection
any attempt to steal the vehicle by suspended
tow or by lifting onto a trailer.
The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is raised or
tilted in any way.
✠
✓
✒
1. To disable tow-away protection, switch
off the ignition, open the driver!s door
and press the button on the rear edge of
the driver!s door. The light in the switch
will illuminate to indicate that tow-away
protection has been disabled.
❫
♥
NOTE: You cannot disable tow-away
protection if the ignition is switched on.
2. Close the driver!s door and lock the
vehicle (using the keyless system or the
key fob). Tow-away protection remains
disabled until you unlock the vehicle.
♦
vehicle is being transported, e.g. loaded onto
a ferry or vehicle transporter or your vehicle is
parked on a movable surface, e.g. in a splitlevel garage.
♥
✥
✦
✴
✴
✍
✍
✟
✓
✸
☛
✟
✬
✱
✧
✻
❀
✪
☛
✬
✻
✒
✥
✌
✝
✡
✌
✭
➭
❈
✒
✮
❑
✴
✠
❣
❈
➪
✬
❣
✟
❋
➩
❋
✟
✻
✹
✒
✱
✼
❤
✸
✌
✡
✍
✱
✽
✟
✔
❍
❉
✥
✶
❈
Tow-away protection is armed approximately
30 seconds after the vehicle has been locked
and is disarmed when the vehicle is unlocked.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➵
NTI-THEFT SYSTEM
✤
✡
✠
✒
✬
✽
✸
✪
✽
✸
✬
✭
✡
✍
❑
✒
✡
❑
✦
✥
✠
✒
✔
☛
✡
✱
✿
✬
✻
✔
✬
✱
✭
✪
✻
✸
✱
✪
❅
✻
✹
✭
☛
✒
✥
✌
✒
✧
✠
✒
✥
✠
✡
✌
☛
✥
✡
✑
✱
✼
❤
✸
✌
✡
✱
✽
✍
✟
✔
❍
❉
and movement is detected inside, e.g. if
someone breaks a window or reaches into the
vehicle through an open window.
✥
✶
❈
✒
✍
✝
✵
✔
✥
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✠
✓
✒
✥
✤
✦
✴
✡
✠
✡
✠
✥
✳
✌
✔
✥
✳
✧
✠
✟
✍
✟
✡
✑
❚
Interior motion sensor
animals are to remain in the locked vehicle.
The interior motion sensor is armed
approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle
has been locked and is disarmed when the
vehicle is unlocked.
NOTE: To prevent false alarms close the
windows when leaving the vehicle and
do not hang anything on the interior
mirror.
❢
♥
♦
♥
1. To disable the interior motion sensor,
switch off the ignition, open the driver!s
door and press the button on the rear
edge of the driver!s door. The light in the
switch will illuminate to indicate that the
interior motion sensor has been
disabled.
NOTE: You cannot disable the interior
motion sensor if the ignition is switched
on.
2. Close the driver!s door and lock the
vehicle (using the keyless system or the
key fob). The interior motion sensor
remains disabled until you unlock the
vehicle.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➈
❈
✰
✭
❈
❣
✭
✪
✭
❈
✰
✸
❈
✰
✭
❣
✭
❈
✬
✫
✻
✪
❈
✽
✼
❈
✯
✸
✤
✡
✠
✥
✔
✡
✤
✡
✑
✌
✒
✌
✌
✟
✡
✔
✡
✑
✌
✡
◆
✒
✧
✠
✡
◆
✡
✍
✡
✑
✌
♠
position and release the lever to lock the seat.
WARNING: Ensure the seat is locked
in position before driving.
❦
NOTE: Ensure that there are no items of
luggage in the footwell or behind,
underneath or to the side of the seats.
This may lead to the seats being
damaged.
♥
tall or younger than 12 years of age
must be secured in a suitable child
restraint.
• If you are using a child restraint on
the passenger!s seat, move the seat
as far back as possible.
♦
seat position that allows the seat belt
to be worn correctly, but is as far
away from the front air bags as
possible. The position of the driver!s
seat must allow the driver to drive the
vehicle safely. The distance from the
driver!s seat to the pedals must be
• Children under 4 ft 5 in (1.35 meters)
♥
• All vehicle occupants must select a
✌
To reduce the risk of injuries in the
event of an accident, observe the
following:
✦
WARNING: Ensure that no one can
become trapped as the seat moves.
adjustment
✞
❅
✻
➹
✻
✽
✯
❞
❛
✰
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
WARNING: The seats can be moved
even without a key fob in the vehicle.
Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, they could be injured if a
seat is moved accidentally.
such that the driver can fully depress
the pedals. The distance between the
driver!s chest and the center of the air
bag cover must be more than
10 inches (25 centimeters). The
driver!s arms should be slightly bent
when holding the steering wheel.
• Vehicle occupants must always wear
their seat belt correctly.
• Position the passenger!s seat as far
back as is comfortable.
WARNING: McLaren Automotive does
not recommend the use of child seats
in this vehicle, but if you choose to do
so, please follow the guidelines
below:
❂
Manual seats
e driver!s seat
when the vehicle is stationary. You
may not be able to observe road and
traffic conditions and you could lose
control of the vehicle as a result of
the seat moving. You could therefore
cause an accident.
❛
❵
Safety
✥
➸
➄
➀
➈
➶
EATS
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➶
EATS
✪
❈
❅
✻
❈
✪
✽
✼
❈
✯
✸
❜
arward Adjustment
✪
❈
✰
✸
❈
✰
✭
❣
✭
✬
❈
➉
➴
✪
✻
ight adjustment
✫
✬
❥
✽
✱
✭
✪
❅
✻
✿
✪
➘
✱
✱
✿
✸
✱
❞
❡
✬
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
Manual seat backrest rake adjustment
❂
Racing seats
injury, position the backrest as close
as possible to vertical.
reaches the desired height.
NOTE: Height adjustment is only
available on the driver!s seat.
❧
♥
♦
♥
Lift the lever, move the seat backrest to the
position required, and release the lever.
➛
➢
➣
➱
➣
➔
→
➜
↔
➞
➮
➣
➛
➝
↕
➔
➔
➬
➞
➠
➝
➙
➞
➔
↕
➣
➒
➑
➐
➏
✌
✟
✡
✔
✡
✑
✌
✍
✥
✌
☛
✓
☛
✤
✠
✒
❋
✒
✑
✓
❑
✝
✌
✥
❋
✔
✡
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
✠
➎
➷
NOTE: Do not recline the seat backrest
so that it repeatedly contacts the rear
bulkhead as this could lead to damage
over time.
forward and rearward position of the
seat.
To adjust the seat, lift the lever and slide the
seat to the desired position, ensuring you can
comfortably reach all pedals and are able to
move them through their full travel.
WARNING: Ensure the seat is locked
in position before driving.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➶
EATS
✻
✿
✸
✪
❈
➹
✻
✽
✯
❈
✰
✻
❀
✪
✽
✱
✭
✻
✪
✼
✿
➹
❈
❈
❈
❈
✻
✸
✪
✻
✽
✯
✰
✰
✭
❣
✭
✪
✭
✰
✸
✰
✭
❣
✭
✬
✡
✤
✥
✔
✡
✑
✌
☛
✒
✡
✠
✟
✔
✡
✑
✝
✌
✥
✔
❋
✌
☛
✡
✧
✌
✔
✓
❹
✤
✟
✌
✟
✔
✡
✑
✡
NOTE: Ensure there are no items of
luggage in the footwell or behind,
beneath or to the side of the seats, or
the seats may be damaged.
✔
✡
✑
✝
✌
✥
✔
➦
♥
♦
♥
❋
✡
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
(1) until the seat reaches
the desired position.
✠
WARNING: Seat height adjustment
should only be carried out by your
McLaren Retailer.
of the seat base and can be used when the
vehicle is in any awake status, see Vehicle
electrical status, page 2.2.
your McLaren Retailer.
✌
✝
✟
✌
☛
✒
✝
✻
♠
✌
✸
☛
✡
✪
✿
✧
✌
✻
✔
✓
✽
➹
❹
✤
✯
❛
✰
✟
✌
✍
✥
✻
✼
✌
✱
❡
✤
☛
✰
✟
✌
✸
❈
✑
✻
✥
✳
✡
❅
❐
✹
✪
✱
✑
✌
✟
✡
✔
✠
✻
❈
➋
✒
✪
➴
luggage in the footwell or adjacent to
the seats as this may lead to the seats
being damaged or not getting full
adjustment.
❚
➉
✃
➞
➔
➛
➣
↕
➞
➙
➛
➡
↔
➛
➡
➛
➢
➣
➣
↔
➢
➣
➛
➡
→
➔
➙
➑
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
❈
➯
➳
❀
Electric seats
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
✻
✸
✿
✪
❈
➹
✻
✽
✯
✰
✻
❅
✹
✱
✪
❈
❅
✻
❀
✪
✽
❀
✱
✭
✻
✪
➳
✫
✬
❥
✽
✱
✭
✪
❅
✻
✿
✪
➘
✱
✱
✿
✸
✱
❞
❡
✬
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
Electric seat backrest rake adjustment
✼
➶
EATS
injury, position the backrest as close
as possible to vertical.
NOTE: When reclining the backrest, the
seat base will automatically move
forward, depending on its position
relative to the rear bulkhead. If the seat
base is moved backwards when the
backrest is fully reclined, the backrest
will automatically raise to prevent
contact with the rear bulkhead.
➨
✷
♦
♥
✔
✡
✑
✝
✌
✥
❋
✔
✡
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
✠
Press the switches (2) until the backrest is in
the required position.
NOTE: Do not recline the seat backrest
so that it repeatedly contacts the rear
bulkhead as this could lead to damage
over time.
WARNING: Ensure there are no items
beneath the passenger!s seat or the
occupant protection system may not
function correctly.
the desired height.
(3) until the seat reaches
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
✥
✠
✡
☛
✳
✡
✌
✔
✤
✸
☛
✱
✻
✬
✟
♠
✱
✠
✠
✠
✥
✒
➭
✽
✮
✬
✧
✠
✒
✥
✠
✡
✭
✿
❏
✌
✬
✿
✡
✪
❈
♠
✌
✟
✸
✱
✹
✡
✔
✝
✥
✦
✥
✝
✭
➴
✬
✻
❑
❙
Electric seat lumbar adjustment
✡
➶
EATS
wheel positions can be stored for up to two
drivers.
NOTE: Exterior mirror and steering wheel
positions can only be stored or recalled
using the driver!s memory buttons.
NOTE: Steering wheel position can only
be stored or recalled if electric steering
column is fitted.
♥
✷
Press and hold the memory set button (1) and
then simultaneously press one of the
memory position buttons (2) to store the
setting.
♦
Press (3) to inflate or (4) to deflate the lumbar
support.
♥
✔
✔
✡
✠
(1) to raise or (2) to lower the position of
the lumbar support.
Set the seat, mirrors, and steering wheel to
the desired positions; see Electric seats,
page 1.19, Electric steering wheel
adjustment, page 1.24 and Exterior mirrors,
page 1.38.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
●
✻
✪
✱
❈
❀
❈
❞
❝
✾
❝
❜
❛
❵
✸
✪
✸
✬
✬
✸
✻
❅
✻
✪
✭
✯
✽
✸
➳
❊
✐
✭
✬
✭
✭
✱
✐
✻
✪
✽
✼
✼
✪
✭
✮
✼
✸
❊
✻
✭
✿
✬
✫
✺
✿
❈
❈
❈
❀
➫
❞
❝
✾
❝
❜
❛
become trapped as the seat moves.
and steering wheel position, when the
vehicle is stationary. You may not be
able to observe road and traffic
conditions this could lead to you
losing control of the vehicle which
may result in an accident.
When comfort entry/exit is active, the driver!s
seat will move fully rearwards and to its lowest
position and the steering wheel will move
inwards and to its highest position when the
engine is off and the driver!s door is opened.
NOTE: Exterior mirror and steering wheel
positions can only be stored or recalled
using the driver!s memory buttons.
This assists exit from the vehicle. To switch
the feature on or off, see Comfort Entry/Exit,
page 3.24.
✡
✑
✌
☛
✠
✓
✌
✡
✠
☛
✟
✝
✓
✒
✴
♠
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
✡
✑
✮
✭
✳
✌
✻
✸
☛
✥
✻
✭
✪
✠
✡
✌
☛
✬
✡
✠
✫
✿
✺
✬
✡
✌
✦
Press the button (2) where the required
setting is stored, and hold until the seat,
exterior mirrors and steering wheel have
completed their adjustment.
NOTE: Steering wheel will only change
position if electric steering column is
fitted.
☞
NOTE: Steering wheel position can only
be stored or recalled if electric steering
column is fitted.
◆
❵
Recalling a memory position
✬
➶
EATS
driver!s seat and steering wheel to its most
recent position using the control stalk on the
left of the steering column.
✷
✷
♦
♥
NOTE: Steering wheel will only change
position if electric steering column is
fitted.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
❈
✽
✻
✪
✽
✰
❈
✪
✻
❐
✪
✡
☛
❍
✟
✝
✔
✌
✟
✡
✔
✤
✡
✌
✟
▲
4. If the comfort entry/exit function is
canceled, it will not be possible to return
the seat and steering wheel to their
previous positions using this function.
The message in the left-hand display will
disappear and the control stalk will
return to its normal use. The function will
be available when comfort entry/exit is
next used.
5. Once the seat and steering wheel have
returned to their previous positions, the
message in the left-hand display will
disappear and an audible alert will
confirm that the process has been
completed.
✷
NOTE: This function will only return the
seat and steering wheel to the position
they were in prior to the comfort
entry/exit function being used. It will not
use any of the memory positions, unless
the previous position was one of the
stored memory positions.
NOTE: The heated seat function is only
available when the engine is running.
♦
1. Pull the control stalk towards you once
to initiate the comfort entry function.
2. If at any point you wish to cancel the
function, operate the control stalk or
open the driver!s door. A message #Seat
Returning, Operate Stalk or Open Door
to Cancel$ will appear in the left-hand
display.
NOTE: Cancel the comfort entry/exit
function by starting the engine, or by
pressing a seat or steering column
switch while the seat is returning to
position.
accessed using the
climate control screen on IRIS. See Heated
seats, page 4.10.
♥
The vehicle must be awake with ignition off,
the driver!s door closed, and comfort
entry/exit ON.
3. If the seat or steering wheel are
manually adjusted before the stalk is
used, the function will be lost and will not
be available until the next time comfort
entry/exit function is used.
✡
Return Seat, Pull left Stalk or Press OK to
Clear$ is displayed on the left-hand display.
❩
✒
❚
✡
☛
❒
✑
✍
✡
❋
✍
✥
✟
✟
❍
◆
✟
✡
☛
✒
✍
✍
❍
✴
✍
✥
☛
✒
✥
❋
✌
✝
☛
✓
✦
➶
✑
❚
✡
EATS
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➁
wheel position when the vehicle is
stationary. You may not be able to
observe road and traffic conditions
this could lead to you losing control
of the vehicle which may result in an
accident.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for height
and reach.
hold the wheel
• you can move your legs freely
• you can see all the displays in the
instrument cluster clearly
Pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.
Ensure the lever is locked before driving.
✹
✸
✱
✭
✪
✪
✻
✽
✪
❅
✻
❈
➹
✻
✽
✯
✰
✮
❞
➫
✼
✸
❝
✾
❝
❜
• your arms are slightly bent when you
❊
✹
✸
✱
✭
✪
✪
✻
✽
✪
❅
✻
❈
➹
✻
✽
✯
✰
✮
❞
➫
✼
✸
❊
❝
✾
❝
❜
❛
❵
Electric steering wheel adjustment
❛
➶
Manual steering wheel adjustment
❵
➾
➇
❾
➆
➃
➂➁
❮
➀
➀
➸
➈
➅
➁
➄
➇
➀
➀
➻
➃
➂➁
❮
➀
➀
➸
➈
❰
TEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COLUMN
wheel position when the vehicle is
stationary. You may not be able to
observe road and traffic conditions
this could lead to you losing control
of the vehicle which may result in an
accident.
The steering wheel position may be adjusted
for height and reach using the column control
switch when the vehicle is in any awake
status, see Vehicle electrical status, page 2.2.
The column control switch is located on the
left-hand side of the steering column.
❖
✷
♦
♥
Push the lever (highlighted) downwards and
position the steering wheel so that:
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
• your arms are slightly bent when you
✻
♠
✔
✌
✟
✡
✔
✸
✿
✪
✝
✥
✠
✌
❈
➹
✽
✻
✝
✡
✍
✯
✰
✡
✪
✪
❅
❣
✼
✑
✌
✥
❋
✤
✸
✱
✭
✹
✡
❑
✥
✓
❑
➥
✡
✔
✥
✪
❀
✪
✻
✽
✡
✍
❈
✱
✝
✑
✥
✿
✻
✡
◆
✠
the electric steering wheel position is stored
when the seat and mirror positions are stored.
See Storing a memory position, page 1.21.
●
✡
✑
✌
◆
✥
✌
✡
♠
✝
✟
✔
✥
✌
✥
❏
✱
✻
✡
✮
✭
✻
✸
✪
✻
✭
✪
➧
✠
✌
☛
✡
✌
✠
✒
✦
✧
✒
✫
✬
✬
✝
WARNING: Ensure that your hands
are kept clear of the wheel and
column as the steering wheel moves.
NOTE: Any automatic movement can be
canceled with any input from the
column control switch.
WARNING: Ensure that your hands
are kept clear of the wheel and
column as the steering wheel moves.
❫
✷
♦
NOTE: Any automatic movement can be
canceled with any input from the
column control switch.
♥
✓
✬
❛
✻
✯
✒
✦
❄
✴
✡
✔
✥
✟
✌
✑
✕
❘
✡
❩
✥
✳
✗
Moving the column control switch in
directions 3 & 4 adjusts the steering wheel
reach, moving it closer or further away.
steering wheel and column will move fully
inwards (away from the driver) and to its
highest position when the engine is off and
the driver!s door is opened.
You can return the steering wheel and
column to its most recent position using the
control stalk on the left of the steering
column. See Comfort exit, page 1.22.
hold the wheel
• you can move your legs freely
• you can see all the displays in the
instrument cluster clearly
Moving the column control switch in
directions 1 & 2 adjusts the steering wheel
height, raising or lowering the wheel!s
position.
☛
✴
Using the column control switch, position the
steering wheel so that:
2. Height: Lower
3. Reach: Away
4. Reach: Towards
✡
❯
✺
✿
NOTE: The column control switch will
only adjust the steering wheel in one
direction at a time.
✑
➶
TEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COLUMN
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➶
TEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COLUMN
✒
✌
✍
✡
✡
✑
✥
☛
❋
✠
✳
✡
✡
✌
✔
✡
✑
✌
✦
✒
✠
✡
✌
☛
✡
✝
✡
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
✠
Horn
operate the horn.
❢
✷
♦
♥
NOTE: The horn can be operated when
the ignition is switched off.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➽
➸
➀
➼
➄
➈
❽
➁
➄
❿
➆
➆
❾
➸
CCUPANT SAFETY
• is routed as low as possible across
•
•
•
•
•
your pelvic area, i.e. across your hip
joints and not across your abdomen
fits closely
is not twisted
is routed across the middle of your
shoulder
lies flat across the mid point of the
collar bone between the neck and
shoulder
fits closely across your pelvis by
pulling the shoulder belt upwards
Avoid wearing bulky clothing.
WARNING: The seat belt only provides
its intended degree of protection if
the seat backrest is positioned close
to vertical, and the occupant is sitting
upright.
Do not route the belt across sharp
edged or fragile objects especially if
these are on or in your clothing The
seat belt could be damaged and you
could be injured.
Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Never allow children to travel on the
lap of another occupant.
Children under 4 ft 5 in (1.35 meters)
tall or younger than 12 years of age
must be secured in a suitable child
restraint. Follow the manufacturer!s
instructions when installing child
restraint systems.
WARNING: Pregnant women should
wear a seat belt to ensure maximum
safety of mother and unborn child.
Position the lap belt across the hips,
beneath the abdomen and position
WARNING: The seat belt cannot
perform its function correctly if the
seat belt or buckle becomes
excessively dirty or damaged. Ensure
the belt latch engages the buckle
fully.
Check the seat belts regularly to
ensure that they are not damaged, or
routed over sharp edges and are not
trapped. The belt could tear in an
accident, causing injury to occupants.
Have seat belts checked if the belts
have been damaged or subjected to a
heavy load. Work on the seat belts
should only be carried out by your
McLaren Retailer.
❦
Ensure that the belt:
the shoulder belt between the breasts
and to the side of the abdomen.
Ensure the belt is not slack or twisted.
✷
WARNING: A seat belt which is not
worn, worn incorrectly, or has not
been engaged fully in the seat belt
buckle, cannot perform its intended
function. To avoid injuries, ensure
that all vehicle occupants wear their
seat belt correctly at all times.
Do not secure any objects with a seat
belt if the seat belt is being used by a
vehicle occupant.
♦
most effective means of restraining vehicle
occupants from impact forces, which
minimizes the danger of injury from interior
impacts and the effects of whiplash.
♥
✡
✑
✌
✡
✠
✟
✔
✧
✡
✌
✔
✔
✌
☛
✴
✥
✟
✠
✌
✔
✡
✠
✤
✍
✥
✑
✝
✤
☛
✟
✔
✌
✍
✡
❍
✌
✟
✡
❙
Seat belts
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
The belt tensioner will be triggered for each
seat belt, provided the belt latch is engaged in
the seat belt buckle, if a head-on or rear-end
collision occurs and the vehicle decelerates
or accelerates rapidly.
If the belt tensioners are triggered, a bang will
be heard, a small amount of dust may be
released and the Supplementary Restraint
System warning light will illuminate.
❧
✷
♦
♥
Belt tensioners do not pull occupants
back towards the backrests.
✠
✡
✌
✔
✥
✧
✥
✍
✡
✝
✠
✒
✦
✌
✍
✡
✌
✟
✡
❍
✠
✽
✒
✒
✝
✠
❑
✭
✿
✪
✻
✱
✥
✔
✌
☛
❀
✼
✪
✱
✍
✭
✡
✬
✫
✻
✼
✪
❍
✌
✟
✡
✔
WARNING: Belt tensioners do not
correct an incorrect seating position
or incorrectly worn seat belts.
✩
and the controls are within easy reach.
2. Grasp the seat belt latch and pull across
the body, ensuring that the belt lies flat
across the mid point of the collar bone
between the neck and shoulder, then
across the chest and pelvis.
WARNING: Do not insert the belt latch
into the passenger!s seat belt buckle
if the passenger!s seat is unoccupied.
The belt tensioners could be triggered
in an accident.
WARNING: Once triggered (or if you
are unsure if they have triggered) you
MUST not drive the vehicle. Contact
your nearest McLaren Retailer
immediately.
❚
✟
✌
✠
✍
✴
❍
✒
✦
✧
✒
✝
✤
✡
✌
✟
✡
✔
✡
✠
✟
✓
✒
✌
✟
✴
✑
✌
✡
✠
✓
✔
☛
❳
✗
Belt tensioners apply tension to the seat belts
in an accident, pulling them tight against the
occupant.
✡
✠
✡
✔
☛
✒
✥
✔
☛
✡
✌
✌
✍
✡
✡
❍
✭
✪
✸
✬
✱
✽
✸
✪
✻
✻
✽
✌
✟
✠
✒
✠
❑
✒
✝
☛
✥
✔
✌
✍
✡
❍
✌
✼
❈
✪
✻
❤
✟
✡
✡
✑
❚
✪
➴
3. With the belt correctly positioned insert
the latch into the buckle and press until
a click is heard to confirm engagement.
Check engagement by attempting to
pull the latch from the buckle.
✑
Wearing a seat belt
✔
❽
CCUPANT SAFETY
Belt force limiters are tuned to the front air
bags and gradually release the tension being
applied to the belts during an impact,
reducing the force exerted on occupants.
❽
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
CCUPANT SAFETY
✿
✪
✻
✽
✮
✽
✹
❤
❛
✭
☛
✥
air bags:
• driver!s front air bag in the steering
wheel
✳
✍
✍
✒
❋
✒
✦
✡
✑
✌
✑
✌
✥
✡
✤
❋
✓
✥
❑
➥
❑
✡
✔
✥
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
▼
✠
✓
• passenger!s front air bag in the
dashboard
• driver!s and passenger!s knee air bags
• side head air bags in the doors
WARNING: Correct operation of the air
bags can only occur if the steering
wheel, the passenger!s air bag cover,
the knee air bag cover and the door
trim are not covered.
➦
✷
WARNING: Take note of all warning
labels attached to the sun visors.
♦
✒
❴
instrument cluster and a warning tone
reminds vehicle occupants to fasten their
seat belts. The seat belt warning light
extinguishes and the warning tone ceases
when the driver and passenger have fastened
their seat belt.
WARNING: Air bags are not a
substitute for correctly worn seat
belts, they enhance the level of
occupant protection offered by seat
belts.
♥
✱
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✌
✑
✍
☛
✥
☛
✥
✳
✳
✠
✟
✍
✡
✌
❋
✌
✟
❍
✡
✔
✡
✑
❚
Seat belt warning light
❈
Supplementary Restraint System
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➨
▲
♦
♥
•
❈
✽
✹
❈
❈
❤
✭
✱
✻
❅
✻
✽
✰
✸
✿
✪
✿
✬
❀
✪
✭
❈
✸
✪
are replaced every 15 years to
prevent air bags from not firing due to
component operating life.
✧
✡
✌
✔
✔
✴
✳
❍
✟
✸
✠
✥
✟
✡
❀
❈
✬
✑
✱
✻
✫
✱
✌
✥
✤
✒
✦
✴
✱
✿
✰
✿
✬
✧
✒
✌
✪
✻
✽
✴
✠
✟
✔
✔
✡
✮
❈
✽
✹
✡
☛
✔
✝
❛
✭
✱
❤
✥
✌
✻
✿
✸
✪
❀
❈
✪
➭
✼
✪
❈
✭
✹
✭
✱
❤
NY 10017
✭
•
New York
❃
•
750 3rd Avenue, Suite 2400
❀
•
to accommodate a person with disabilities,
please contact McLaren Automotive Inc at:
McLaren Automotive Inc.
❂
•
least 10 inches (25 centimeters) from
the air bag cover.
Do not lean forward over the
dashboard while the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not rest your feet on the
dashboard.
Only hold the steering wheel by the
outside of the rim. You could be
injured if the air bag deploys and you
are holding the inside of the steering
wheel.
Occupants, particularly children,
must not lean on the doors from
inside the vehicle.
Ensure that there are no other
objects between the vehicle
occupants and the deployment area
of the air bags.
❛
• Ensure that the driver!s chest is at
✥
air bags deploy, there is a risk of
injuries caused by an inflating air bag.
✦
✫
✬
❥
✽
✱
✭
✪
injuries in the event of an accident,
observe the following points:
❄
• Because of the high speed at which
❀
❅
✻
✪
✯
✰
✪
❞
❡
✭
✬
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
❽
CCUPANT SAFETY
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
Front air bags
❈
➹
✮
✭
✯
✸
✱
✫
✬
❥
✽
✱
✭
✪
❅
✻
✪
✯
✰
✪
❀
✽
✹
❞
❡
✭
✬
❈
❤
✭
❊
❝
✱
❈
✰
✾
❝
✪
❅
❛
❵
✪
✰
✱
➴
console is NOT illuminated, see
Occupant classification system - front
passenger!s seat, page 1.32.
❜
❽
CCUPANT SAFETY
to occupants if a side head air bag is
triggered, ensure that:
♥
NOTE: The passenger!s side head air bag
is only deployed if the passenger!s seat is
occupied.
▲
NOTE: The passenger!s front air bag is
only triggered if the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF warning light on the overhead
The side head air bags (left-hand highlighted)
are located in the upper area of each door
panel, and are deployed if the system
determines they can offer additional
protection for the head of the occupant on
the side of the vehicle on which the impact
occurs.
♦
The front air bags are deployed if the system
determines they can offer additional
protection for occupants against head and
chest injuries.
the vehicle occupants and the
deployment area of the air bags
• no accessories are attached to the
doors
• no heavy or sharp objects are left in
the pockets in clothing
• occupants, particularly children,
must not lean on the doors from
inside the vehicle
♥
✟
✳
✠
✥
✟
✌
❍
☛
✒
✠
✦
✔
❨
✠
✡
◆
✥
✠
✤
✡
(1) deploys in front of
the steering wheel and the passenger!s front
air bag (2) deploys in front of and above the
dashboard.
✑
❚
• there are no other objects between
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➹
offer additional protection for the knees and
lower body of the occupant on the side of the
vehicle on which the impact occurs.
✮
to occupants if a knee air bag is
triggered, ensure that:
✻
✸
➪
✬
✭
✫
✿
✪
✻
✽
✮
✽
✸
❀
❈
✬
✱
✻
✱
✫
❀
❈
✱
✽
✽
✼
✻
➭
✸
❀
❀
✯
➫
✔
❨
✠
✡
☛
✳
✡
✔
✔
✟
❑
✡
✑
✌
✦
✥
✡
☛
✥
✧
✠
✡
✌
✡
✤
☛
✟
✝
✧
✡
✔
✴
✡
✑
passenger!s seat
❚
the vehicle occupants and the
deployment area of the air bags
• no heavy or sharp objects are left in
the pockets in clothing
❈
NOTE: The passenger!s knee air bag is
only deployed if the passenger!s seat is
occupied.
• there are no other objects between
✌
✭
✯
✸
✱
✫
✬
❥
✽
✱
✭
✪
❀
❅
✻
✪
✯
✰
✪
❞
❡
✭
✬
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
Knee air bags
✔
❽
CCUPANT SAFETY
seat is occupied using weight sensors or a
capacitance mat fitted in the seat base, and
by checking the seat belt buckle engagement
on the passenger!s seat belt. The passenger!s
front air bag will not be active unless a specific
weight is exceeded. This allows child restraint
systems to be used on the passenger!s seat.
The status of the air bags is indicated by the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF warning light on the
overhead console.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF warning light
illuminates when the ignition is switched on
and extinguishes after 5 seconds.
The warning light will remain illuminated if the
passenger!s seat is unoccupied or if a child
seat is fitted.
✷
▲
♦
♥
The knee air bags (highlighted) are located in
the lower area of the dash board, and are
deployed if the system determines they can
NOTE: The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
warning light is always illuminated unless
the specific weight is exceeded.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
✡
✠
✟
✔
✠
✟
✳
✥
✟
❍
✡
✑
✌
☛
✒
✥
✔
✥
✍
✻
✿
✪
✸
✍
✒
✝
✟
✮
➭
✼
✬
✦
✒
✌
☛
✡
✪
❈
✰
◆
✡
✡
✹
❛
❤
✭
✱
▲
▲
♦
deployed by the Supplementary Restraints
System to protect the vehicle occupants. The
system can control the number of air bags
deployed and partially or fully inflate the
♥
WARNING: The occupant
classification system may become
affected if any form of liquid
(inclusive of rain) is spilled onto the
passenger!s seat. If the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF warning light is not
illuminated when the seat is
unoccupied, do not install a child
restraint or allow anyone to occupy
the seat. Please contact your nearest
McLaren Retailer at your earliest
convenience.
WARNING: To ensure that the
occupant classification system
functions correctly, never place
objects (e.g. a cushion) under the
child restraint system. The entire
base of the child restraint system
must be in contact with the seat at all
times. If a child restraint system is
not fitted correctly it may not provide
the intended degree of protection in
the event of an accident and may
cause injuries.
✑
WARNING: To ensure that the
occupant classification system
functions correctly, McLaren
recommends that objects are not
placed under a seat. McLaren also
recommends that additional
materials are not applied such as a
blanket, cushion, or aftermarket
equipment such as a seat cover,
heater, or massager. These items can
seriously affect how well the
occupant classification system
operates. McLaren recommends that
WARNING: Any electronic devices
that are either active or connected to
the 12V accessory socket should not
be placed on the passenger!s seat.
They can affect how the occupant
classification system operates.
✌
WARNING: If the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF warning light is not illuminated
when the child seat is fitted, the
passenger!s air bag is not
deactivated. The child could be
seriously injured if the passenger!s
air bag inflates.
WARNING: Do not place sharp objects
onto the passenger!s seat. These may
damage the occupant classification
system if they puncture the seat
cushion.
aftermarket equipment such as
covers, heaters, and massagers are
NOT used.
☛
is illuminated, the passenger!s front air bag is
not active. The side head air bag and the belt
tensioner on the passenger!s side remain
active even if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
warning light is illuminated.
❄
✌
✑
✍
☛
✥
☛
✥
✳
✳
✠
✟
❋
◗
➋
➋
❬
☞
♣
☞
❄
❘
❳
❘
❲
❳
♣
❙
❙
☞
✡
❽
✌
✦
❄
✑
CCUPANT SAFETY
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
The system uses sensors to rapidly evaluate
the collision severity, the number of vehicle
occupants, each occupant!s weight, their
physical size and their seated position in
relation to their air bags. Once all these
factors are known the system will then deploy
the necessary air bags and regulate the
inflation pressure in the impact zone to
ensure the occupant!s safety.
After an accident the air bags begin to
depressurise almost immediately after the
inflation process has taken place. The gas
used to inflate the air bags escapes through
vents in the air bag and this helps reduce the
occurrence of major impact injuries to the
occupants.
❖
▲
♦
♥
➫
➫
☛
✡
✡
✟
✔
❍
✑
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
▼
✠
✓
✒
✴
☛
✥
✬
✱
✻
✸
✧
✡
✌
✔
✴
✳
✔
✱
✽
✬
➫
✫
✟
✠
✥
❍
✟
✻
✡
✑
An air bag slows down and restricts the
movement of the vehicle occupant reducing
the load on the body, but is not a substitute
for a correctly worn seat belt.
❚
✯
➫
WARNING: After an air bag has been
triggered, air bag parts are hot, do not
touch them. Have the air bags
replaced at your McLaren Retailer.
tested for the correct small child Out Of
Position (OOP) operation. OOP can occur if a
small child is incorrectly positioned in the
passenger!s seat in the event of a collision in
which the air bags are deployed.
✹
❈
✸
✱
✸
✭
✿
❣
✪
✻
➴
✽
✮
❈
✻
✸
✱
✭
✻
❜
✽
✪
❈
✮
✭
✻
✿
✸
✪
➭
➭
✪
✼
➴
✧
✡
✌
✔
✴
❙
✌
☛
✥
✟
✠
✌
✔
✡
❘
✟
✌
✠
✴
☛
✡
✧
✡
✍
❑
❑
✓
❙
✡
✑
light
❚
collision to provide the best possible
protection to the vehicle occupants.
✯
✡
✑
✌
✦
✒
✌
✥
✠
✡
WARNING: If the air bags are
deployed, a bang will be heard and a
small amount of fine powder may be
released. The noise will not damage
your hearing and the powder does not
constitute a health hazard nor does it
imply that a fire has broken out. This
powder could cause short term
breathing difficulties for persons
suffering from asthma or other
respiratory conditions. To prevent
breathing difficulties, leave the
vehicle as soon as possible or open a
window.
✴
◆
✡
✔
✡
✑
✌
☛
✒
✥
✤
☛
✳
☛
✡
✤
✡
❑
✔
✟
✳
✠
✥
❍
✟
❽
CCUPANT SAFETY
performs a self-test at regular intervals
when the ignition is switched on and the
engine is running.
The warning light in the instrument cluster
illuminates when the ignition is switched on
and extinguishes 5 seconds after the engine
is started.
WARNING: Contact your McLaren
retailer immediately should any of
the following occur:
• the warning light does not illuminate
when you switch on the ignition
• the light does not extinguish
5 seconds after the engine is running
• the light illuminates again, after the
engine has started
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
❽
CCUPANT SAFETY
✿
✤
☛
✡
✧
✧
✒
✝
✡
✠
✌
✒
☛
✔
✡
✻
✽
✮
✽
✪
✒
✤
✡
◆
✥
✌
✒
✻
✱
✭
✻
✽
✪
✭
✰
✼
✱
❅
✸
✧
✒
✌
✓
☞
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
✌
✑
✥
✳
✡
❯
✠
✴
Category 0+s
Up to 28 lb (13 kg)
Category I
20 to 40 lb (9 to 18 kg)
Category II
34 to 55 lb (15 to 25 kg)
Category III
48 to 80 lb (22 to 36 kg)
❫
Please refer to current national and state laws
for specific requirements.
▲
An unsecured or incorrectly
positioned load increases the risk of
injury to the child during sharp
braking, a sudden change of direction
or an accident.
Up to 22 lb (10 kg)
♦
Do not carry heavy or hard objects
inside the vehicle unless they are
secured.
Category 0
♥
Do not expose the child restraint
system to direct sunlight. The metal
parts of the child restraint system
could burn the child.
✒
If children open a door, they could
cause injury to others in doing so or
get out of the vehicle and possibly
injure themselves or they could be
injured by a passing vehicle.
✳
In some instances, the fuel system will also be
switched off.
✡
• the interior lighting will switch on
Secure any child under 4 feet 5 inches
(1.35 meters) tall or younger than 12 years of
age traveling in the vehicle in an appropriate
category restraint according to their weight.
Contact your McLaren Retailer for advice.
✌
• the hazard warning lights will switch on
the use of child seats in this vehicle, but if you
choose to do so, please follow the guidelines
below:
✟
• the doors will unlock
unsupervised in the vehicle even if
they are secured in a child restraint.
Children could injure themselves on
parts of the vehicle, open a door and
be seriously or even fatally harmed by
prolonged exposure to heat or cold.
❁
in an accident the following events will occur
to assist you and any recovery personnel:
▼
✺
❈
✸
✪
✭
✰
❀
✼
✱
❅
❈
✪
✲
✪
✼
✻
✬
✸
❞
✬
✶
❝
✾
❝
❊
❜
❵
✤
✡
◆
✍
✒
◆
☛
✥
✡
✌
✒
❍
✑
✓
✒
☛
✳
✡
✡
✌
✟
☛
✓
✌
✠
✒
✦
☛
✓
✡
✠
✟
✓
✒
✦
✴
❄
Safety features
❛
Child passengers
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
❽
CCUPANT SAFETY
is fully rearwards and is positioned at
the lowest height. A manual
passenger!s seat does not have
height adjustment.
❢
▲
♦
♥
WARNING: If a forward facing child
seat is fitted to the passenger!s seat,
make sure that the passenger!s seat
✧
✡
✌
✔
✔
✴
❄
❙
❄
❭
✸
❀
✱
✻
✬
✟
✯
✸
✑
✌
✥
❋
✤
✫
❈
✸
✱
✭
✻
✽
✪
✭
✰
✻
✡
✌
✌
✥
✦
✔
✥
☛
✡
✠
✟
✾
➴
❀
✱
✼
✞
✝
▼
❅
✾
➌
✠
✓
WARNING: If the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator does not illuminate, do
not use a rearward facing child
restraint system on the passenger
seat. You may use a forward-facing
child restraint system on the
passenger!s seat. The warning label
on the passenger!s side is there to
remind you of this.
✒
facing child restraint system on the
passenger!s seat if the passenger!s
front air bag is active. The status is
indicated by the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF indicator.
❴
❈
✰
✭
❈
❣
✭
❈
✪
✭
❀
✪
✭
✯
✪
✽
✭
✪
❞
❝
✲
✪
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
WARNING: If the child restraint
system has not been fitted correctly,
the child cannot be restrained in an
accident or sudden braking and could
be injured. When fitting a child
restraint system, observe the
manufacturer!s instructions on the
correct use of the child restraint.
which is an automatic locking seat belt on the
passenger!s side designed to temporarily lock
the seat belt to securely hold the child
restraint in the passenger!s seat.
1. Extend the passenger!s seat belt fully.
The KISI system only engages when the
seat belt is fully extended.
NOTE: If the vehicle is parked on a hill the
inertia lock may stop the seat belt
extending. If this occurs, release the seat
❈
✽
❈
✪
✹
❀
✭
✬
❅
❈
✸
✻
✸
✱
✭
✻
✽
✪
✭
✰
✼
❈
✽
✪
✹
✭
❈
❀
✬
✱
❅
✺
❊
❞
❅
➭
✸
❈
✻
✽
✭
WARNING: When fitting a child
restraint, always pass the upper
tether strap over the top of the seat
back.
An upper tether anchorage is provided on the
passenger!s seat.
Install the child seat and pass the upper tether
strap over the top of the seat back, secure it
to the anchorage and tighten fully.
❦
Once the child restraint is installed, test the
security of the installation, before seating a
child. Attempt to twist the child seat from side
to side and to pull it away from the vehicle
seat, to check it is securely in place.
▲
Always ensure that if an upper tether
is provided, it is secured and
tightened fully, as this provides
maximum protection for a child.
♦
✪
❅
✭
❝
✾
❝
❜
❵
❛
are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, harnesses or for
attaching other items or equipment
to the vehicle.
♥
NOTE: The KISI system will disengage
when the seat belt has fully retracted
and can then be worn as a normal seat
belt. Once the KISI system has unlocked,
it will be necessary to fully extend the
seat belt to engage the KISI system the
next time a child restraint is used.
✻
❡
seat belt carefully to avoid the
engagement of the inertia lock.
2. Pass the seat belt through the child
restraint as described by the child
restraint manufacturer and engage the
belt latch in the buckle.
3. Adjust the belt so that the lower section
is tight against the restraint and allow
the upper section to retract. The KISI
system will click as the belt retracts.
4. When the seat belt has retracted as far as
possible, pull on the upper section to
check that the seat belt has locked.
✪
➛
➢
➣
➜
➙
➛
➣
➛
➞
➣
➛
→
➙
↕
➣
➙
➞
➤
➜
➬
➙
↔
➝
➣
➢
➟
↕
➝
➔
➣
➝
➮
CCUPANT SAFETY
➛
❽
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➈
✪
❅
✻
✐
✽
✻
✪
❈
❥
✭
✿
✿
✪
✬
❞
✾
✽
✸
❝
✾
❊
❵
✭
✰
✪
✭
✬
✫
❞
✪
✩
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❝
Exterior mirrors
❜
Interior mirror
iving, adjust all
mirrors to give the best possible view
of road and traffic conditions.
❛
❵
Safety
❛
❮
❾
❮
❮
➂
➾
IRRORS
exterior mirrors have convex glass
fitted. This type of mirror enlarges the
field of vision, but reduces the size of
the image. This means that objects
are closer than they appear.
✡
✑
✌
✦
✒
☛
✒
✥
✌
✝
☛
✓
✦
☛
✥
✧
✳
✧
✥
✤
✝
✥
✌
✟
✧
✒
✌
✓
✟
✡
✑
❚
To avoid misjudging the distance to
vehicles traveling behind and
perhaps causing an accident, check
the actual distance of the vehicle,
before changing direction.
interior mirror is activated or deactivated by
pressing the switch (2) on the bottom of the
mirror. The indicator light (1) will illuminate
when automatic dimming is active.
When activated, the interior mirror will
automatically dim when bright light is
detected by the light sensor (3).
❧
▲
♦
♥
If reverse gear is selected or if ambient light
levels are high, the automatic dimming
function will be deactivated.
The exterior mirrors control is located on the
dashboard between the steering wheel and
the center console.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➭
☛
✡
✑
✥
❋
✤
✒
❑
✌
✌
✡
✔
✡
❍
☛
✟
✝
✔
✠
✒
✠
✠
✥
✧
✠
✒
✥
✠
✡
✌
✡
❏
☛
✒
☛
✒
✥
✌
✥
☛
✥
✡
✑
✌
✑
✝
✌
✥
❙
✔
✥
✑
✝
✌
✥
❋
✔
✡
✑
✌
☛
✡
✑
❋
✤
✡
✌
✟
✡
✑
✭
✽
✡
✠
✟
✔
✬
✠
✭
✭
✒
✠
✠
✱
✥
✪
✻
✰
✧
✠
✒
✠
✡
✌
❏
✡
✑
pressed on the IRIS screen and the engine is
running. see Heated mirror, page 4.11. They
are also heated when the ambient
temperature is below 41°F (5°C).
✴
✌
✌
✟
✼
✰
✑
✌
✒
✔
✬
✌
✡
✫
❀
❈
✱
✻
✡
❍
✔
✿
☛
✟
✬
✝
✻
✔
✠
✯
❈
✬
✭
✒
✠
✠
✥
✭
✭
✧
✠
✱
✿
✬
✱
✭
✒
✥
✠
✥
❐
➦
▲
♦
fold automatically when the vehicle is locked.
Unfolding occurs as a door is opened, not
when the vehicle is unlocked. See Auto Fold
Mirrors, page 3.23.
♥
2. Rotate the control to the left (1) to
adjust the left-hand mirror or to the right
(2) to adjust the right-hand mirror.
3. Move the control up, down left and right
to adjust the mirror to the desired
position.
✡
✌
✭
✪
❏
✡
✻
✡
✑
❚
➳
●
NOTE: If the switch remains in position
(3) the mirrors will be folded until the
switch is moved.
❳
✪
✿
reverse is engaged. This provides a view of the
ground to the rear of the vehicle. See Reverse
Mirror Dip, page 3.24.
2. Rotate the control to position (3) to fold
the mirrors.
3. To unfold the mirrors rotate the control
away from position (3).
❈
✳
❋
✳
❋
✗
☛
✒
☛
✒
✥
✌
✥
☛
✥
✡
✑
✌
✑
✝
✌
✥
❙
✗
✪
✽
✭
✪
✲
✪
✭
✸
✱
✹
✸
✱
✱
✰
✭
✬
✭
✭
✡
✑
❚
✰
✼
✬
✫
✭
✬
✭
✭
✱
✭
✬
✱
✭
✪
✻
➳
✱
✿
●
❂
Adjusting mirrors
➭
IRRORS
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➃
➂➁
➸
➻
➂➃
➇
IGHTING
✧
✟
✡
✑
✥
❍
✧
✟
❑
✍
✤
✟
✡
❩
✗
Exterior lighting
➨
❖
♦
♥
2. Headlamp lo beam
3. Turn signal/Daytime running
lamp/Sidelamp
4. Side turn signal
5. Side marker lamp
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
License plate lamp
Stop lamp/Tail lamp/Turn signal
Central high mounted stop lamp
Side marker lamp
Reflector
Reverse lamp and rear fog lamp
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
IGHTING
Rotate the control to position (A) for
automatic light control.
✸
❀
automatically in foggy conditions.
Automatic light control is only an aid,
you are responsible for the vehicle!s
lighting at all times.
off, the lo beam headlamps will also
switch off dependent on ambient light
conditions.
✡
✠
✟
✔
✟
✧
❑
✍
✤
✟
✡
✬
✼
✑
✧
✟
✭
❍
✡
✻
❀
✸
✻
✬
✒
✍
✤
☛
✟
❅
❀
✹
✱
❑
✔
✼
❈
✱
✟
✧
✿
✻
✍
✡
✤
✥
✔
✬
❛
✻
✯
✡
❚
The light switch is located between the
steering wheel and the driver!s door and has
the following positions.
Rotate the control to position (1) for
sidelamps or position (2) for headlamps. The
sidelamp warning light illuminates in the
instrument cluster.
✑
✬
❅
✻
✱
❣
✽
✻
✬
✸
✬
✰
✽
✻
❅
✹
✱
✼
❞
❡
✪
❅
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
Light switch
switched on automatically when ambient
light falls below a predetermined level.
To switch on automatic light control, turn the
light switch to position (A).
NOTE: If the vehicle detects rain whilst
the light switch is set to position (A) the
lo beam headlamps will switch on
automatically, regardless of current
external light levels.
♥
❖
♦
♥
At position (0), the lights are off with the
exception of daytime running lamps and tail
lamps.
NOTE: With the light switch in position
(A) and the fog lights switched on, the lo
beam headlamps will also switch on
irrespective of ambient light conditions.
When the rear fog lamps are switched
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
IGHTING
✌
✑
✥
✳
✍
✡
✑
✌
☛
✠
✓
✌
♠
✔
❑
✧
✟
✍
✤
✟
✡
✑
✡
✑
✌
☛
✒
✑
✝
✌
❋
✥
✷
NOTE: On your McLaren, the same
headlight lo beam setting applies for
driving on either the left-hand or
right-hand side of the road.
✟
✴
✍
✟
✌
✔
✟
❋
✵
✡
✑
✌
✑
✔
✓
✧
✔
❑
♠
✟
✡
✥
✑
❍
✒
✌
✑
✝
✌
✥
✔
✒
❋
❚
✽
➭
✿
❈
✼
✰
❈
✪
❅
✿
❈
✪
❃
❤
✬
✔
✒
❚
switch to (2).
❈
❅
✓
✒
✔
✤
✠
✟
✒
✌
✍
✍
✴
❋
✴
The hi beam headlamps warning light
illuminates in the instrument cluster.
The sidelamps warning light in the
instrument cluster illuminates.
❖
✽
➭
The hi beam headlamps operate for as long as
the stalk is held.
The sidelamps, tail lamps and license plate
lamps illuminate when the light switch is
turned to position (1).
♦
✓
✦
✍
✟
✌
✔
✡
✑
✌
✵
lamps are a combined series of Light Emitting
Diodes located around the outside of the
headlamp. The sidelamps operate at a lower
intensity than the daytime running lamps, see
Daytime running lamps, page 1.43.
♥
✼
✿
✫
❈
✼
✰
❐
✪
✍
✍
✓
✳
✴
❑
☛
✥
☛
☛
✓
✠
✡
✧
✥
✌
✟
✤
✡
✑
✌
✤
☛
✟
✔
✧
✟
✍
✡
✤
✥
✔
✡
✑
❚
Sidelamps
❈
Hi beam headlamps
from you.
The hi beam headlamps warning light
illuminates in the instrument cluster.
Pull the stalk towards you, to revert to lo
beams.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
IGHTING
➬
➔
➛
➣
↔
➡
➛
➠
➞
➝
➙
➞
➠
↔
➝
➟
➞
✃
➡
↔
➛
➡
➛
➢
➐
➒
➑
➐
when lo beam headlamps are on.
Ensure that the lo beam headlamps are
switched on or the light switch is in position
(A).
NOTE: With the light switch in position
(A) and the rear fog lights switched on,
the lo beam headlamps will also switch
on irrespective of ambient light
conditions. When the rear fog lamps are
switched off, the lo beam headlamps will
also switch off dependent on ambient
light conditions.
Press the fog light button in the center of the
light switch.
▲
❖
♦
The warning light in the instrument
cluster and the light in the switch both
illuminate.
♥
lamps which, along with the tail lights,
illuminate automatically when the ignition is
switched on even if all lights are switched off.
The sidelamps and the daytime running
lamps are a combined series of Light Emitting
Diodes located around the outside of the lo
beam headlamp. The daytime running lamps
operate at a higher intensity than the
sidelamps.
➏
➎
✳
✴
❋
➯
☛
✥
☛
☛
✓
✠
✡
✧
✥
✌
✟
Rear fog lamp
✤
✑
✌
✥
✤
✡
✌
✌
✥
✦
✔
✥
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
▼
✠
✓
✒
❴
Daytime running lamps
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
IGHTING
✡
✑
✌
✦
✥
☛
✡
◆
✡
✡
✌
✟
✠
✡
✒
✔
❑
✧
✟
✍
❑
☛
✥
☛
✳
✠
✟
✠
✟
✤
✽
➭
✿
❈
✼
✹
✸
✱
✸
✭
❈
❣
✰
✭
❈
➘
❈
❅
✪
❅
✻
✹
✸
✱
✻
✭
✪
❈
ignition is switched off. As a safety feature,
they switch on automatically when an air bag
is triggered.
➫
resistance is felt when changing lanes on a
motorway. The appropriate turn signal flashes
three times.
➭
✍
✥
✌
☛
✓
✟
✌
✍
✵
✔
✧
✟
✪
❈
✡
✹
❀
✸
✑
➧
✥
❍
✍
❅
❈
✪
✟
➪
✸
☛
✥
✳
✔
✼
❈
✼
✸
✹
✱
✽
✸
✽
☛
✠
✓
✌
✡
✑
✌
✡
✭
◆
✒
▼
✯
❡
❋
★
✟
✑
✡
✑
Hazard warning lamps
❚
Turn signals
✟
✌
✔
✍
✵
✧
✟
✡
✑
➧
✍
✥
❍
✟
☛
✥
✔
☛
✠
✳
✓
✌
✡
✑
✌
✑
✔
✓
For further information about the lighting see
Light switch, page 1.41.
downwards (1) to switch on the left-hand turn
signal.
❖
❖
♦
♥
The stalk returns to its rest position as the
steering wheel returns to its central position.
☛
✒
✌
✌
✓
❍
✔
❑
✧
✟
✍
✥
☛
✳
☛
✠
✟
❋
✤
✠
✟
★
✟
✑
✡
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
✠
The corresponding warning light in the
instrument cluster will flash.
✗
Push the turn signal/hi beam stalk upwards
(2) to switch on the right-hand turn signal.
2. All the turn signal lamps and both turn
signal warning lights in the instrument
cluster flash.
3. Press the hazard warning lamps button
again to switch off.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
IGHTING
right-hand side until resistance is felt.
The selected parking lights will then be
deactivated.
➛
↔
➢
➯
➔
➠
↔
➝
➟
➙
↕
➲
➙
➡
↔
➜
➡
↔
↔
➢
➛
➢
➣
✃
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
➷
Parking lights
✿
NOTE: This will allow parking lights on
both sides to be active at same time, and
also allows one side to be deactivated,
whilst keeping the opposite side
activated.
✒
✌
✤
✡
☛
✔
✥
✳
✡
✤
✔
✥
☛
✒
✥
✌
✝
☛
✓
✦
✧
✠
✟
✍
✟
✭
❈
❀
❈
✝
✥
☛
✟
✼
❈
✱
❑
✡
✑
attract attention by sounding the horn and
flashing the turn signal lamps repeatedly.
➬
➮
➛
➝
➙
➞
➙
↔
➤
➔
➣
➢
➟
↕
➝
➟
➙
↕
➡
↔
➠
➛
➢
➐
➒
➑
➐
activated when the ignition is switched
off.
❫
❖
♦
1. To activate the parking lights, press the
turn signal/hi beam stalk down for the
left-hand side or push up for the righthand side until resistance is felt. The
selected parking lights will illuminate
once the vehicle has been locked.
2. To deactivate the parking lights, press
the turn signal/hi beam stalk down for
the left-hand side or push up for the
♥
To switch the panic alarm off, press the
hazard warning lamps button briefly.
➏
The horn will cease after the panic alarm has
been active for a long period of time, but the
turn signal lamps will continue to flash. The
horn can be re-initiated by pressing the
hazard warning lamps button for a period of 3
seconds or more.
The panic alarm can be switched on by
pressing the hazard warning lamps button for
a period of 3 seconds or more.
➎
❚
✸
been switched on automatically, press
the hazard warning lamps button once
to switch them off.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➈
❮
➀
❿
➂
❰
➅
➁
➄
➈
❮
➀
➻
➈
➄
❰
ASHERS AND WIPERS
➭
✪
✱
❣
➴
❣
✬
✼
☛
2. Move the wiper stalk to the required
position
✦
✦
✒
✔
✠
✡
✥
❑
☛
✡
❋
✡
✠
✝
✔
✤
☛
✥
❯
✗
2. Automatic wipe
3. Slow wipe
4. Fast wipe
NOTE: Switch off the windscreen wipers
in dry weather, dirt can cause
inadvertent wiper sweeps which could
damage the wiper blades or windscreen.
☛
✡
✡
✠
✝
✔
✤
☛
✥
✑
✡
❋
✌
☛
✒
✤
✡
✌
✟
✝
✪
➭
✒
✍
✱
❀
❣
✠
✒
♠
✔
✱
❈
☛
✡
✔
✻
✿
✬
☛
✥
✻
✟
✠
☞
✯
❛
behind the interior mirror, measures the
quantity of water on the screen and operates
the wipers at the most appropriate speed.
To select, move the windscreen wiper stalk to
the automatic wipe position (2).
The wipers will wipe once. The wipe frequency
then depends on how wet the windscreen is.
Only select the automatic wipe position in
damp weather conditions or when it is raining.
❢
❖
♦
♥
To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor, see
Wiper Sensitivity, page 3.26.
☛
✒
✥
✌
✥
✔
✒
✒
✌
❑
✍
✟
✌
✔
✵
✠
✡
❑
✥
✪
➭
✱
❣
✻
✽
➉
❈
Return the stalk to position (1) to switch off.
☛
✒
✥
✌
✥
✔
✒
❑
✒
✌
✍
✵
✟
✌
✔
✠
✡
❑
✥
❋
✡
✑
✌
✡
◆
(4), to
operate the wipers at fast speed.
▼
NOTE: If the windscreen wipers are
switched on and the vehicle comes to a
halt, the windscreen wipers
automatically switch to intermittent
wipe, until the vehicle moves away.
✒
✒
✤
✡
✑
✝
✌
✥
✔
❋
✔
✥
☛
✒
✥
✌
✥
☛
✳
✥
✡
✑
✌
✡
✠
✓
✔
☛
❳
✗
❋
✡
✑
✌
✡
✒
▼
(3), to
operate the wipers at slow speed.
◆
➭
✽
✭
✪
✱
❣
✸
❀
✪
✪
✭
✽
✰
✸
✱
❣
✪
❅
✻
✹
❈
✸
✱
✻
➭
✭
✪
➫
Windscreen wipers
Return the stalk to position (1) to switch off.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➭
✓
✒
✱
✪
✔
✤
❣
✟
✒
✌
✠
❈
❅
✽
✍
✸
❣
✟
✌
✔
✠
✡
✪
✪
✭
✥
✰
✽
✡
✑
✌
✸
✍
✍
✓
✴
❋
✵
❑
❋
❑
The windscreen washers and wipers will
initially operate at a slow speed while the stalk
is held. If the stalk is held for more than 2
seconds, the wiper will operate at high speed.
❦
❖
When the stalk is released, the wipers will
complete their cycle and return to the parked
position. After a period of time the wipers will
operate once more to wipe any remaining
washer fluid from the windscreen.
♦
wiper stalk and release. The wipers will
operate once at slow speed, without
washers.
2. For a fast single wipe, push and hold the
wiper stalk down. The windscreen wipers
will perform a continuous fast wipe until
the stalk is released.
♥
✴
❍
♠
❑
❋
✳
❋
➋
NOTE: The position of the washer jets are
set during vehicle manufacture and
should not need adjusting. If a problem
occurs, consult your McLaren Retailer.
✡
✑
✌
✑
✔
✓
✍
✦
✡
✥
✠
✡
✥
✡
✍
☛
✥
✔
✒
✍
✔
✟
✠
✒
✗
✱
❵
Single wipe
❀
ASHERS AND WIPERS
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
ASHERS AND WIPERS
✡
✠
✡
✑
✌
☛
✒
✥
♠
✌
✥
✔
✒
✠
❑
✟
✵
✍
✟
❑
✧
✠
✒
☛
✡
✑
✌
✒
✌
☛
✒
✥
✌
✥
✤
✤
✟
☛
❄
Wiper park positions
are two alternative positions.
Ensure the vehicle is in accessory mode.
✡
✑
✌
✡
✝
✓
✤
✡
✠
✒
✌
✴
✍
✍
✟
✝
✥
✌
✠
✡
◆
✤
✡
✵
✠
✟
❑
✡
✠
✟
❥
❈
✔
✠
✭
➭
✡
✭
❑
❋
✥
✪
✻
✸
✡
✑
❚
✱
❵
Pull the wiper control stalk towards you, the
wipers will move through the following park
positions each time the stalk is pulled:
❥
✭
❈
➭
✪
❀
✱
✲
✭
✤
✡
✤
✵
✠
✟
✠
✟
✡
❧
❖
♦
♥
lower edge of the windscreen.
✡
✑
✌
✳
☛
✒
✍
✟
✍
✍
✴
✟
✌
☛
✒
★
✥
✠
✒
✑
✵
❑
❥
✟
✭
❈
➭
❑
✡
✠
✡
✠
✟
✔
✠
✔
✠
✡
✡
❑
❋
✥
✼
❈
❑
✥
✿
✭
✡
✑
❚
✬
❝
❋
✡
diagonally to provide
access for replacing the wiper blades, see
Replacing the wiper blades, page 5.30.
✑
❚
✪
➴
risk of damage to the wiper arms during
periods of heavy snowfall and provide access
for easier cleaning of accumulated snow.
BEFORE YOU DRIVE
➸
➼
➂
➇
➀
➈
❾
NOTE: Nose lift will be unavailable if
launch mode is active.
✯
✿
✸
✪
✪
❅
✻
✹
✸
✱
❀
✽
❀
Nose ride height can only be raised when
traveling at speeds below 31 mph (50 kph).
The nose will automatically lower at speeds
above 37 mph (60 kph).
steering column, whenever the engine is
running and the doors are closed.
Access to nose lift can be obtained by using
the menu structure, see LEFT-HAND DISPLAY,
page 3.4.
✽
Nose lift gives you the option to raise or lower
the front of the vehicle dependent on the
current vehicle ride height.
If nose lift is used when in motion, slight
adjustments to the steering feel may be
experienced, this is normal and does not
affect the operation of the vehicle.
✪
Nose Lift be used as a jacking system.
Using the Nose Lift to access the
underneath of the car may result in
serious injury.
❛
✪
❅
✻
✰
✼
✯
✬
❅
✽
✸
❀
❀
❈
✬
✱
✽
✬
✬
✸
❞
➫
✸
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
Nose Lift Operation
❵
NOTE: Nose lift lowering is available only
if the door is closed.
Hold the menu control stalk up for one
second to quickly access the menu. A
confirmation tone will be heard.
Alternatively, access nose lift using the menu
structure, see LEFT-HAND DISPLAY, page 3.4.
The left-hand display will exit after the
timeout duration has been exceeded back to
home screen if there is no activity on the
menu.
NOTE: If the nose lift icon on the righthand side of the central display is amber,
the system is not available. Do not drive
the vehicle at high speed and contact
your McLaren Retailer as soon as
possible.
See Nose Lift, page 3.12, for full information.
✥
✔
☛
✳
✓
✡
✤
✴
❍
☛
✥
✟
✌
✒
❍
✡
☛
❍
✟
✝
✌
✦
✥
✍
✡
✔
✒
☛
✒
✌
✔
✔
✡
✝
➦
❖
♦
the menu control stalk on the left of the
♥
If the nose is left in a raised position for a long
period, a system reset may occur when the
engine is next started to return the nose to
normal ride height.
✝
The front suspension can be left fully raised
for extended periods, but it may relax to a
lower level over time.
☞
➁
OSE LIFT
DRIVING CONTROLS
⑨
❷
⑥
✙
✏
✎
❷
❶
①
✡
✥
❋
◆
⑥
❸
③
✠
✡
◆
✉
❶
◗
✙
✎
⑨
③
⑥
①
✥
✧
✥
✍
✉
✤
✡
⑤
✡
❑
✔
✉
⑨
⑩
✠
❑
✡
①
❑
✓
①
❺
③
☛
✟
➊
✏
✎
✉
☛
✉
✥
☛
✥
✳
☛
☛
⑦
✳
☛
✥
①
✌
✌
✉
❶
✡
❙
❸
⑥
✓
❘
⑦
✘
✏
✎
✡
✍
✓
✦
✑
⑨
⑨
✉
✥
❋
✳
☛
✥
✍
✍
①
❸
⑥
②
①
✥
➋
✌
✏
⑦
✉
✉
⑥
⑥
①
✉
⑧
Recommended fuel..................................................................................... 2.49
⑩
✎
✎
③
t.................................................................... 2.44
✙
➊
✎
✗
✚
✎
✟
✍
✠
✡
☛
✳
☛
✥
◆
✥
✠
✤
✠
✡
✌
☛
✥
❯
③
⑤
①
③
④
③
④
①
②
③
⑦
✉
⑥
✉
✡
2.40
2.41
2.42
2.42
2.43
Normal/Road use......................................................................................... 2.45
Track use.......................................................................................................... 2.46
⑨
❷
⑥
❷
❶
✉
⑥
⑥
✍
✒
✠
✌
☛
✒
✝
①
⑧
❷
❺
⑩
✔
✝
✥
✧
✟
⑦
☛
✤
✴
✡
◆
✉
⑨
⑩
✥
✌
♥
♦
Anti-lock Braking System .......................................................................... 2.31
✷
✇
✝
☞
Active button.................................................................................................. 2.24
Handling control ........................................................................................... 2.25
Powertrain control ....................................................................................... 2.27
Launch control .............................................................................................. 2.29
♣
2.32
2.32
2.33
2.33
2.33
2.34
2.37
✎
Gear positions ................................................................................................ 2.20
Accelerator pedal position........................................................................ 2.21
Manual/Automatic mode.......................................................................... 2.21
⑩
✎
✎
❷
⑥
Using cruise control ....................................................................................
Canceling cruise control............................................................................
Increasing cruise speed .............................................................................
Reducing cruise speed...............................................................................
Resuming a stored speed..........................................................................
①
⑦
②
✉
✇
③
③
③
①
✡
❋
✥
◆
✠
⑤
✡
①
◆
③
⑨
Switching on the ignition ............................................................................. 2.3
Instruments and Warning Lights ............................................................... 2.4
Seamless shift gearbox gear positions.................................................... 2.7
Parking brake..................................................................................................... 2.9
Brake pedal...................................................................................................... 2.10
Starting/stopping the engine.................................................................. 2.11
Driving ............................................................................................................... 2.14
Exhaust Temperature Monitoring.......................................................... 2.15
Parking Sensors............................................................................................. 2.16
Rear View Camera (RVC)............................................................................. 2.17
McLaren Track Telemetry ......................................................................... 2.18
◗
Brake assist system......................................................................................
Brake disc wiping ..........................................................................................
Hill hold control.............................................................................................
Brake-steer......................................................................................................
Electronic brake pre-fill..............................................................................
Electronic Stability Control.......................................................................
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...........................................
✓
✔
✌
✟
✌
✔
✍
✟
✝
✥
✠
✌
✝
✡
✍
✡
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
STARTING AND DRIVING
DRIVING CONTROLS
➃
➂➁
➂
❮
➅
➅
➶
➄
➃
➂➁
➸
❮
➄
➸
➈
➁
TARTING AND DRIVING
✡
✑
✌
✦
✒
✡
☛
✒
✌
☛
✡
✧
✡
✍
✧
✥
✡
✤
✒
✧
✠
✡
✒
❋
❑
❋
✒
✍
☛
✥
✤
✡
✝
✒
✍
✵
✔
✪
❥
✡
✤
✒
✧
✠
✡
❋
✒
❑
❋
✒
✍
☛
✥
✤
✡
✝
✵
✒
✍
☛
✓
✔
✸
✬
✱
✻
✱
➫
❡
➴
❡
❜
❛
❡
✗
✗
✎
✡
✟
✳
☛
✥
✡
❑
♠
☛
✡
✳
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✳
❑
✒
❑
✌
✔
➧
✪
✰
✬
✿
✹
✸
✱
✲
❈
✽
✭
✪
❣
✬
✳
☛
✥
❥
✌
✠
✟
✌
❙
✸
✭
✡
✡
❙
✺
❈
NOTE: There is no timeout with ignition
on. Be aware that the battery could
become discharged.
➫
❡
➴
❡
❜
Windows and heater/air conditioning
controls operate. IRIS and instrument cluster
menus are available.
Accessory mode can also be entered by
pressing the OK button on the instrument
cluster menu stalk. The key must be present
within the cockpit area for this function to be
available.
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
✌
♠
✔
✡
✝
☛
✟
✌
✔
✧
✓
✝
✠
✥
✝
✡
✠
✟
✠
✴
✠
✡
◆
✠
✡
✤
☛
❪
✮
✭
✬
✽
✽
✪
❀
❛
❀
❛
➴
button is pressed, when car is
in Awake mode.
✰
✥
✡
✍
✝
✥
➭
✥
✡
✍
✝
✥
➴
✠
✒
✤
✡
☛
✡
✒
❑
✔
✥
✠
If there is no further activity after two
minutes, the vehicle will return to the Sleep
status.
❀
❃
✬
✑
✡
➴
button is pressed, when car is
in Accessory mode.
Time, odometer reading and battery status
are available in the left-hand display. Fuel
gauge operates in right-hand display.
If there is no further activity after 15 minutes,
the vehicle will return to the Sleep status.
✪
✪
✼
✑
✡
✷
♦
✷
✒
✒
❉
NOTE: The engine can be started from
any of the following states, except
Locked. If the car is in Sleep mode, the
START/STOP button will need to be
pressed for more than two seconds.
NOTE: If the vehicle detects the battery
charge is getting too low, it will adopt the
Awake status to conserve energy.
Accessory and Ignition will be prohibited,
but Crank will still be available. This is to
allow the engine to be started so that
battery recharging can commence.
START/STOP button
pressed, when the car is in Sleep mode.
❡
following statuses according to the criteria
detailed.
✸
✹
✪
❥
❣
✾
❈
❛
❑
✍
✍
✥
✡
✍
❋
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
❚
Vehicle electrical status
may not be able to supply enough voltage
and will activate power saving mode.
WARNING: When power saving mode
is active, the climate control and
steering will operate with reduced
effect.
NOTE: When power saving mode is
active, the message "Battery
Management Active - See Owners
Manual! appears on the instrument
cluster.
DRIVING CONTROLS
➶
TARTING AND DRIVING
✡
✑
✌
✡
✤
✥
✔
☛
✥
✔
✥
✦
✒
❍
✡
✡
✴
✑
✌
✵
✌
✟
✑
✌
✡
✠
✓
✔
☛
❳
✗
Switching on the ignition
vehicle.
3. The ignition will switch on, the oil
temperature, water temperature and
fuel gauges will operate and several of
the warning lights will illuminate as a
self-test. The instrument cluster will fully
illuminate.
2. To switch on the ignition without
starting the engine, press the
START/STOP button, without
depressing the brake pedal.
▲
♦
✷
NOTE: If the vehicle is in Awake mode,
press the START/STOP button twice with
the brake pedal released.
DRIVING CONTROLS
➶
TARTING AND DRIVING
✌
☛
✡
✠
✡
✦
✦
✥
✤
✒
✌
☛
✥
✤
✡
✤
✥
◆
✥
✤
✡
❣
✪
✱
✲
✭
➫
✪
✲
➭
❈
✮
✼
✽
✱
✶
❈
✰
➪
✸
❅
❃
✻
✫
✪
❣
✪
✱
✲
✭
➫
✪
✲
✽
✻
✿
✸
✪
✯
✭
✻
✽
✸
✱
❈
✸
✱
❂
✟
☛
❍
✝
✔
✌
✑
✍
✥
✳
☛
✥
✳
☛
✠
✟
❯
Instruments and Warning Lights
categories, according to the color that they
illuminate.
• RED, AMBER or YELLOW - indicates that a
✎
✚
✡
✠
✟
✳
❑
♠
✡
✌
✡
✧
✒
✑
✝
✟
❚
✗
fault has been detected. A fault indicated
by a RED light is more important than
one displayed in AMBER or YELLOW.
• BLUE or GREEN - indicates that a system
or feature is switched on and operating.
✌
☛
✟
✌
✠
✒
❑
✧
✥
✔
✡
✤
✥
◆
✒
✠
❑
✟
✴
✍
❑
✔
✥
✤
✤
☛
✟
✑
✌
✦
✡
✍
➩
✡
✑
❚
2. Speedometer, page 3.3
❖
♦
✷
information to the driver and will vary
depending on the mode and vehicle settings
selected.
DRIVING CONTROLS
➴
✧
✡
✌
✔
❙
✴
☛
✥
✠
✳
✒
✌
✥
☛
✒
▼
✡
✠
✓
✔
✔
✡
✠
✡
✠
✥
❚
✪
✰
✱
➪
❈
✰
✸
❅
➪
❃
✻
✫
✪
✽
✻
❃
❅
✹
✱
✹
✸
❈
✱
✸
✭
❵
➶
TARTING AND DRIVING
(TPMS), page 2.37
Turn signals, page 1.44
Seat belt warning light, page 1.29
Rear fog lamp, page 1.43
Hi beam headlamps, page 1.42
❫
♦
✡
✑
✌
✑
✒
✠
✓
✳
✑
✌
✡
✌
✟
◆
✟
☛
✥
✳
Supplementary Restraint System
warning light, page 1.34
✷
menus.
✒
✌
✍
✟
✌
✔
✵
✍
✒
✠
✌
☛
✒
✝
✡
✑
✌
✡
✔
❪
Sidelamps, page 1.42
DRIVING CONTROLS
➴
✒
✠
✌
✍
♠
☛
✒
✥
✍
✥
✌
❁
✴
✟
✌
❙
❍
✝
✥
☛
✒
✠
✌
✝
✡
✍
❳
✪
✰
✱
➪
❈
✰
✸
❅
✻
➪
❜
❅
✹
✱
✽
✻
❃
❅
✹
✱
✹
✸
❈
✱
✸
❵
Right-hand Display Overview
✭
➶
TARTING AND DRIVING
page 2.34
Turn signals, page 1.44
Engine warning light, page 2.14
Anti-lock Braking System status light,
page 2.32
Brake warning light, page 2.10
❼
✚
✡
✚
✟
✳
✠
✓
✡
❑
♠
✌
✟
✠
✡
✧
✡
❑
❚
✍
✥
◗
✗
Parking brake status, page 2.9
2. Water Temperature, page 3.36
3. Fuel Level and Range, page 3.37
4. Handling control, page 2.25
❢
♦
✷
Powertrain control, page 2.27
DRIVING CONTROLS
➶
TARTING AND DRIVING
✠
✒
✝
✥
✌
✟
✧
✒
✌
✓
✟
✠
✡
✑
✌
✥
✡
☛
✥
✔
✡
✌
✟
✠
✡
✒
✡
✍
✟
✍
✥
✟
❍
◆
✟
✡
✠
✟
✔
✠
✟
✡
✤
✠
✳
✟
✠
✒
✦
❋
☛
✡
◆
✡
✔
✍
✪
✍
✲
✱
☞
manual mode. Automatic mode is selected
unless the driver chooses manual mode, see
Manual/Automatic mode, page 2.21. If
manual mode is active, gear changes are
made using the gearshift paddles, see
Gearshift paddles, page 2.23.
✭
✶
❑
Gear changes will be automatic, unless
manual mode has been selected.
When traveling at speeds below 6 mph
(10 kph), neutral can be selected by
pressing the "N! button.
When reverse is selected and the brakes
are released, the vehicle will begin to
move slowly without any throttle use
making it useful for parking maneuvers.
✡
✑
✌
NOTE: If reverse or drive is selected at
speeds above 6 mph (10 kph), the
transmission will engage neutral, as a
self protection feature.
✳
☛
✥
✔
✟
✡
✍
✡
❘
✤
✡
✳
✟
✳
☛
✡
✔
✥
✠
✟
✳
✡
✼
❈
❲
✭
✻
✯
✪
❝
When drive is selected and the brakes are
released, the vehicle will begin to move slowly
without any throttle use making it useful for
parking maneuvers and for moving off in
queuing traffic.
✒
✠
✒
❏
✟
✡
❍
✡
✔
✠
✡
◆
✡
✠
✌
✝
✡
✍
✡
✔
♠
✔
✡
✝
☛
✟
✌
✔
✧
✓
✝
✠
✥
✝
✍
✟
✧
✠
✒
☛
✪
✽
☛
❄
✭
✪
✪
❜
brakes will allow the vehicle to move
freely, e.g. for pushing or towing. For more
information on use of neutral for towing, see
Towing for recovery, page 5.44.
✲
❦
♦
NOTE: The letter on each button will
illuminate red to identify if the vehicle is
in Drive, Neutral or Reverse.
gear when the vehicle is stationary.
When carrying out parking maneuvers that
require rapid changes from drive to reverse
and back again, it is possible to engage
reverse or drive at speeds up to 6mph
(10 kph) whilst traveling in the opposite
direction.
✷
✳
✡
✑
❚
Seamless shift gearbox gear positions
DRIVING CONTROLS
➶
TARTING AND DRIVING
Gearshift paddles
As an alternative, upshifts can be made
by pushing the left-hand paddle away
from you and downshifts can be made
by pushing the right-hand paddle away
from you.
The gearshift paddles operate irrespective of
the handling and powertrain program
selected, and there is no need to release the
accelerator pedal to change gear.
✥
✠
✡
✑
✌
✍
✍
✓
✦
✥
✌
❑
✑
♠
✔
❑
✓
ght-hand paddle towards
you. To downshift pull the left-hand paddle
towards you. The current gear position
appears in the gear position display, see Gear
Position Indicator, page 3.35.
✒
❚
WARNING: For safety, in manual
mode only, the vehicle will monitor
engine speed and may perform an
automatic gear change if necessary.
❧
♦
✷
NOTE: The single-piece paddle and
central pivot enables upshifts and
downshifts to be made using either
paddle.
WARNING: Do not change down for
additional engine braking on a
slippery surface.
NOTE: If operating the paddles in
automatic mode, the gearbox will revert
to automatic changes if an eight second
period elapses without a gear change
being made.
To immediately shift to the lowest possible
gear whilst the vehicle is moving, select and
hold a downshift on the paddle. The vehicle
will then go down through all gears
sequentially until the optimum gear is
reached or you release the paddle.
When the vehicle speed is below 6 mph
(10 kph) or the vehicle is stationary with a
gear selected, select a downshift and hold the
paddle to select neutral.
DRIVING CONTROLS
➶
TARTING AND DRIVING
✸
❈
✬
✱
✻
➭
✭
✪
✬
❈
✪
❥
✭
❤
✹
❈
✸
✱
❥
✭
➝
➝
↕
➲
➢
➙
➞
➜
➠
➛
➛
➣
➔
➙
➞
➟
➙
↕
➡
↔
➠
➙
➛
➢
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
Parking brake
✌
✑
✍
✥
✳
✔
✓
✌
✟
✌
✔
✤
✡
✥
✍
✟
❑
❑
✡
✟
✵
✠
✽
❈
✯
✻
✻
☛
❍
✳
✥
✽
✠
✵
❑
✟
✪
❈
❥
✭
✡
❤
✸
✹
✑
✌
✦
❄
✱
❈
❥
✭
➦
WARNING: If the parking brake is
manually released, the vehicle may
start to move.
♦
✑
✝
To disengage the parking brake, keep the
brake pedal depressed and push the parking
brake switch inwards, the red parking brake
applied status light in the instrument cluster
extinguishes.
✷
outwards, the red parking brake applied
status light in the instrument cluster
illuminates.
✌
✥
✡
✔
❋
✑
✌
✍
✍
✓
❑
✟
✠
✡
♠
✵
❍
✳
☛
✥
✟
✠
✵
❑
✡
✑
✌
✡
✟
✳
☛
✳
✡
✒
is flashing, the parking brake has failed
to engage/disengage. To resolve,
engage/disengage the parking brake again.
See Parking brake operation, page 2.9.
❚
slopes, turn the front wheels towards the
kerb. When parking on steep uphill
slopes, turn the front wheels away from
the kerb.
DRIVING CONTROLS
➶
TARTING AND DRIVING
✸
✱
➹
❀
✽
✻
✪
❤
✬
➭
❈
✮
✸
✪
✪
❥
✻
✬
✸
❞
✬
✶
❝
✾
❝
NOTE: It is only possible to disengage the
parking brake with the ignition on. The
parking brake can be applied in all
ignition states, including car asleep.
NOTE: In the event of total footbrake
failure, the parking brake can be applied
when the vehicle is moving to slow the
vehicle.
WARNING: Do not rest your foot on
the brake pedal while traveling as this
may overheat the brakes, reduce
their efficiency and cause excessive
wear.
➨
♥
♦
✷
WARNING: If the brake warning light
illuminates while the vehicle is in
motion, stop the vehicle as soon as
safety permits and contact your
McLaren Retailer immediately.
❈
➭
❈
❀
❈
✪
✭
✱
✯
✪
✭
➭
❈
✽
✰
✪
❥
✭
❤
❈
✽
✰
❣
✪
❝
✰
✸
❊
❞
✽
✱
✰
✽
❝
✾
❝
❜
❛
✪
❥
❵
✡
✌
✟
☛
✥
✧
✓
✍
✍
✥
✍
✍
✥
✌
❋
✑
✍
✥
✳
✳
☛
✥
✻
✹
❅
☛
✠
✱
❋
✟
✼
✹
✵
✡
✸
✟
✠
✱
❈
✸
✭
❣
✡
✑
❍
❚
✪
WARNING: The braking system is
servo assisted when the engine is
running. The brakes will still function
with the engine off, but more
pressure will be required to operate
them.
Brake disc and pad wear depends on the
driving style and driving conditions.
❈
NOTE: If the parking brake is not
manually applied it will automatically
apply when the engine is switched off.
If objects become trapped between
the pedals, you may not be able to
brake or accelerate, and this could
lead to an accident.
❥
• driver!s seat belt is buckled
period of bedding in. For the first
625 miles (1,000 km), avoid situations
where heavy braking is required.
✭
• driver!s door is closed
the driver!s footwell. Ensure that floor
mats or carpets are properly secured
and do not obstruct the pedals.
✩
manually released, it will automatically
release as the vehicle is driven off
forward, or in reverse as long as the
following conditions are met:
✭
✩
➣
➞
➙
➔
↕
➛
↔
➡
➟
➙
↕
➡
↔
➠
➛
➢
➣
✃
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
❈
➮
➷
❊
❜
❛
❵
Brake pedal
when the ignition is switched on as a
system test. If the brake warning light
illuminates at any other time, a fault is
indicated. Stop the vehicle as soon as safety
permits and contact your McLaren Retailer
immediately.
➶
DRIVING CONTROLS
TARTING AND DRIVING
✍
✝
✥
❈
❥
✭
✬
❈
✸
✽
●
❅
✬
❤
✭
❈
✸
✱
✹
✪
✪
✹
✪
✪
✸
❡
❅
✪
❞
❅
✻
✡
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✔
✥
✦
✒
❍
✴
✡
✵
✡
✑
✌
✌
✟
✑
✌
✡
✠
✓
✔
☛
❊
❝
✾
❝
➭
➭
✹
❜
✸
✱
❵
❛
➴
✬
✻
✪
✸
✱
✹
✸
✪
✪
❅
✻
✹
✸
❈
✱
✻
❳
✗
position to lock the gears. The parking
brake is the only means of preventing
the vehicle moving.
NOTE: Do not depress the accelerator
pedal when stopping the engine.
NOTE: Do not depress the accelerator
pedal when starting the engine.
Do not switch the engine off
immediately after high speed/high load
running. Allow it to run for 2 minutes so
the engine temperature returns to
normal.
1. Pull the parking brake switch outwards
to apply.
♥
♥
NOTE: If the parking brake is not applied
manually, it will apply automatically
when the engine is stopped. Automatic
application can be overridden by holding
the parking brake switch in the off
position whilst opening the driver!s door.
♦
2. Depress the brake pedal, press and
release the START/STOP button and
the engine will start.
3. If the START/STOP button is pressed
again while the engine is cranking,
cranking is stopped.
NOTE: When parking on steep downhill
slopes, turn the front wheels towards the
kerb. When parking on steep uphill
slopes, turn the front wheels away from
the kerb.
✷
the vehicle is in an enclosed space.
Exhaust fumes contain poisonous
carbon monoxide. Breathing exhaust
fumes could lead to unconsciousness
and death.
✭
✻
➴
✸
✪
❅
❣
✪
✸
✱
✹
✸
✪
✪
❅
✻
✸
✯
✭
✭
✪
❞
❝
✲
✪
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
Starting/stopping the engine
DRIVING CONTROLS
✸
❈
✬
✱
✻
➭
✭
✪
✿
✬
✪
➴
✻
✽
✿
✡
☛
✥
✡
☛
✳
✡
✑
✌
✔
✌
✔
✒
❑
✍
✴
✻
✪
✍
✟
✝
✥
✌
✟
✽
➭
✮
✽
✧
✒
✌
➪
➴
✓
✬
✟
✻
❈
✭
✻
✧
✡
➴
✻
✌
✴
✔
✬
✔
✔
✥
✑
❚
➳
❀
✮
✍
✟
✠
✌
✓
✡
☛
✌
✝
✡
✍
✡
❙
✎
➶
TARTING AND DRIVING
when conditions allow in order to reduce fuel
consumption and exhaust gas emissions and
restarts it again when required.
The following conditions must be met for the
system to automatically stop the engine:
• driver is detected as present
• driving speed exceeded 6 mph (10 kph)
since previous stop
• engine at normal operating temperature
• vehicle battery fully charged
✷
♥
♦
✷
NOTE: If the START/STOP button is
pressed for more than a second, the
vehicle will enter the Awake state for a
brief time before returning to Accessory
state if no further inputs are made, see
Vehicle electrical status, page 2.2.
☛
✑
✔
✒
❋
✡
✍
✥
✍
❍
✒
☛
❋
✝
✥
✔
✓
✌
✟
✌
✔
✟
✔
✤
✡
✡
✔
❑
❋
✒
✍
✠
✴
✡
◆
• Normal Powertrain mode active
✌
3. Press the START/STOP button. The
engine stops, the vehicle enters the
Accessory state, see Vehicle electrical
status, page 2.2. The immobilizer is
activated.
☞
• air conditioning demand not too high
in the central display.
The icon will illuminate amber if conditions
have not been met and the system is not
available.
If all conditions have been met and the
system is available, the icon will illuminate
green.
DRIVING CONTROLS
❈
❈
❀
✹
✸
✱
✻
✲
✱
✻
✪
✶
✳
❑
✴
❋
✴
NOTE: The system is active by default
when the ignition is switched on, even if
it has been previously deactivated.
✡
☛
✥
☛
✡
✡
✑
✌
✒
✌
✔
✍
✍
✟
✝
✥
✌
✟
✧
✒
✌
✓
✟
✍
✍
✥
✧
✡
✌
✔
✔
➶
✑
when the brake pedal is depressed and the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
The engine will automatically restart when
the brake pedal is released.
NOTE: If the parking brake is engaged
while the engine is stopped, the engine
will not restart when the brake pedal is
released.
☛
✒
✌
✌
✓
❍
◗
➋
➋
✧
✡
✌
✔
❙
✴
✌
❙
✒
❑
✌
✠
➩
✟
✌
❙
✒
✝
❳
✡
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
to deactivate the system. The light in the
button will illuminate and the status light in
the instrument cluster will be extinguished.
Press the button again to activate the system.
▲
♥
♦
NOTE: If the deactivation button is
pressed when the engine has been
automatically stopped, the engine will
re-start.
✷
NOTE: The engine may automatically
re-start before the brake pedal is
released in order to maintain electrical,
air conditioning or other vehicle
demand.
✠
Depress the brake pedal, disengage the
parking brake and then release the brake
pedal in order to initiate the automatic
restart.
❚
✡
TARTING AND DRIVING
DRIVING CONTROLS
➶
TARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING: If the parking brake is
manually released, the vehicle may
start to move.
❖
♥
♦
✷
• all doors are closed
following this advice:
✍
✔
✍
✴
❍
✤
✡
◆
✡
✥
✑
✝
✟
✡
✟
☛
❍
✴
✝
✹
✧
✒
✱
✲
✱
✭
✸
☛
✒
✝
✡
✰
✍
✡
✓
✦
✼
❈
❀
✱
✿
✤
✡
✬
◆
✒
✸
✬
✠
✧
➳
❀
when vehicle systems detect a fault which
may cause further damage unless vehicle or
system performance is restricted. Care should
be taken while driving in this mode. Contact
your McLaren Retailer immediately.
❄
NOTE: If the parking brake is not
manually released, it will automatically
release as the vehicle is driven off
forward, or in reverse as long as the
following conditions are met:
✴
✟
✝
✥
✌
✟
✧
✒
✌
✓
✟
✔
✡
✌
✟
◆
✥
✌
✝
✪
✰
✟
✡
✤
✬
✿
✒
✧
✡
✪
✿
✬
✧
✒
❑
✑
❅
➭
✿
❃
If the light illuminates while driving, an engine
management fault has been detected and
reduced engine performance may be
experienced. Stop the vehicle as soon as
safety permits and contact your McLaren
Retailer immediately.
❑
NOTE: During extensive parking
maneuvering the steering assistance
might feel slightly stiffer. This is normal
and designed to protect the steering
system from overheating.
✡
✌
✟
☛
✥
✧
✓
✍
✍
✥
✌
✑
✥
✳
✍
✻
❅
✹
✼
✱
✳
☛
✥
☛
✠
✟
✹
✡
☛
❋
✳
✥
✸
❈
✱
✸
✭
✪
✸
✱
❣
☛
✡
✔
✥
✑
✹
❚
✸
➳
when the ignition is on and extinguishes
as soon as the engine is started, provided no
faults exist.
✞
NOTE: The doors will lock when the
vehicle reaches a speed of
approximately 9 mph (15 kph). Auto lock
can be set in the instrument cluster, see
Auto Door Lock, page 3.23.
4. Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
✱
NOTE: Do not drive at high engine
speeds until the engine has reached
normal operating temperature.
1. With the engine running, press and hold
the brake pedal.
2. Select drive or reverse gear, or initiate an
upshift by operating the gearshift
paddles. For more information, see
Gearshift paddles, page 2.23 and Gear
positions, page 2.20.
3. Keep the brake pedal depressed and
release the parking brake switch. The red
status light in the instrument cluster will
be extinguished.
• driver!s seat belt is buckled
✧
✫
✫
✬
✪
✸
✱
✹
✸
✪
✪
❅
✻
✸
✭
✯
✻
✭
✪
❞
❝
✲
✪
❊
while driving, there will be no
assistance for the steering or the foot
brake. You will need more effort to
steer and brake and could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an
accident.
ENVIRONMENTAL: When starting from
cold, gear changes occur at higher
engine speeds. The catalytic converter
will reach its operating temperature
quicker and reduce engine emissions.
✥
❈
✮
✹
✸
✱
❣
❝
✾
❝
❜
❛
❵
✲
✱
✭
✶
❈
Driving
TARTING AND DRIVING
✌
✔
✓
✟
✑
✔
✡
❏
✠
✒
✌
✥
☛
✒
✧
✍
✔
✓
✴
✒
✓
☛
✥
✌
☛
✒
✝
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
not needed.
• Avoid journeys where frequent stop start
driving is involved.
• Ensure that your driving style suits the
prevailing road and traffic conditions;
allow time for smooth, progressive
acceleration and braking.
• Use a reputable fuel economy tracking
website to track your mileage and fuel
usage.
If the warnings persist, contact your McLaren
Retailer.
If the exhaust temperature remains at an
excessive level, a second warning is displayed
and Limphome mode is activated. The engine
performance will remain limited until the
vehicle is restarted.
NOTE: Catalytic converter over
temperature warnings are not likely to
be observed during normal driving and
are the result of extreme operating
conditions. For example, high exhaust
temperatures can be caused by
extended track driving, maintaining high
❫
engine.
• Switch off the air conditioning when it is
The vehicle speed should be reduced as soon
as this message is observed. Refrain from
maneuvers involving high engine speed and
high engine load (full throttle) to allow the
exhausts to cool. The message will remain
until the temperature has reduced.
NOTE: High exhaust temperatures can
cause damage to catalytic converters
and should be avoided by practicing
careful driving.
♥
• Avoid laboring or over-revving the
If excessive exhaust temperatures are
measured, a warning will be displayed on the
left-hand side of the instrument cluster.
engine speed for long durations, and
sudden and repeated changes in throttle
demand.
♦
NOTE: Not available in all markets,
consult your McLaren Retailer.
temperatures to protect the catalytic
converters from damage caused by
overheating.
✷
Accelerate smoothly and gently from a
standing start.
• When in manual mode, avoid high
engine rpm by changing to a higher gear
as soon as possible.
The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) will
illuminate when an upshift would
maintain optimum economy.
❚
Exhaust Temperature Monitoring
➶
DRIVING CONTROLS
DRIVING CONTROLS
➶
TARTING AND DRIVING
Parking Sensors
The light around the parking sensors button
will illuminate red to indicate that parking
sensors are active.
✟
☛
✴
✒
✌
✠
✡
◆
✥
✠
✤
✡
✑
✌
✌
✠
✡
✍
✟
✔
✠
✒
✔
☛
✡
✔
✥
☛
✳
✟
✠
✵
❑
✡
✑
❚
The center sensors on the front bumper have
a range of approximately 3 feet (1 meter). The
center sensors in the rear bumper have a
range of approximately 5 feet (1.5 meters).
obstructions while maneuvering at low
speeds. The system comprises four ultrasonic
sensors in the front bumper, four ultrasonic
sensors in the rear bumper and two sounders.
Each sounder has a different pitch to indicate
whether the obstruction is at the front or the
rear of the vehicle.
❢
♥
♦
✷
The front parking sensors are automatically
switched on when the engine is running and
drive is selected. The rear parking sensors are
switched on when reverse gear is selected.
An intermittent tone is heard when an
obstruction is within range. As the vehicle
moves closer to an obstruction, the
frequency of the tone increases. When the
distance between the sensors and the
obstruction is less than approximately
1.5 feet (40 centimeters), the tone becomes
continuous.
WARNING: The parking sensors may
not detect moving objects such as
children and animals until they are
dangerously close. Always maneuver
with caution and always use your
mirrors, turn your head and look
behind you.
NOTE: The parking sensors are for
guidance only and are not intended to
replace the driver!s visual checks for
obstructions when maneuvering. The
parking sensors may not detect some
obstructions, such as narrow posts or
small obstructions close to the ground
such as kerbs.
The rear parking sensors are automatically
switched off when reverse gear is de-selected.
The front parking sensors are automatically
switched off when the vehicle speed exceeds
16 mph (26 kph) and drive is selected. If the
parking sensors have been manually
activated, by pressing the center of the
button, the front parking sensors will become
active again when the vehicle speed reduces
to 12 mph (20 kph).
The parking sensors can be switched off
manually by pressing the center of the
button, when in drive or neutral. The parking
sensors cannot be manually switched off if
Reverse gear is selected. When manually
switched off, the light around the button will
be extinguished.
DRIVING CONTROLS
➶
TARTING AND DRIVING
✍
✟
✓
✍
✴
☛
✟
✧
☛
✡
✡
✟
✔
❍
✑
✧
✡
✌
✔
✔
✡
✴
✑
✌
☛
✡
✑
❯
Rear View Camera (RVC)
switched off, both the front and rear sensors
will still switch on when reverse gear is
selected and remain on until drive or neutral
is selected again.
Each colored box starts at the rear of the
vehicle and extends 10 inches
(25 centimeters) beyond the widest point of
the vehicle and extends back, away from the
vehicle.
❦
The red static box extends back 1.5 feet
(40 centimeters) from the rear of the vehicle.
♥
NOTE: If the video feed is blurred or
unclear, carefully clean the lens with
water and a soft cloth.
A colored grid is overlaid onto the live video
feed as a guide to the proximity of visible
objects to the rear bumper of the vehicle.
♦
the center of the rear bumper. The live video
feed is displayed on the IRIS screen when the
function is active.
✷
☛
✥
✤
✡
✌
☛
✓
✒
✧
✔
✥
❁
✠
✡
✟
❘
➚
✧
✟
✥
✡
❁
❋
✠
✟
✡
✡
✑
❘
❚
If a fault is detected, a long high-pitched tone
will sound. If the sensors are obscured by dirt,
ice or snow, clean them. If the problem
persists, contact your McLaren Retailer.
DRIVING CONTROLS
➶
TARTING AND DRIVING
NOTE: The rear view camera is for
guidance only and is not intended to
replace the driver!s visual checks for
obstructions when maneuvering. The
rear view camera may not show some
obstructions in certain ambient light or
weather conditions.
NOTE: The steering guide grid will not be
displayed if a steering angle fault exists.
❧
♥
The RVC is automatically activated when
reverse gear is selected and automatically
deactivated 10 seconds after a forward gear is
selected or immediately if the vehicle!s
forward speed exceeds 6 mph (10 kph).
•
The RVC can be manually activated by
selecting REAR VIEW CAMERA from the IRIS
APPS screen.
When the RVC has been manually
activated, it can be deactivated by
touching the on-screen icon. The RVC will
also be deactivated if the screen is touched
anywhere below the status bar or any of the
physical IRIS buttons are pressed.
NOTE: The RVC cannot be manually
deactivated if it has been automatically
activated by selecting reverse gear.
•
•
•
❈
❀
❥
❡
✭
✸
❃
❀
❈
✪
✭
❂
❡
❣
✪
✱
✲
✭
✪
✲
➫
The yellow dynamic box extends back 10 feet
(3 meters) from the rear of the vehicle, with
additional lines at 6.6 feet (2 meters) and
3.3 feet (1 meter). The yellow box will curve, in
relation to steering angle, indicating the
current path of the vehicle.
♦
✪
❞
Telemetry system is intended for
track use only. The driver is
responsible for safety and
compliance at all times.
(2 meters) from the rear of the vehicle, with
an additional line at 3.3 feet (1 meter).
✷
❅
❝
✾
✌
✡
✡
✦
❼
❼
✟
✝
✵
✤
✔
❍
☛
✡
✌
✡
❏
✒
❏
✝
✥
✌
❍
✟
✌
✔
☛
✡
✡
✠
✳
✡
✑
❚
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
McLaren Track Telemetry
The McLaren Track Telemetry system
provides timing data recording and
graphical visualization for track use, e.g.
circuits and hill-climbs.
Live data recording can be triggered
manually or linked to vehicle movement.
During a recording, graphical displays
are provided for timing data,
performance delta, track maps and
vehicle speed.
Track performance can be analyzed in a
data viewer, and navigated via the lap
number, track position or track distance.
Custom track maps are created
automatically and can be manually
edited. Multiple track layouts or
configurations are supported for each
venue.
➶
DRIVING CONTROLS
TARTING AND DRIVING
Different drivers can be associated with
each recording.
• An optional camera system is integrated
to offer interior and exterior views of
track driving.
➦
♥
♦
✷
To launch the application, navigate to the
APPS screen and select MCLAREN TRACK
TELEMETRY.
DRIVING CONTROLS
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✔
✟
✳
✡
✍
✡
✤
❘
✡
✟
☛
✳
✡
✳
✔
✥
✳
✠
✼
✭
✻
❲
In automatic mode, the gearbox
automatically optimizes the shift points to
suit your style of driving by selecting the most
appropriate gear depending on:
✯
✪
❝
Automatic mode is selected unless the driver
chooses manual mode, see
Manual/Automatic mode, page 2.21.
✟
Seamless Shift Gearbox that can be operated
in automatic or manual mode.
✡
✑
✝
✌
✓
✍
✝
✍
✟
✓
✤
✤
✡
When drive is selected and the brakes are
released, the vehicle will begin to move slowly
without any throttle use making it useful for
parking maneuvers and for moving off in
queuing traffic.
♠
✡
✘
✟
✔
❑
➩
✔
✥
✒
❏
❍
✠
✟
✡
✳
Gear positions
❈
➶
✡
✑
❚
Overview
✒
❾
❮
➄
➀
➃
➸
➼
➂
➻
➈
➈
➀
➇
➾
➄
➀
➈
➈
EAMLESS SHIFT GEARBOX
brakes will allow the vehicle to move
freely, e.g. for pushing or towing. For more
information on use of neutral for towing, see
Towing for recovery, page 5.44.
• Powertrain control, page 2.27
✪
✽
✭
✪
✲
✔
☛
✒
• Braking effort
NOTE: The letter on each button will
illuminate red to identify if the vehicle is
in Drive, Neutral or Reverse.
➨
✷
♦
✷
✡
✍
❍
✟
✍
✥
✟
◆
✟
✡
✠
✟
✔
✠
✟
✡
✳
✤
✠
✟
❋
✠
✒
✦
☛
✡
◆
✡
✔
✍
✍
☞
✪
✲
✱
✭
Avoid prolonged spinning of the rear
wheels when driving on slippery surfaces
as this could damage the drivetrain.
✶
NOTE: Allow the engine and gearbox to
warm up before driving at high engine
speeds and high loads.
Gear changes will be automatic, unless
manual mode has been selected.
gear when the vehicle is stationary.
When carrying out parking maneuvers that
require rapid changes from drive to reverse
and back again, it is possible to engage
reverse or drive at speeds up to 6 mph
(10 kph) whilst traveling in the opposite
direction.
NOTE: If reverse or drive is selected at
speeds above 6 mph (10 kph), the
transmission will engage neutral, as a
self protection feature.
✡
✔
✠
✡
◆
✡
✠
✌
✝
✡
✍
✡
✔
✔
✡
♠
✝
☛
✟
✌
✔
✧
✓
✝
✠
✥
✝
✍
✟
✧
✠
✒
☛
☛
❄
✌
✌
✓
☛
✒
✥
❍
✌
✥
✔
✒
✠
✟
✡
❑
✡
✑
✳
✌
✦
✒
✡
☛
✒
✔
✔
✡
✠
• Vehicle speed
✪
❜
• Accelerator pedal position, page 2.21
➶
DRIVING CONTROLS
EAMLESS SHIFT GEARBOX
✡
✑
✌
✒
✑
✔
❋
✡
✝
☛
✡
✓
✍
✦
☛
✥
☛
✥
◆
✥
➯
✳
✠
✤
✦
✒
✡
✍
✌
✔
✠
Manual/Automatic mode
➢
➠
➲
➮
➞
➝
➛
➔
➜
➛
➛
➠
➔
➣
↔
➟
➙
↕
➝
➛
↔
➡
➣
➙
➛
➢
✴
✓
✒
❴
Accelerator pedal position
Seamless Shift Gearbox changes gear.
(10 kph), neutral can be selected by
pressing the "N! button.
With light accelerator pedal use, upshifts are
made at lower engine speeds. With firmer
accelerator pedal use, upshifts are made at
higher engine speeds.
✡
✌
✟
✥
✤
✡
✧
✧
✥
✡
◆
✡
✥
✑
✝
✟
✒
✌
✤
✡
☛
✥
✔
✡
✤
✔
✥
✸
✳
❋
☛
❣
✬
✰
✒
✤
❥
✱
✝
✥
✵
❭
➌
❀
When reverse is selected and the brakes
are released, the vehicle will begin to
move slowly without any throttle use
making it useful for parking maneuvers.
acceleration when in automatic mode.
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
✠
✡
♥
✷
♦
The gear (manual mode) or the gear position
(automatic mode) selected will be shown in
the instrument cluster.
The halo around the ACTIVE button will come
on. When selecting the different drive modes,
their respective button will become
illuminated. You can deactivate your drive
mode selection at any time by pressing the
ACTIVE button again. Press the MANUAL
button (2) to select manual mode.
✷
NOTE: Moderate accelerator pedal
pressure may also cause the gearbox to
downshift, depending on vehicle speed.
ACTIVE button (1) to switch on the
active dynamics panel.
Depress the accelerator pedal fully beyond
the pressure point, a click will be felt through
the pedal. The gearbox will downshift
immediately to the lowest appropriate gear,
and maximum acceleration will follow. Once
the pedal pressure is released, kickdown will
cease and normal gear changes will resume.
DRIVING CONTROLS
➶
EAMLESS SHIFT GEARBOX
✔
✍
✟
✴
✥
✤
✔
❑
✠
✒
✌
✟
✝
✥
✤
☛
✥
✡
✤
✒
✧
✠
✟
✡
✒
❏
❍
✳
✡
M and
the currently selected gear. All forward gear
changes are made by operating the gearshift
paddles, see Gearshift paddles, page 2.23.
✑
❚
Press the MANUAL button again to revert to
automatic mode.
An audible shift indicator will sound to
indicate that an upshift is required to
maintain optimum performance.
For setting options see Performance Shift
Cue (PSC), page 3.23.
When in manual mode and driving more
economically, the Gear Shift Indicator (GSI)
will illuminate when an upshift would
maintain optimum economy. The GSI will not
illuminate if the requested acceleration or
deceleration cannot be met with a higher
gear. See Economical driving, page 2.14.
NOTE: Only available in Normal
powertrain and handling modes.
✷
✷
♦
✷
NOTE: Not available in all markets,
consult your McLaren Retailer.
The gearbox mode indicator displays A. All
gear changes occur automatically, but if a
gearshift paddle is operated the gearbox will
adopt a temporary manual mode. This mode
will remain active for as long as the driver
continues to make manual gear changes,
each within an eight second period. The
gearbox mode indicator displays A/M, see
Gear Position Indicator, page 3.35.
DRIVING CONTROLS
NOTE: The single-piece paddle and
central pivot enables upshifts and
downshifts to be made using either
paddle.
➜
➞
↕
➡
➛
➠
➜
➙
➞
➤
➛
➔
➣
➢
➟
↕
➛
➙
↔
➔
↔
➙
➞
➞
➔
➔
➓
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
➶
EAMLESS SHIFT GEARBOX
As an alternative, upshifts can be made
by pushing the left-hand paddle away
from you and downshifts can be made
by pushing the right-hand paddle away
from you.
✽
✪
✼
✰
✰
❈
➭
✻
✫
✱
❅
✽
✭
✪
❊
❈
has elapsed without a manual gear
change being made, the gearbox will
revert to automatic mode.
The gearshift paddles operate irrespective of
the handling and powertrain program
selected, and there is no need to release the
accelerator pedal to change gear.
To immediately shift to the lowest possible
gear whilst the vehicle is moving, select and
hold a downshift on the paddle. The vehicle
will then go down through all gears
sequentially until the optimum gear is
reached or you release the paddle.
When the vehicle speed is below 6 mph
(10 kph) or the vehicle is stationary with a
gear selected, select a downshift and hold the
paddle to select neutral.
If under 6mph (10 kph) you can also press the
neutral button on the tunnel to go into
neutral.
▲
✷
NOTE: If operating the paddles in
automatic mode, the gearbox will revert
to automatic changes if an eight second
period elapses without a gear change
being made.
♦
you. To downshift pull the left-hand paddle
towards you. The current gear position
appears in the gear position display, see Gear
Position Indicator, page 3.35.
WARNING: Do not change down for
additional engine braking on a
slippery surface.
✷
✔
✤
✠
✟
❋
✒
✌
✡
✍
✤
✤
✟
❑
✤
☛
✟
✑
➩
✌
✑
✳
✥
✠
✡
✑
✌
✍
✍
✓
❑
♠
✌
✦
✥
✑
✔
❑
✓
✒
❚
WARNING: For safety, in manual
mode only, the vehicle will monitor
engine speed and may perform an
automatic gear change if necessary.
DRIVING CONTROLS
➈
➇
❾
❮
➸
➁
❾
➆
➂➁
➄
❮
➸
❮
➀
❰
❾
❿
➅
➁
➄
➃
➂➁
➇
➅
➁
➄
➻
ANDLING AND POWERTRAIN CONTROLS
✍
✒
✠
✌
☛
✒
✝
☛
✥
✟
✠
✌
✠
✡
✒
Active button
❋
☛
✤
❑
✟
✳
☛
✥
✍
✤
☛
✟
✑
✡
✑
❚
Active dynamics control
switches, on the active dynamics panel, allow
the driver to change the handling and
performance characteristics of the vehicle.
The active dynamics panel contains the
following controls, and will only function with
the engine running or the ignition switched
on.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Active button, page 2.24
Eco Start-Stop system, page 2.12
Launch control, page 2.29
Handling control, page 2.25
Electronic Stability Control, page 2.34
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✔
✔
✳
✡
✠
ACTIVE button switches on the
active dynamics panel. This activates the
launch, handling and powertrain controls. The
ACTIVE button and handling and powertrain
switches will illuminate.
❖
✷
♦
✷
1. Engine START/STOP button, see
Vehicle electrical status, page 2.2
2. Powertrain control, page 2.27
Manual/Automatic mode, page 2.21
NOTE: When the active dynamics panel
is on, the current handling and
powertrain modes will appear in orange
on the instrument cluster. When the
panel is off, the handling and powertrain
modes will appear in white.
DRIVING CONTROLS
ANDLING AND POWERTRAIN CONTROLS
✡
✑
✌
✔
✌
✝
✡
✦
✦
✟
✑
✝
✌
✥
✔
✍
✒
❋
✠
✌
☛
✒
✝
☛
✥
✍
✤
following vehicle characteristics:
• Adaptive damping
✹
✸
✱
✻
✻
✪
✽
❈
✹
✸
❀
✱
✻
✪
✼
✪
➴
• ESC settings
2. Rotate the handling control to select
one of the following settings.
❫
✷
♦
✷
✡
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
✠
ACTIVE button to switch on
the active dynamics panel.
✗
the controls on the active dynamics
panel will also switch off. The handling
and powertrain control settings will be
remembered but it will be necessary to
press the ACTIVE button again to
operate the controls when the ignition is
next switched on or the vehicle will
revert to automatic gear changes.
✃
✃
➞
➜
➛
➢
➲
➤
➣
↕
➔
➔
↕
➙
➞
↕
➣
↕
➙
➟
↕
➛
➢
➣
➙
➛
➢
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
✳
☛
✟
✑
✡
✑
❚
Handling control
DRIVING CONTROLS
ANDLING AND POWERTRAIN CONTROLS
Settings
Suspension at its softest
setting, offers a compliant
N Normal
ride while maintaining good
body control through corners.
Track
The suspension is at its
stiffest, giving almost race car
handling and ride
characteristics.
The Electronic Stability
Control warning light is
permanently illuminated.
❢
✷
♦
✷
• no vehicle dynamic or stability
➛
➢
➣
➙
➞
instrument cluster will change
dependent on the handling mode
selected. See Handling and Powertrain
Display, page 3.35.
NOTE: If all the following conditions are
not met when the selection is made, the
mode will not be implemented until they
are met:
• no fault conditions existing
➬
➜
↔
➝
➠
➔
↕
➜
➙
➞
↕
➣
↔
➡
➞
✃
➙
↕
➛
➢
➐
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
➯
Sport
➛
Suspension is stiffer, giving a
firmer ride coupled with
enhanced handling
characteristics.
The mode selected will remain active, until
the selection is changed, the ignition is
switched off, or the active dynamics panel is
deactivated.
interventions activated, e.g. Electronic
Stability Control;
• steering wheel in straight ahead
position, and not being turned, if the car
is moving
When the active dynamics panel is off, the
Handling display in the right-hand display will
show Normal, see Handling and Powertrain
Display, page 3.35.
NOTE: In Track handling mode, the
Electronic Stability Control system is still
in operation. For further information, see
Electronic Stability Control, page 2.34.
DRIVING CONTROLS
ANDLING AND POWERTRAIN CONTROLS
✹
✸
❦
✷
Track
Gear change strategy is at its
sharpest. Changes occur
instantly, according to throttle
response and are further
enhanced with cylinder cut
and inertia push. See Cylinder
cut, page 6.14 and Inertia
push, page 6.15.
♦
✱
✻
✽
✍
✟
✧
✠
✒
Sport
Gear changes will occur at a
higher engine speed and with
a reduced shift duration and
are further enhanced with
cylinder cut. See Cylinder cut,
page 6.14.
2. Rotate the powertrain control to select
one of the following settings.
Gear changes are configured
to offer the optimum
economy without sacrificing
the vehicle!s inherent
performance.
✷
✡
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
✠
✗
ACTIVE button to switch on
the active dynamics panel.
✻
❲
❲
✪
➴
✹
✸
✱
✻
✻
❈
✪
✽
✹
❀
✸
✱
✻
✪
✼
✪
➴
Powertrain control
DRIVING CONTROLS
✿
✿
❀
✪
✰
✬
✮
✬
✸
✬
➳
➛
➢
➣
➙
➞
➜
➛
↔
➝
➠
➔
↕
➜
➙
➞
↕
➣
↔
➡
➞
✃
➙
↕
➛
➢
➐
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
Depending on the current active shift
strategy, the word "NORMAL!, "SPORT! or
"TRACK! changes color to green when
economy mode is active. For information on
other ways to save fuel, see Economical
driving, page 2.14.
➬
➯
ANDLING AND POWERTRAIN CONTROLS
instrument cluster will change
dependent on the powertrain mode
selected. See Handling and Powertrain
Display, page 3.35.
The different gear change strategies outlined
above are only relevant with automatic mode
selected.
NOTE: When the active dynamics panel
is on, the current handling and
powertrain modes will appear in orange
on the instrument cluster. When the
panel is off, the handling and powertrain
modes will appear in white.
❧
✷
♦
✷
NOTE: The use of the Track setting on
the public road is not recommended.
The Track setting is strictly intended for
high performance track/off road use
only.
✟
☛
✴
☛
✥
✥
✌
✟
☛
✳
✠
✡
❑
✒
✔
✥
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
✌
☛
✡
✑
When the active dynamics panel is off, the
Powertrain display in the right-hand display
will show Normal, see Handling and
Powertrain Display, page 3.35.
❯
The mode selected will remain active, until
the selection is changed, the ignition is
switched off, or the active dynamics panel is
deactivated.
powertrain setting with automatic gear shifts
selected, the transmission adapts to an
economical shift strategy during periods of
gentle driving. This is determined by the
vehicle speed, acceleration, braking and road
gradient.
DRIVING CONTROLS
ANDLING AND POWERTRAIN CONTROLS
WARNING: Do not initiate launch
control unless on a track. Before
initiating launch control, ensure that
all doors, luggage compartment and
service cover are closed, and the
prevailing conditions are suitable for
performing maximum acceleration
maneuvers.
NOTE: Launch control can be operated
in either automatic or manual modes
and any handling or powertrain mode,
but only when the active dynamics panel
is activated.
NOTE: The launch sequence can be
aborted at any point by carrying out any
of the following actions:
• applying the parking brake
• pressing the ACTIVE button to switch off
✌
✑
✥
✠
✌
✟
✳
✔
✟
☛
✥
✔
✥
✍
✡
✡
❋
✑
✽
❀
✽
✪
✥
✠
☛
✳
➭
✭
✼
✬
✬
✡
✡
✌
✔
✡
✑
✭
❀
✻
✸
✬
✡
✠
✌
❀
❅
✓
✔
☛
❃
❈
❳
✸
✯
NOTE: If there is a fault or the launch
procedure has not been followed
correctly, a warning message Launch
mode unavailable - see Owners Manual
will be shown in the left-hand display.
Repeat the launch procedure, ensuring
that it is followed correctly. If the
warning message remains, contact your
McLaren Retailer.
✗
maximum acceleration from a standing start.
✡
✑
✌
✠
✡
✦
✦
✒
✒
✌
✤
✡
☛
✥
✔
✡
✳
✤
✔
✥
✍
✒
✠
✌
☛
✒
✝
✑
✝
☛
ahead position.
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly with your
left foot and select first gear.
NOTE: Launch mode is only available if
the following conditions are met:
• both doors are closed
• vehicle ride height normal and nose lift
function inactive
• atmospheric altitude has no detrimental
effect with respect to engine
performance
• engine coolant at normal operating
temperature
3. Press the ACTIVE button to switch on
the active dynamics panel.
the vehicle dynamics panel
• or pressing the launch button to switch
➦
✷
♦
off launch control
✷
✓
✟
✞
Launch control
DRIVING CONTROLS
ANDLING AND POWERTRAIN CONTROLS
✡
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
✠
✏
NOTE: To abort launch control release
the brake pedal before pressing the
accelerator pedal or wait for
approximately 100 seconds until launch
control is deactivated. The message
"Launch Aborted! will be shown in the
left-hand display.
LAUNCH button.
➨
▲
♦
✷
NOTE: L will flash in the gearbox mode
indicator, see Manual/Automatic mode,
page 2.21 and "Launch Mode Active Awaiting Throttle! will be shown in the
left-hand display.
5. With your left foot remaining on the
brake pedal, press and hold the
accelerator pedal down fully with your
right foot, the engine speed will increase
to 3,000 rpm.
NOTE: The message "Launch Mode
Active - Boost Building! will be shown in
the left-hand display. Once sufficient
boost has been achieved, the message
"Launch Mode Active - Boost Ready! will
be shown in the left-hand display.
6. Release the brake pedal with your left
foot and the launch control system will
perform a launch start to give maximum
acceleration.
NOTE: To abort launch control release
the accelerator pedal or wait for
approximately 5-10 seconds until launch
control is deactivated. If the launch is
aborted, release the accelerator pedal
and then press again to drive away. The
message "Launch Aborted! will be shown
in the left-hand display.
7. Launch control will operate if procedure
has been followed correctly until
aborted.
NOTE: Whilst in launch control, the
vehicle will carry out automatic gear
shifts, and optimize traction. It will
continue to do so until launch control is
aborted. To abort launch control, release
the accelerator pedal, apply the brake, or
operate one of the gearshift paddles.
DRIVING CONTROLS
➈
• Hill hold
• Brake-steer
• Electronic brake pre-fill
• Electronic Stability Control
WARNING: The risk of an accident
increases when driving quickly,
especially when cornering, on wet
and icy roads. Always maintain a safe
distance to the vehicle in front.
The driving safety systems described
in this section are unable to override
the laws of physics.
Always adapt your driving style to
suit the road and weather conditions
and maintain a sufficient distance
from other road users and objects on
the road.
✡
✑
✌
✔
✌
☛
✡
◆
✡
✠
✡
✧
❑
✌
✔
❙
✴
✥
☛
✳
✠
❬
✟
✵
✒
✍
✝
✵
✥
✌
☛
☞
➩
✡
The Anti-lock Braking System works from a
speed of approximately 5 mph (8 kph)
upwards, regardless of road surface
conditions. It works on slippery surfaces, even
when you brake gently.
WARNING: Do not depress the brake
pedal repeatedly in quick succession
(pumping). Depress the brake pedal
firmly and evenly. Pumping the brake
pedal reduces the braking effect.
If the Anti-lock Braking System operates
during braking, the warning light flashes, and
the brake pedal pulses as this happens.
When the Anti-lock Braking System is
activated, maintain the force on the brake
pedal until the braking situation is over.
WARNING: Always adapt your driving
style to suit the prevailing road and
weather conditions and maintain
sufficient distance from other road
users and objects on the road.
♥
• Brake disc wiping
▲
• Brake assist system
wheels from locking when you brake. This
allows the vehicle to be steered during
braking maneuvers.
♦
• Anti-lock Braking System
NOTE: In winter conditions, the
maximum effect of the Anti-lock Braking
System, brake assist system and
Electronic Stability Control can only be
achieved if you use winter tires, with
snow socks where they are necessary.
✷
following safety systems:
❚
✡
✑
✌
✌
✓
✒
✟
☛
❍
✒
✥
✌
✟
✧
✠
✒
✦
☛
✥
✔
☛
✥
✟
✌
☛
✒
✝
☛
✒
Anti-lock Braking System
✥
✌
✝
✡
✔
✔
✥
✑
❚
General
✑
➾
➀
➸
➈
➽
➈
➽
➸
➀
➼
➄
➈
➃
➂➁
➂
❮
➅
RIVING SAFETY SYSTEMS
DRIVING CONTROLS
RIVING SAFETY SYSTEMS
✡
✑
✌
✑
✌
✥
☛
✒
✥
❋
✌
✝
☛
✓
✦
✍
✟
✧
✟
✔
✥
✡
✠
✡
✑
✌
✦
❄
system, the status light will illuminate.
Do not drive your vehicle, contact your
McLaren Retailer as soon as possible.
WARNING: If the Anti-lock Braking
System malfunctions, brake assist
system and Electronic Stability
Control are also deactivated.
✷
▲
♦
✷
If the Anti-lock Braking System
malfunctions, the wheels could lock
when you brake. This may increase
the stopping distance and impair your
ability to steer.
Continue to depress the brake pedal firmly
until the emergency situation is over, the
Anti-lock Braking System prevents the wheels
from locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the brakes
will work as normal. Brake assist system is
deactivated.
WARNING: If the brake assist system
malfunctions, the brakes will still
operate. However, the braking force is
not automatically boosted and this
may increase the stopping distance.
✒
❑
✥
✥
✝
✔
✥
☛
✳
❑
❋
✤
✡
✟
erates automatically
when the windscreen wipers are switched on.
It prevents moisture build up on the brake
discs during periods of heavy rain, improving
braking performance.
✠
❬
braking situations. If you depress the brake
pedal quickly, the brake assist system
automatically increases the force applied to
the brakes and thus shortens the stopping
distance.
✵
☛
✝
✴
✡
✡
✠
✳
✧
✡
☛
✥
✔
✡
✌
✟
✠
Brake disc wiping
✡
✒
❑
✧
✡
✌
✔
✔
✌
✔
✥
✴
✔
✔
✟
✡
✟
✠
✵
Anti-lock Braking System status light
❬
Brake assist system
DRIVING CONTROLS
RIVING SAFETY SYSTEMS
vectoring differential, but is integrated into
the braking system reducing weight and
providing excellent speed of response.
✤
✡
♠
✔
✟
✡
✍
✡
✠
☛
✡
✍
✴
✤
✤
✓
✔
✔
✥
✍
✟
✤
✡
✠
✒
✌
❑
✟
✠
✡
✍
✡
✝
✝
✟
✡
✑
✌
✦
❄
✡
✓
➥
✠
✒
✌
✟
✦
✒
✔
✌
✥
✦
✡
☛
✡
✑
✌
✡
❍
✔
✠
✡
✦
✦
✒
✠
✡
✡
✌
✔
✡
✟
✠
the electronic brake pre-fill function
immediately brings the brake pads into
contact with the discs, ensuring rapid braking.
Torque vectoring gives the differential the
ability to change the amount of power that is
sent to each of the rear wheels to provide
optimum stability and traction.
If the system detects that the car is starting to
understeer through a corner, the inside rear
brake is gently applied. This helps to increase
the yaw rate of the car, making the car feel
more resistant to understeer. The lateral "g!
force is also increased giving better handling
characteristics.
▲
▲
If the driver uses too much throttle exiting a
corner, the inside rear wheel increases speed,
which without brake steer could cause the car
to become unstable. In this situation, brake
steer will again gently apply the brake on the
inside rear wheel, thereby restoring traction
and stability.
♦
❬
Electronic brake pre-fill
✷
vehicle on a hill, this function will continue to
apply the brakes for two seconds after the
pedal is released to assist a smooth start.
✵
✡
✑
✌
✤
✍
✒
✑
✒
✌
✤
✡
✥
✍
✔
✟
❑
✥
Brake-steer
❑
✍
✟
✤
✡
✡
❑
✠
✟
✵
✡
✑
✌
❍
✦
❄
Hill hold control
DRIVING CONTROLS
RIVING SAFETY SYSTEMS
❖
▲
✿
✌
✠
✟
✍
✟
✠
❑
✡
✌
☛
✥
✳
☛
✟
✔
✥
✻
✽
✮
✪
✧
✡
✌
✔
✽
✼
✬
✭
✴
✔
✍
✒
✠
✌
☛
✒
✻
❀
✸
✝
☛
✒
✥
✌
✬
❀
✸
✼
✬
✭
✻
✸
✬
✺
✮
✻
✱
✼
✱
❤
❈
✮
➴
✻
✱
❀
✻
✱
❈
✼
❤
✱
✸
✬
✭
✻
✪
✼
➳
✸
❀
✻
➴
❀
✱
✸
✬
✻
✭
✪
❅
✼
➳
✪
❵
❞
❊
❝
✹
❈
✱
✻
✸
✾
❝
❜
✲
❛
✱
❀
❵
✻
❈
✪
✶
❀
WARNING: The traction control
system cannot reduce the risk of an
accident if you drive too fast. The
traction control system is unable to
override the laws of physics.
Electronic stability control is activated
automatically as soon as the engine is
running.
♦
✬
✱
The traction control system reduces engine
torque to prevent the wheels from spinning. If
additional intervention is required to stop the
wheels from spinning, the vehicle will apply
the rear brakes individually. The traction
control system brakes individual drive wheels
to prevent them from spinning. This means
that the vehicle can accelerate on slippery
surfaces.
NOTE: Electronic stability control only
functions properly if wheels with the
recommended specification tires are
used.
✷
✟
of Electronic Stability Control.
Electronic stability control detects when a
wheel starts to spin or the vehicle starts to
skid and stabilizes the vehicle by braking
individual wheels, and/or limiting the engine
power output. This also assists when pulling
away on wet or slippery road surfaces and
stabilizes the vehicle when braking.
WARNING: If the electronic stability
control warning illuminates, do not
deactivate Electronic Stability
Control. Adapt your driving style to
suit road and traffic conditions.
✝
❈
✻
✠
✌
✡
✑
stability and traction between the tires and
the road surface.
❚
✭
❡
✥
◆
✥
☛
✳
✠
✤
✔
✠
✒
✌
✥
☛
✒
✧
✍
✒
✠
✌
☛
✒
✝
✥
✍
✥
✌
✴
✟
✌
✔
❍
✝
✥
☛
✒
✠
✌
✝
✡
✍
❳
Electronic Stability Control
Control is deactivated, the risk of the
vehicle skidding is increased. Adapt
your driving style to suit road and
traffic conditions.
WARNING: Do not deactivate
Electronic Stability Control unless on
a track and prevailing conditions are
suitable.
NOTE: When you deactivate Electronic
Stability Control, the following
conditions result:
• the "ESC OFF! warning light illuminates
• the light on the ESC OFF button
illuminates
• Electronic Stability Control no longer
improves driving stability
• the engine!s torque is no longer limited
and the drive wheels could spin
• the anti-lock braking system remains
activated
DRIVING CONTROLS
➫
✫
✫
✺
➳
✪
✰
✬
✱
✸
✮
✰
✻
✭
➴
✿
❀
✿
❈
➴
✬
✡
✤
✒
✡
✳
✧
✪
☛
✥
✍
✤
☛
✟
✰
✿
✵
✑
✬
❀
✝
✟
✠
❚
✱
✿
❈
✌
✮
✰
✸
✝
✡
✡
❙
❥
❈
✗
✭
✡
✤
✒
✧
☛
✥
✍
✤
☛
✟
✑
✝
✟
✠
❚
✠
✒
✌
✠
✒
❙
✌
✝
✡
✍
✳
✵
❑
2. If not already in a dynamic ESC mode,
press the ESC OFF button briefly to
activate a dynamic ESC mode.
3. Press and hold the ESC OFF button for
2 seconds, followed by a confirmation
press again within 5 seconds to
deactivate the Electronic Stability
Control.
ESC OFF will be displayed on the
instrument cluster and the light on the
ESC OFF button will illuminate.
❫
▲
The Electronic Stability Control is ON by
default, but allows slightly increased
wheel slip during acceleration over the
default ESC ON condition in Normal and
Sport handling modes.
2. Press the ESC OFF button briefly to
activate Track Dynamic mode which
allows a further increase in dynamic
freedom over Sport Dynamic mode.
ESC DYN will be displayed on the
instrument cluster.
♦
❡
Ensure Sport or Track handling mode is
active, see Handling control, page 2.25.
✍
Electronic Stability Control dynamic modes
can be selected at any vehicle speed.
❀
The Electronic Stability Control is ON by
default.
2. Press the ESC OFF button briefly to
activate Sport Dynamic mode which
allows more dynamic freedom over the
default ESC ON mode.
ESC DYN will be displayed on the
instrument cluster.
✷
adjusted to various dynamic modes to suit
the driver!s requirements and is dependent
on the handling mode currently active.
✡
❙
✳
❑
✗
✡
✤
✒
✧
☛
✥
✍
✤
☛
✟
✑
✌
✠
✒
❙
✌
✝
✡
✍
✡
❙
✗
✟
☛
❍
✝
✍
✒
✠
✌
☛
✒
✥
✍
✥
✌
❁
✴
✟
✌
❙
❍
✝
✥
☛
✒
✠
✌
✝
✡
✍
❳
✦
✒
✍
✡
◆
✡
✍
✡
✑
❚
Dynamic ESC modes
➭
RIVING SAFETY SYSTEMS
DRIVING CONTROLS
✪
✭
❀
✯
✰
✪
✬
✭
✸
❈
✬
✱
✻
❈
❀
✲
✱
✻
✪
✔
✥
✍
✒
✠
✌
☛
✒
✥
✍
✥
✌
❁
✴
✟
✌
❙
❍
✝
✥
☛
✒
✠
✌
✝
✡
✍
❳
☛
✡
✑
❯
Reactivating Electronic Stability Control
❜
RIVING SAFETY SYSTEMS
reactivated, the Electronic Stability Control
OFF warning light in the instrument cluster
extinguishes.
✡
✌
✟
◆
✥
✌
✝
✟
✡
✠
✒
✌
✥
☛
✳
✒
❋
✍
✍
✒
✦
✡
✑
✌
✦
✒
☛
✟
✴
✧
✠
✒
✦
✠
✡
NOTE: Electronic Stability Control is
automatically reactivated when the
ignition is next switched off and on
again.
Electronic Stability Control:
• Press the ESC OFF button briefly, the
light on the button will be extinguished.
• Change the setting on the handling
control to Normal.
• Switch the ignition off and then switch
❢
▲
♦
✷
on again.
DRIVING CONTROLS
RIVING SAFETY SYSTEMS
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring
System can suffer interference if you are
operating radio transmitting equipment
(e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios)
in or near the vehicle.
❣
✪
✱
✲
✭
✪
✿
✲
✬
✪
✻
➴
✽
✮
✹
✸
✱
✭
✬
✻
✱
❂
✬
✪
✭
✯
✽
✽
✪
✭
❡
✪
✭
✱
The system monitors the tire pressures and
temperatures in each wheel using sensors
located in each tire valve and a receiver
located within the vehicle. Communication
between the sensors and the receiver is via
Radio Frequency (RF) signals.
✿
✪
➴
✻
✽
✮
✹
✸
✱
✭
✬
✻
✱
❂
✸
✬
✪
✭
✯
✽
✽
✪
✭
✪
✭
✱
❡
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring
System will begin transmitting once the
vehicle is traveling over 6mph (10kph),
there will be a delay of up to 40 seconds
before this information is displayed on
screen.
✡
✑
✌
♠
✤
✡
✌
✝
✡
✌
✡
✤
✔
✥
✡
✠
✓
✔
✔
✡
✠
❑
✡
✠
✥
✌
✒
✍
✔
☛
✠
✟
❋
✧
❦
▲
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
warning light will illuminate along with an
associated error message in the left-hand
display.
♦
you when the pressure drops or the
temperature increases above an acceptable
level in one or more of the tires.
✷
✡
✌
✔
✴
❙
✳
☛
✥
✠
✒
✌
✥
☛
✒
▼
✡
✠
✓
✔
✔
✡
✠
✡
✠
✥
❚
✡
❋
✟
✦
❄
operation
✑
In certain circumstances it is possible that the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
pressure warning will display without the loss
of air from the tire. This may be due to
temperature variations between the locations
where the tire pressure was set and where the
vehicle is driven. For example setting
pressures in an air conditioned or heated
garage and then driving the vehicle outside
may induce a tire pressure warning after a
short period of driving. The warning may also
display when extreme ambient temperature
variations occur or during seasonal
temperature changes.
❚
each tire should be checked when cold and
inflated/deflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper inflation
pressure for those tires).
✸
☛
✡
WARNING: Never ignore a tire
pressure warning. Check tire
pressures immediately and if
necessary contact your McLaren
retailer.
♠
◆
✥
✠
✤
✒
✌
✔
✥
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
✌
✡
✧
✥
✌
✠
✡
◆
✴
✡
✒
✌
✠
✒
✥
✠
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
DRIVING CONTROLS
✍
✍
✟
✝
✡
manually checking tire pressures or
checking for wear and damage. The
system only provides a low tire
pressure warning and does not reinflate the tires.
✵
✑
✝
✍
✥
✔
✔
✡
♠
❍
✒
✔
✟
❑
☛
✒
✒
✔
✔
✟
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
✌
✒
✌
❑
❙
RIVING SAFETY SYSTEMS
your tires and inflate them to the
recommended pressure, see Tire pressures,
page 5.35. The warning light will be
extinguished once the tires have been
inflated to the correct pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
cannot alert you to damage to a tire.
Regularly check the condition of your
tires.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle!s handling and stopping ability.
WARNING: TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is
the driver!s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure warning light.
Each tire should be checked weekly when
cold and inflated/deflated to the inflation
pressure recommended on the tire inflation
pressure label.
❧
▲
♦
✷
Navigate through the "Vehicle Info! screen in
the left-hand display to view the current tire
pressures, see Vehicle Info, page 3.9.
The display shows the pressures of each of
the four tires. If the pressure figure appears in
green, no action is required. If it appears as
red text, inflate the associated tire to the
correct pressure as soon as possible.
Inspect the tire(s) for any possible causes of
reduced tire pressure.
WARNING: The tire pressures
indicated in the left-hand display will
be more accurate with a pressure
gauge. The Tire Pressure Monitoring
System is not a substitute for
WARNING: If low pressure warnings
occur frequently, have the tires
checked at your McLaren Retailer.
Driving on an under-inflated tire will
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure.
ENVIRONMENTAL: Under-inflated tires
reduce fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle!s handling
and braking characteristics.
ENVIRONMENTAL: Check tire pressures
at least every 7 days.
DRIVING CONTROLS
RIVING SAFETY SYSTEMS
✡
✠
✥
❚
✡
✑
✌
✡
✌
✤
♠
✝
✡
✌
✡
✤
✔
✥
✡
✠
✓
✌
✟
✠
✡
✡
✧
❑
✌
✡
✠
✥
✌
✑
✥
✑
✟
✳
✦
Temperature Monitoring System will display
an error message in the left-hand display.
Navigate through the "Vehicle Info! screen in
the left-hand display to view the current tire
temperatures, see Vehicle Info, page 3.9.
temperature appears in green, no action is
required. If it appears in red, the safe
operating temperature of the tires has been
exceeded. Reduce speed or stop the vehicle
until the temperatures are at a safe level, i.e.
temperatures are displayed in green.
Inspect the tire(s) for any possible causes of
increased tire temperature.
➦
▲
♦
This shows the current temperature of each
of the four tires. If the temperature appears in
blue, the tires have not yet warmed up to
optimum operating temperature. If the
✷
❄
Tire Temperature Monitoring System
operation
DRIVING CONTROLS
➇
❾
❮
➸
➁
❾
➆
➀
➂➈
❮
➆
RUISE CONTROL
✬
✻
✸
✬
✱
✻
✸
❈
✪
✻
✻
❈
✭
❀
✼
✯
➭
❈
✱
✻
✭
❈
✮
❞
❝
✾
Using cruise control
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
Overview
road and traffic conditions, when
cruise control is activated, and always
travel at a speed which is safe for the
current conditions.
Never use cruise control on winding
or slippery roads or when visibility is
poor, e.g. in fog, heavy rain or snow.
✡
✑
✌
✑
✔
✓
☛
✤
❑
✟
✤
✡
✡
✔
✤
❑
✡
✠
✥
✔
✡
✤
✡
✑
✌
✒
✌
✡
✌
✟
✠
✡
✍
✡
✝
✝
All cruise control functions are operated by
the cruise control stalk, positioned on the
right of the steering column.
☞
Cruise control allows the driver to maintain a
constant speed without using the accelerator
pedal. This is useful on motorway journeys
where a constant speed can be maintained
for long periods.
stalk up briefly, to activate cruise control. The
set speed will appear on the right-hand side of
the central display.
NOTE: Cruise control will only operate at
speeds in excess of 20 mph (30 kph).
➨
❖
♦
✷
Speed can be increased at any time by
pressing the accelerator pedal. Once the
accelerator pedal is released the vehicle will
return to the cruise speed.
DRIVING CONTROLS
RUISE CONTROL
❈
NOTE: Cruise control is canceled
automatically if Electronic Stability
Control detects wheel spin or vehicle
skid or if Electronic Stability Control is
switched off.
✻
✟
✴
✍
✟
✌
✟
❋
✵
✔
✍
✒
✠
✌
☛
✒
✝
✡
✔
✥
✓
✠
✝
✡
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
✠
✦
✍
❑
✡
✥
✠
✴
from you.
Cruise control is canceled. The indicator in
the instrument cluster extinguishes but the
last speed set remains stored.
NOTE: The last speed stored is cleared
when you switch off the engine.
♥
❖
Cruise control is also canceled if the foot
brake is pressed, if neutral is selected or if
Active Speed Limiter is selected.
♦
❬
cruise is engaged and do not override
cruise for extended periods.
Releasing the accelerator in these
circumstances could lead to the
vehicle not decelerating at the rate
you expect.
✷
❅
✻
❈
✪
✭
❈
❣
✪
❤
❈
✽
✮
❞
❛
❣
✼
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
Canceling cruise control
DRIVING CONTROLS
RUISE CONTROL
Increasing cruise speed
Reducing cruise speed
NOTE: If you decelerate using the cruise
control stalk, the gearbox may shift
down to increase the rate of
deceleration.
Downshifting manually using the gear
change paddles will not disengage cruise
control.
✷
❖
♦
✷
A brief press of the stalk downwards will
decrease the vehicle speed in 1 mph
(1 kph) decrements (depending on the
units selected, see Units, page 3.16);
• or press and hold the stalk downwards,
the vehicle will decelerate, release the
stalk when the desired speed has been
reached.
A brief press of the stalk upwards will
increase the vehicle speed in 1 mph
(1 kph) increments (depending on the
units selected, see Units, page 3.16);
• or press and hold the stalk upwards until
the desired speed is reached, then
release the stalk;
• or accelerate to the new desired speed
and push the stalk up.
DRIVING CONTROLS
RUISE CONTROL
✰
✪
✭
✬
✻
✽
✪
❅
✿
✻
✪
✯
✽
✪
✭
✮
❞
➫
✼
✸
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
Resuming a stored speed
speed if it is appropriate for the
current road and traffic conditions.
Sudden acceleration could endanger
yourself and others.
Pull the cruise control stalk briefly towards
you.
▲
❖
♦
✷
Cruise control will adjust the vehicle!s speed
to the last speed stored.
DRIVING CONTROLS
➇
➈
0➄
❮
➀
➂➸
➾
➂
➇
➅
➀
➵
❿
➈
➀
➂
➸
➆
➄
➀
CTIVE SPEED LIMITER (ASL)
➭
✰
✪
✪
❈
✽
❀
✹
✸
✱
✻
✪
✼
✪
➴
✽
✭
✪
✲
✱
✭
✰
✪
❅
✻
❞
✾
✽
✱
✻
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
Setting an upper speed limit
responsibility to keep within proper
speed limits.
WARNING: The ASL feature may allow
the vehicle to exceed the upper speed
limit in certain situations, for
example when descending steep
gradients.
NOTE: ASL can be activated when the car
is stationary. The upper speed limit will
be set to a default speed of 20 mph
(30 kph).
❖
❖
♦
✷
control stalk, to select ASL mode.
2. Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to
the maximum permitted speed.
3. Push the stalk up briefly to select the
desired ASL upper speed limit.
✡
✔
✥
✓
✠
✝
✡
✑
✌
✦
✒
✤
☛
✡
✡
✑
✌
☛
✒
☛
✒
✌
✌
✓
❍
✡
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
✠
✗
The ASL control allows the driver to set an
upper speed limit.
4. The upper speed limit appears on the
right-hand side of the central display.
DRIVING CONTROLS
➂➁
✔
●
NOTE: Failure to observe the engine and
gearbox operating limits during the
running in period may lead to premature
wear or damage.
✕
• drive at varying road and engine speeds
• do not drive faster than the maximum
☛
✥
✥
✤
☛
✳
✤
✡
✟
✥
✍
❍
✌
✥
☛
✥
☛
✟
✡
✠
✥
✓
➥
✡
✠
✔
✡
✟
✪
❥
✠
✭
❈
❫
❖
•
♦
•
period. Avoid heavy braking situations for the
first 625 miles (1,000 km).
✷
•
❍
•
✩
•
✡
•
Allow the engine to warm up before
driving at high engine speeds and high
loads. Limit engine speed to 5,000 rpm
until the engine reaches full operating
temperature.
• Avoid stopping the engine within
2 minutes of high speed/high load
running.
• Avoid idling the engine for more than
10 minutes.
ENVIRONMENTAL: This advice will assist
in improving fuel economy and should
be adopted as normal driving practice
even after the running in period.
❲
•
NOTE: These running in instructions also
apply for the first 625 miles (1,000 km)
after the engine or transmission has
been replaced.
❋
•
speed limit of the road, or 150 mph
(240 kph)
do not use your vehicle on a race track
avoid heavy loads on the engine (driving
at full throttle)
avoid driving at engine speeds less than
2,000 rpm
avoid running at constant speed and
load for long periods
avoid using kickdown
do not downshift for additional engine
braking
avoid stopping the engine within
2 minutes of high speed and high load
running
avoid idling the engine for more than
10 minutes
✵
✧
✵
✙
✙
✙
♠
✗
✔
➚
✡
✬
✍
✥
❤
❈
✭
✧
✪
➊
✎
✹
✰
❼
✌
✪
✸
✔
✠
✥
✦
✡
✸
✱
✑
✸
✹
✌
✠
➋
✒
➳
❈
when the vehicle is new or if any of these
components have been replaced.
✽
☛
✒
✥
✌
✝
✓
✠
✌
✔
☛
✥
☛
✥
☛
✥
☛
After the 625 miles (1,000 km) running in
period, you may gradually use the vehicle!s
full performance.
✳
☛
✓
✠
☛
✥
✳
✒
✍
✍
❋
✒
✦
✡
✑
✌
✡
◆
✠
✡
✔
Normal/Road use
❍
◗
Running in
➃
➂➁
➁
➁
❮
UNNING IN
DRIVING CONTROLS
UNNING IN
➤
↔
➡
➣
↔
➙
➞
➛
➝
➤
↕
➢
➛
➛
➢
➣
➛
➔
→
➣
➞
➙
➞
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
Track use
during the running in period.
❢
❖
♦
✷
Before you use your vehicle on the track,
consult your McLaren Retailer. McLaren
recommend that your vehicle is inspected
before and after track use.
DRIVING CONTROLS
➃
➂➁
➇
➇
➀
➼
➀
❮
EFUELLING
✡
✸
❈
✱
✻
✬
☛
✥
☛
✳
✡
✻
❈
✽
✹
✪
✽
✡
✑
✌
✦
✦
✒
❅
✻
✹
✸
✱
✼
✻
✑
✝
✌
✥
❋
✱
✼
❙
✗
Fire, naked flames, smoking and
using a cell phone are prohibited
when handling fuels. Switch off the
engine before refuelling.
➉
❈
♦
✿
❈
✪
✼
❤
✿
❈
✼
✫
✮
✼
❅
✹
✱
❅
✽
✱
✼
✪
❞
✯
➉
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
Filling with fuel
5. Do not continue to fill the tank after the
pump nozzle switches off.
6. Remove the nozzle.
7. Close the fuel filler flap, you will hear the
latch engage.
WARNING: Fuel and fuel vapors can
damage your health. Do not inhale
fuel vapors or allow fuel to come into
contact with skin or clothing.
The fuel filler flap is located at the rear on the
left-hand side. It is locked or unlocked
automatically when the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
❦
❖
NOTE: Your vehicle is not fitted with a
fuel filler cap.
4. Insert the nozzle into the fuel filler and
dispense fuel. For fuel
recommendations, see Recommended
fuel, page 2.49.
♦
NOTE: The fuel filler flap will remain
locked if the engine is running.
2. Press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap,
the latch will release.
3. Open the flap.
✷
NOTE: Do not attempt to force the filler
flap open if the car is locked. You may
damage the flap and its locking
mechanism.
DRIVING CONTROLS
EFUELLING
WARNING: Take care to avoid
spillages and overfilling. Ensure any
spillages are cleaned immediately.
8. Remove the nozzle.
9. Remove the fuel funnel, clean
thoroughly and store in the luggage
compartment.
10. Close the fuel filler flap, you will hear the
latch engage.
➮
➛
➝
➙
➞
➜
➝
→
➞
➢
➔
➝
➛
➙
➙
→
✃
➝
➛
→
✃
➛
➢
➐
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
➬
Filling with the fuel funnel
used when filling the fuel tank from
sources other than a gas station fuel
pump.
1. Switch off the engine.
2. Press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap,
the latch will release.
3. Open the flap.
❧
❖
♦
✷
NOTE: Your vehicle is not fitted with a
fuel filler cap.
4. Collect the fuel funnel from the luggage
compartment, see Fuel funnel,
page 5.12.
5. Insert the fuel funnel fully into the filler
neck.
6. Insert the nozzle into the fuel funnel and
dispense fuel. For fuel
recommendations, see Recommended
fuel, page 2.49.
7. Do not overfill.
DRIVING CONTROLS
EFUELLING
➛
➙
↕
➝
➞
➔
↔
➟
➣
↔
➢
➣
➔
➛
➡
↕
→
➲
➛
➡
↔
➝
➝
↔
➡
➛
➜
➛
➒
➑
➐
➏
octane ratings can be posted on the
pumps. The octane rating shown is an
average of Research Octane Number
(RON) and Motor Octane Number (MON)
rating.
For maximum engine performance the use of
94 AKI rated fuel is recommended.
In areas where 94 AKI rated fuel is unavailable,
use unleaded premium grade gasoline with a
minimum octane rating specification.
NOTE: Information relating to the quality
of fuel being dispensed is displayed on
the filling pump.
NOTE: The likelihood of engine wear or
damage is increased if fuel does not
meet the requirements of EN 228 for
unleaded gasoline or if fuel additives are
used.
No use of methanol is allowed. In areas where
94 AKI rated fuel is unavailable, use unleaded
premium grade gasoline with a minimum
octane rating of 91 AKI. Fuel with an ethanol
content up to E10 maximum is permitted.
NOTE: This vehicle is not suitable for use
with fuels containing more than 10%
Ethanol.
Do not use E85 fuels (85% Ethanol
content). This vehicle is not fitted with
the equipment necessary for the use of
fuels containing more than 10% Ethanol.
If E85 fuels are used, serious damage will
occur to the engine and fuel system.
NOTE: If the fuel tank is accidentally
filled with the incorrect type of fuel, do
not start the engine, and seek qualified
assistance.
Damage caused by use of incorrect fuel
is not covered by the vehicle warranty.
➦
❖
♦
Do not use leaded fuel, doing so may
damage the catalytic converter.
✷
➎
Recommended fuel
DRIVING CONTROLS
➃
➂➁
➂
❮
➅
❮
➀
➸
➂➁
❰
INTER DRIVING
• checking the antifreeze/anti-corrosion
concentration
• adding concentrated cleaning agent to
the windscreen cleaning system
• checking the battery
• changing the tires
❋
✒
☛
✔
☛
✒
✤
☛
✟
❁
✘
➚
➋
➊
✏
❋
✒
✍
✡
✔
✡
✠
✥
✭
✱
✻
✪
✌
✠
✡
✌
✭
☛
✽
❍
❋
✥
✪
✻
❵
✸
✱
✡
✔
❪
Use winter tires of the same make and tread
on all wheels to maintain safe handling
characteristics. Change the tire type in
"Vehicle Settings! in the left-hand display, see
Tire Type, page 3.25.
➨
❫
Winter tires are directional, not asymmetrical,
and so must be fitted in accordance with the
directional markings on the sides of the tires.
♦
WARNING: Replace winter tires with a
tread depth of less than 4 mm
immediately. They are not suitable for
winter use because they do not
provide sufficient grip, and could
cause an accident.
NOTE: A wheel change must be carried
out at your McLaren Retailer. The vehicle
could be damaged if it is jacked up
incorrectly.
or ice-covered roads. The maximum effect of
the Anti-lock Braking System and Electronic
Stability Control systems is only achieved with
these tires.
✷
Consult your McLaren Retailer for advice and
information regarding the maximum speed
specified for the winter tires fitted. Restrict
the maximum speed of the vehicle using the
ASL system, see Setting an upper speed limit,
page 2.44.
❀
✡
✔
✓
☛
✒
✍
✴
✓
✒
✌
✟
✑
✴
✌
✔
✤
☛
✡
✧
✧
❥
✬
✽
✽
✒
✝
✡
✠
☛
✡
✠
✟
❣
➴
✸
✬
✞
NOTE: Only winter tires specified by
McLaren should be used.
✝
inspected at your McLaren Retailer at the
onset of winter. This service includes the
following:
▼
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✠
✓
✒
✡
◆
✟
✴
✑
✓
✒
✌
✟
✴
✑
✌
✤
✡
✤
☛
✡
✧
✧
✒
✝
✡
✠
✔
✥
✌
❄
Winter driving
snow socks which have been approved for
McLaren vehicles. If you are intending to fit
snow socks, bear the following points in mind:
• Only ever fit snow socks to both rear
wheels.
• Comply with the manufacturer!s
installation instructions.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 30 mph (50 kph). Remove the snow
socks as soon as possible if you are no longer
driving on snow-covered roads.
INSTRUMENTS
✎
✚
✡
✥
◆
✠
❋
✡
◆
◗
OVERVIEW
✏
❋
✚
④
⑨
❺
③
⑩
✉
⑩
✡
✇
✥
◆
✠
✈
✡
◆
②
◗
①
⑨
Tachometer ....................................................................................................... 3.2
Speedometer .................................................................................................... 3.3
✎
✚
✚
④
⑨
❺
③
✒
✤
❋
☛
✥
✉
⑩
⑨
✴
❯
⑥
✟
✍
❑
✔
❉
✥
①
❶
Home Screen..................................................................................................... 3.7
Trip Computer................................................................................................... 3.8
Vehicle Info ........................................................................................................ 3.9
Nose Lift ........................................................................................................... 3.12
Settings............................................................................................................. 3.16
Navigation........................................................................................................ 3.27
McLaren Track Telemetry ......................................................................... 3.27
Messages.......................................................................................................... 3.28
❼
✚
✚
④
⑨
❺
③
✡
✉
⑩
✠
✓
✌
✟
✠
⑩
❑
✡
✇
✈
✧
✡
❚
✍
✥
✇
⑦
♥
♦
Water Temperature...................................................................................... 3.36
Fuel Level and Range .................................................................................. 3.37
▲
◗
✉
⑥
Gear Position Indicator............................................................................... 3.35
Handling and Powertrain Display ........................................................... 3.35
Electronic Stability Control Mode Display........................................... 3.35
INSTRUMENTS
❰
➀
➂
❮
➀
❾
❽
VERVIEW
✡
✑
✌
☛
✡
✑
✤
✡
NOTE: The maximum RPM is dynamic
and will be reduced under certain
conditions, for example, if the engine oil
is below normal operating temperature
or if neutral gear is selected.
❋
✌
✟
◆
✥
✌
✝
✟
✡
✠
✟
✔
✌
☛
Tachometer
✡
✧
✓
✠
✌
✔
☛
✥
✡
✑
❚
Overview
ignition is switched on, see Switching on the
ignition, page 2.3.
WARNING: No messages will appear in
the instrument screen if there is a
fault with the screen or vehicle
electrics. Contact your McLaren
Retailer immediately. Use of the
vehicle in these circumstances can
be dangerous.
✠
✡
✌
☛
✡
✝
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✔
✠
✟
✡
✟
✍
✟
❑
❑
✴
✔
✥
✤
❑
✠
✡
✌
✡
✧
✒
✑
✝
✟
✌
✡
✑
❚
NOTE: Do not operate the engine at or
near its maximum speed for a significant
length of time. The fuel supply is cut off
to protect the engine when the
maximum RPM is reached.
of the instrument cluster screen when in
Normal Powertrain and Handling modes. The
red number in the display indicates the
engine!s maximum RPM.
✷
♦
▲
When Sport or Track Powertrain or Handling
modes are selected, the tachometer style will
change to suite the selected mode. See
Display Window, page 3.32.
INSTRUMENTS
❽
VERVIEW
✥
✤
✟
✥
✳
✔
✥
✠
✡
✌
✡
✧
✒
✤
✡
✡
✔
❑
✡
tal display situated
centrally within the instrument cluster when
in Normal Powertrain and Handling modes.
✑
When Sport or Track Powertrain or Handling
modes are selected, the speedometer style
will change to suite the selected mode. See
Display Window, page 3.32.
▲
♦
NOTE: The speedometer changes from
mph to kph when the units are changed
from miles to kilometers, see Units,
page 3.16.
▲
❚
Speedometer
INSTRUMENTS
➽
➄
➇
❿
➂➈
➅
➅
➁
➄
➺➻
➸
➼
➀
➇
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
✡
✑
✌
☛
✒
✤
✒
❋
☛
✥
✓
❋
❑
✒
➩
❑
☛
✥
✟
❑
✠
✟
✡
✔
✟
❑
❑
✳
☛
✥
☛
✠
✟
❯
Overview
instrument screen.
The stored messages can be viewed at any
time when the ignition is on, see Error
Messages, page 3.9.
WARNING: Operating and browsing
menus whilst the vehicle is in motion
could make you unable to observe
road and traffic conditions and could
cause an accident.
WARNING: Do not ignore warning
messages, failure to take appropriate
action may result in personal injury or
damage to the vehicle.
Navigation through the menu structure is
achieved using the control stalk mounted on
the left of the steering column.
❖
♦
▲
The following categories are available:
INSTRUMENTS
✘
✎
✚
✡
✟
✠
✌
✡
✧
✡
✍
✡
❚
✝
✟
✠
❚
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
▼
✡
✡
❙
✎
✗
✚
✡
✟
✌
✦
✥
✞
✡
✔
✒
❲
✡
✡
See Navigation, page 3.27
✳
❑
♠
✴
❫
See Vehicle Info, page 3.9
♦
See Settings, page 3.16
▲
See Trip Computer, page 3.8
✵
✳
❑
♠
✳
❑
♠
❙
✘
✚
✡
✟
☛
✡
✡
✠
✝
❙
✡
✧
✒
❩
✡
✡
❙
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
INSTRUMENTS
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
2.
3.
4.
❢
♦
▲
5.
☛
✤
✒
❋
✠
✒
✓
❑
✍
✟
✌
✔
✵
✍
✒
✠
✌
☛
✒
✝
✡
✑
✌
✡
◆
✒
▼
✗
Navigate through a category
(SCROLL + or -) to highlight your
choice.
Pull the stalk towards you (FORWARD)
to enter your selection.
Then select the topic of interest from
the list, move the control stalk up or
down (SCROLL + or -) to highlight your
choice.
Pull the stalk towards you (FORWARD)
to move through to the next menu in the
structure.
At the end of each structure there will be
a display of information or a screen
where a setting can be changed.
6. When the function required is selected
or a setting is made, press OK on the end
of the control stalk to confirm.
A setting is only changed if the OK
button is pressed.
INSTRUMENTS
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
✡
✑
✌
✦
✒
✌
✓
✒
✿
✭
✪
✻
✪
✬
✡
✑
✌
✡
✝
☛
✟
✌
✔
✥
✤
✍
✟
✌
✒
✌
✡
✑
✡
✑
✌
✳
☛
✥
✠
✓
✤
✤
✡
✍
✡
◆
✟
✠
✌
✡
✝
☛
✟
✌
✔
✥
✤
✡
✑
✌
✱
✻
✭
✔
✟
✴
✍
✮
✪
✔
✥
✸
➭
Temperature is the current outside
temperature. There is a short delay before a
change in outside temperature is displayed.
➭
✡
✑
✌
✡
✝
☛
✥
✔
✤
✡
✍
✡
◆
✟
✠
✌
✡
✝
☛
✟
✌
✔
✥
✤
✡
✑
✌
✔
✍
✟
✴
✔
✥
❑
✤
✱
✔
✥
✑
✭
❡
current journey. Refer to Trip Computer,
page 3.8 for more details.
❚
displayed is above freezing point, the
road surface may still be icy. You
should always adapt your driving
style and speed to suit the weather
conditions.
❑
✤
✭
✬
✯
✔
✥
✑
❚
✪
✭
✯
✻
❈
✭
✪
➭
✿
✪
✻
✪
❅
✻
✫
✱
✸
✪
✲
❞
➳
❊
❝
✪
❈
✭
✻
✯
✾
❝
❜
✭
❛
❵
✪
➭
✿
❡
✪
✴
❑
➋
✴
❑
✵
vehicle has traveled.
details refer to Defaults, page 3.26.
trip meter was last reset. Refer to Trip
Computer, page 3.8 for more details.
When the outside air temperature falls below
37°F (3°C), the frost warning message will be
displayed and the temperature reading will
change color after the message has been
displayed.
❦
♦
When the outside temperature falls below
32°F (0°C), the ice warning will be displayed.
▲
The Home screen displays the following
functions:
✌
✔
✟
✍
✔
✥
✤
✠
✡
✌
✡
✧
✒
✤
✒
✡
✑
✡
✠
✒
✧
✠
✒
✡
✧
✥
✌
✌
☛
✡
✠
✠
✓
✝
✡
✑
✌
✔
✟
✍
✔
✥
✤
❚
✬
❥
✝
✒
✍
✝
✡
✑
❚
Home screen, see Language, page 3.17.
✼
✺
✰
❀
➫
✍
✤
✟
✴
☛
✟
✌
☛
✡
✌
☛
✒
✝
✡
✑
✌
✡
☛
✟
✑
✳
✝
✒
❚
Home Screen
INSTRUMENTS
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
✠
✒
➭
✱
✭
✮
✪
✸
✭
✯
✬
✱
✭
❡
➭
❡
✠
❚
✥
❑
✡
✌
✟
✠
✡
☛
✡
✟
☛
✳
✝
✠
✡
✌
✓
✒
✧
❑
✝
✥
✠
✌
❑
✡
✑
❚
Trip Computer
✡
✡
✠
✡
✟
✳
◆
✟
✤
☛
✟
✤
✡
✡
✡
✔
❑
✠
✡
✟
✳
◆
✟
♠
✡
✝
☛
✟
✌
✔
✥
✤
✔
✍
✟
✴
✥
❧
♦
❑
❉
fuel consumption since the last trip reset.
fuel consumption for the current journey.
The hours displayed is the time that the
engine has been running since the last trip
reset.
The time displayed is the time that the engine
has been running in the current journey.
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk for 2 seconds to reset the information
back to zero.
▲
✔
✠
✡
◆
✟
✳
✟
✤
☛
✟
✤
✡
✡
✡
✔
❑
✠
✡
✟
✳
◆
✟
✝
☛
✡
♠
✟
✌
✔
✥
✤
✔
✍
✟
✴
✔
❑
❉
✥
Journey Trip information.
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk for 2 seconds to reset the information
back to zero.
The information will also reset to zero when
the engine is switched off.
INSTRUMENTS
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
❈
✽
✪
✹
✽
✽
✪
✭
✬
✭
✭
✡
✑
✌
✧
✒
✠
✦
✡
✤
✟
✧
✡
• McLaren Track Telemetry, page 3.10
• Oil Status, page 3.10
• Battery Status, page 3.11
• Vehicle Identification, page 3.11
✡
✑
✌
✤
✡
✒
✍
☛
✡
✡
♠
✳
✳
If any errors have been logged, the screen will
display Error Messages with arrows to scroll
through the messages.
If a service becomes overdue, the display will
show the distance it is overdue.
➦
• Tire Monitoring, page 3.10
The message will then appear every time the
ignition is switched on, with the
time/distance figures reducing. Once the
service has been carried out, the display will
be reset by your McLaren Retailer.
♦
• Error Messages, page 3.9
display will confirm this.
▲
• Service Interval, page 3.9
(1,000 km) before a service is due, the above
display appears.
❍
✳
Vehicle info screen.
✡
◆
✟
✑
✔
✡
✟
✔
✔
✡
✧
✠
✒
✠
✠
✡
✒
☛
✦
➊
✴
✴
❏
❑
❑
❄
✔
✡
✍
✥
✧
✎
❼
✠
✒
✔
✟
✤
✙
✚
✍
✡
✌
✟
✧
✥
✒
✠
✟
☞
✌
✟
☛
❍
✝
✔
✡
✝
✥
✒
✑
✝
✳
☛
✥
❋
✒
✍
✍
✒
✦
✡
✑
❚
➳
✼
✲
✭
✪
✻
✸
✪
✱
✲
✭
✪
❂
❈
✾
❀
➴
❣
✪
✱
✲
✭
✪
✲
➫
Vehicle Info
INSTRUMENTS
Select "OFF! to disable the lap timer view.
See McLaren Track Telemetry, page 3.27.
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
➨
✍
✥
✒
✦
✒
✍
✡
◆
✡
✍
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✒
✑
✔
✡
✓
✟
➴
❈
✽
✯
✟
✻
✔
✟
✍
✻
➫
Inspect the tire(s) for any possible causes of
reduced pressure or increased temperature.
♥
✼
✱
With "AUTO! selected, a lap timer will be
displayed on the left-hand display when the
McLaren Track Telemetry application has
been launched using IRIS.
♦
♠
✳
❋
✳
✳
✴
❑
❉
➋
➋
❑
❑
❋
of each of the 4 tires. If the figures appear in
green, no action is required. If they appear as
red text, have the tires inspected and
pressures rectified as soon as possible.
▲
✔
❨
◗
❚
❪
☞
✠
✒
❨
◗
✠
✡
✑
✌
✥
✡
✌
✝
✡
✍
✡
✔
✡
✠
✓
✌
✟
✠
✡
✧
✡
✌
✤
☛
✟
✔
✡
✠
✓
✔
✔
✡
✠
✡
✑
✌
✔
✒
✑
✔
✔
✥
✑
❚
❙
✥
✮
✿
✭
✻
✪
❡
✪
✼
✪
❀
❈
❥
❡
✭
❃
❈
✸
✪
✭
❂
Tire Monitoring
❀
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
together with the oil temperature.
To check the engine oil level, see Checking
the engine oil, page 5.2.
INSTRUMENTS
✡
✠
✓
✧
❍
☛
☛
✒
✥
✌
✟
✝
✥
✦
✸
✥
✌
☛
✡
❀
❈
✬
✤
✥
✱
✻
✫
✱
✻
✱
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✸
✪
✰
✑
✡
❀
✼
✪
✌
❅
✪
✱
✔
✴
✟
✍
❱
✥
✔
❑
❉
✡
✟
✑
✠
✳
✝
✡
✌
✠
✴
✌
✟
✑
✌
✡
❍
✥
☛
✳
✑
✔
✒
❋
✡
✟
✓
✳
✔
✟
✳
✍
✟
✴
✔
❑
status.
♥
♥
♦
To charge the battery, see Charging the
battery, page 5.13.
▲
❉
✥
Battery Status
✾
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
INSTRUMENTS
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
Nose ride height can only be raised when
traveling at speeds below 50 kph (31 mph).
The nose will automatically lower at speeds
above 60 kph (37 mph).
✷
♥
♦
▲
NOTE: The front suspension can be left
fully raised for extended periods, but it
may relax to a lower level over time.
✯
❂
✸
✪
✪
❅
✻
✹
✸
✱
✽
✽
❀
❛
✪
❀
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✔
✳
✓
✓
☛
✡
✧
✌
✦
✥
✍
✡
✔
✒
☛
✡
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
✝
NOTE: If nose lift is requested while the
engine has been stopped by the Eco
Start-Stop System, the engine will be
automatically restarted.
✝
Nose lift gives you the option to raise or lower
the nose of the vehicle dependent on the
current nose ride height.
✟
NOTE: Nose lift will be unavailable if
launch mode is active.
☛
A confirmation tone will be heard when nose
lift is selected.
✟
• Nose Lift - Lower, page 3.14
NOTE: Vehicle handling modes are
inhibited when nose lift is lowering or
raising.
✝
• Nose Lift - Raise, page 3.13
If nose lift is used when in motion, slight
adjustments to the steering feel may be
experienced, this is normal and does not
affect the operation of the vehicle.
✓
The Nose Lift menu displays the following
Information:
If the nose is left in a raised position for a long
period, a system reset may occur when the
engine is next started to return the nose to
normal ride height.
✒
right-hand side of the central display is
amber, or a vehicle lift fault message
appears on the instrument cluster, the
system is not available. Do not drive the
vehicle at high speed and contact your
McLaren Retailer as soon as possible.
❴
➛
➢
➣
➙
↕
➙
➞
➤
↕
➣
✃
↕
➝
➛
➔
➞
➙
➛
➢
➣
✃
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
➷
Nose Lift
menu control stalk on the left of the steering
column, whenever the engine is running.
INSTRUMENTS
➛
➡
↔
➔
➛
➜
➞
➟
➙
↕
➝
➜
➙
↔
➢
➛
➝
➤
↕
➢
➛
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
➯
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
inhibited when vehicle lift is lowering or
raising.
NOTE: Nose lift will be unavailable if
launch mode is active.
Hold the menu control stalk up for one
second to quickly access the menu. A
confirmation tone will be heard.
To change from raise to lower, move the
menu control stalk downwards. The nose of
the vehicle will start to lower, and the
information displayed on the instrument
cluster will confirm the change.
▲
NOTE: Always check the nose lift icon on
the display before driving your vehicle.
If the engine is stopped while the vehicle is
raising, the system will stop and continue to
raise only when the engine is restarted.
♥
NOTE: Nose lift will be delayed if the
vehicle experiences any excessive
steering wheel input.
The change in nose ride height is confirmed
by an ascending audible tone. "Vehicle
Raising! appears in the left-hand side of the
central display and the nose lift icon will flash.
♦
height, you will only have the option to
raise the front of the vehicle.
Before nose lift will become active, the engine
must be running. To raise the nose of the
vehicle, select the nose lift menu (see
Accessing the Menu, page 3.12) and then
move the menu control stalk upwards.
▲
➛
➜
↕
➡
➝
↔
➡
➞
➙
➣
↔
➔
↕
➛
➝
➤
↕
➢
➛
➛
➢
➣
➙
➯
✪
✽
➛
➢
➒
➑
➐
✱
❈
❜
➪
❃
✻
✫
✱
✪
➏
➎
✽
✬
❝
The nose lift screen display will exit after the
timeout duration has been exceeded back to
home screen if there is no activity on the
menu. To set the timeout to home screen
duration, see Language, page 3.17.
INSTRUMENTS
If there is no further activity, the Vehicle raise
text display will exit after the timeout duration
has been exceeded. To set the timeout to
home screen duration, see Language,
page 3.17.
➛
➝
↕
➢
➛
➝
➤
↕
➢
➛
✃
➞
➣
➙
➞
➡
✃
➛
➢
➲
✭
➣
➡
➛
➞
➝
➞
➐
➒
➑
➐
➲
✪
➪
❃
❣
✬
❃
✻
✫
✱
✪
➏
✽
❝
➎
confirmation tone is heard. "Ride Height:
Raised! appears on the instrument screen and
the nose lift icon is illuminated while the
vehicle remains raised.
✬
✡
✍
✤
✓
✟
✥
❍
☛
✟
✡
✔
✤
♠
✥
✟
✠
✍
✍
✓
✦
✴
✔
✥
✡
✔
✒
☛
✡
✑
✌
☛
✡
✑
❯
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
stationary, the engine must be running
and the driver!s door must be fully
closed.
NOTE: When the nose is raised, you will
only have the option to lower the nose.
NOTE: Do not drive at high speed whilst
the nose is lowering. If the nose begins
to auto lower, a descending audible tone
is heard, and the nose lift menu will be
displayed in the left-hand display
allowing you control of the system.
NOTE: Always check the nose lift icon in
the right-hand display before driving
your vehicle.
To lower the nose of the vehicle, select the
nose lift menu (see Accessing the Menu,
page 3.12) and then move the menu control
stalk downwards.
❖
♥
♦
▲
The change in nose ride height is confirmed
by a descending audible tone. "Vehicle
Lowering! appears in the instrument display
and the screen nose lift icon will flash.
INSTRUMENTS
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
✡
✑
✌
✡
◆
✒
✧
✔
✥
✟
✡
♠
✠
✒
✌
✠
✡
✍
✒
❋
✧
✒
✠
✦
✡
☛
✟
✑
✳
✝
✒
menu control stalk upwards. The nose will
start to raise, and the information displayed
on the instrument cluster will confirm the
change.
❫
♥
♦
When the nose is lowered, an audible
confirmation tone is heard. "Ride Height:
Normal! appears in the instrument display and
the nose lift icon extinguishes.
▲
❚
If there is no further activity, the Vehicle lower
text display will exit after the timeout duration
has been exceeded. To set the timeout to
home screen duration, see Language,
page 3.17.
INSTRUMENTS
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
☛
✥
units of measurement.
• Display Set-up, page 3.16
• Units, page 3.16
Distance - select miles or km.
• Lighting, page 3.18
• Time & Date, page 3.17
Speed - select mph or kph.
• Vehicle, page 3.19
• Language, page 3.17
Temperature - select °C or °F.
Pressure - select kPa, Bar or PSI.
❢
♥
♦
▲
Fuel Consumption - select mpg, km/Liter or
Liters/100 km.
✳
✍
✍
✒
❋
✒
✦
✡
✑
✧
✒
✠
✦
✡
✤
✟
✧
✡
☛
✟
Display Setup:
❍
✝
✔
☛
✒
✥
✌
✝
✡
✍
✡
✔
✳
☛
✥
❋
✒
✍
✍
✒
✦
✡
✑
❚
Settings screen:
• Defaults, page 3.26
✌
✌
✡
✔
☛
✟
✝
✓
✒
☛
✡
✡
✑
✌
✧
✒
✠
✦
✡
✤
✟
✧
✡
✟
☛
❍
✝
✔
✡
✝
✥
✒
✑
✝
✳
☛
✥
❋
✒
✍
✍
✒
✦
✡
✑
❚
✴
✡
✠
✝
✔
✔
✌
✥
☛
✻
✱
✸
✽
❪
✡
✑
✌
☛
◗
➍
➭
➪
✯
➴
✻
✪
❈
✮
✼
✽
✱
✶
➭
❣
✪
✱
✲
✭
✪
✲
➫
Settings
INSTRUMENTS
❈
✪
✹
✯
❃
❈
✹
✸
❈
✪
✻
✶
✿
✪
❡
✱
✠
✒
✔
☛
✒
✍
✍
✟
❪
❙
✳
☛
✒
✍
✔
♠
✍
✟
❪
❭
✳
✌
✝
✡
✍
✡
✔
✡
➩
✧
✓
✍
✒
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
liters.
The setting for your vehicle depends on the
country or region where the vehicle was
purchased. The units can be changed
individually at any time.
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your selections.
✤
✡
✠
✠
✡
✦
✡
✠
✠
✓
✒
The following choices are available:
• English (UK)
• English (US)
• Arabic
• Chinese
• French
• German
❦
♥
• Italian
♦
The time display can be set as 12 hour or
24 hour format.
language.
▲
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
❑
✌
✡
✔
✴
✒
✌
☛
✡
✡
✠
✝
✔
✔
✥
✑
✌
✡
✔
❪
✌
✟
✡
✑
✌
✡
❉
✥
✌
✌
☛
✳
✡
✔
✡
✠
✒
✦
✡
❍
✡
✧
✥
❚
✡
✑
✌
✌
✡
❙
NOTE: This feature also sets the units for
the trip computer.
INSTRUMENTS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
❃
❈
✹
✸
✱
✻
❅
✹
✱
✼
✸
✭
✪
✻
➳
✹
✸
✱
✻
●
❃
❅
✹
Japanese
Russian
Spanish
Portuguese
Latin American Spanish
Polish
Korean
Thai
Turkish
Hungarian
Dutch
✱
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
❧
♥
♦
▲
✡
✑
✌
✌
✟
✑
✌
☛
✒
✥
✌
✟
✠
✓
✤
✡
✑
✌
✌
✡
✔
✒
✌
✡
✍
✔
✔
✥
❍
✒
✔
✥
✌
✍
✟
☛
✠
✡
✌
☛
❄
✠
✒
✚
✡
✗
♠
❻
✟
✳
❑
✥
☛
♠
✌
Lighting, page 3.19.
✳
✑
✞
✍
✥
✳
✟
☛
✠
✡
✌
❳
✌
❏
✝
✡
✍
✡
If a language is not available on your vehicle,
"NOT SUPPORTED! will appear in the display.
Consult your McLaren Retailer for further
assistance.
❙
❑
❄
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
external lights stay illuminated when locking
and unlocking the vehicle.
Select the entry or exit lighting time from the
instrument cluster screen, set the required
time and press the OK button on the end of
the control stalk to confirm your selection.
INSTRUMENTS
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
Select courtesy lighting and pull the control
stalk towards you to toggle the option "ON! or
"OFF!.
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
✕
✔
☛
✒
✥
✌
✝
✡
✍
✡
✔
✥
☛
✳
✍
✍
✒
❋
✒
✦
✡
✑
✌
✡
✧
✟
✵
✒
✌
✡
✍
❍
✼
✱
✪
✥
✔
✔
✪
❱
❅
✒
✔
✥
✌
❄
A gauge will appear. Move the control stalk up
or down (SCROLL + or -) to highlight your
preferred brightness level.
❑
Internal Lighting
❀
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
• Intake Sound Generator (ISG), page 3.20
• Valet Mode, page 3.22
• Reverse Select Tone, page 3.23
• Performance Shift Cue (PSC), page 3.23
• Navigation, page 3.23
• Auto Door Lock, page 3.23
• Auto Fold Mirrors, page 3.23
• Auto Alarm, page 3.23
• Door Unlock, page 3.24
• Comfort Entry/Exit, page 3.24
✡
• Door Lighting
Hold the control stalk down for one second to
quickly access switch lighting. A confirmation
tone will be heard.
• Tire Type, page 3.25
• Wiper Modes, page 3.25
• Wiper Sensitivity, page 3.26
➦
• Footwell Lighting
• Reverse Mirror Dip, page 3.24
♥
• Switch Lighting
• Silent Lock, page 3.24
♦
illumination level:
▲
✑
✌
✌
✔
✓
❹
✤
✟
✒
✌
✥
☛
✳
✒
✍
✍
✒
❋
✦
✡
✑
✌
✦
✒
✡
☛
✒
✌
✝
✡
✍
✡
❙
• Start Button Pulse, page 3.24
INSTRUMENTS
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
✥
✠
☛
✳
✡
✌
☛
✡
✤
☛
✓
✒
✔
✦
✒
✍
✡
◆
✡
✍
✡
✑
✌
✡
☛
✟
✑
✳
✝
☛
✟
✝
✓
✒
❴
Intake Sound Generator (ISG)
the cabin for each powertrain mode selected.
WARNING: Operating and browsing
menus whilst the vehicle is in motion
could make you unable to observe
road and traffic conditions and could
cause an accident.
➨
✷
♦
▲
Three different powertrain modes will be
displayed in the ISG menu.
Select the mode that you wish to change and
a gauge showing the current ISG sound level
for that mode will appear.
Move the menu control stalk up or down
(SCROLL + or -) to achieve your preferred
sound level for that powertrain mode. Press
the OK button on the end of the menu
control stalk to confirm your choice.
The default settings for each mode are as
follows:
INSTRUMENTS
➝
➛
➛
➝
➤
↔
➡
➐
♥
✷
♦
NOTE: These are the default settings for
each mode, but you can apply any level
of sound to any powertrain mode.
▲
➝
➛
➛
➝
➣
➡
➞
➠
➝
➛
➛
➝
➝
↔
➡
➞
➎
➯
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
INSTRUMENTS
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
Valet Mode
To enter the PIN, press the control stalk up or
down until the first digit required appears in
the display, then press the OK button on the
end of the control stalk to confirm your
choice. An asterisk replaces each number as it
is entered.
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
✌
✦
✒
✤
✡
✡
✔
✡
For a 5 second period after entering Valet
Mode, the PIN can be changed by entering a
new PIN using the same procedure described
on this page.
❑
✑
✌
✒
☛
♠
✡
✤
✒
▼
✌
✡
✍
✟
✑
✌
✥
❯
Repeat the process to enter the full PIN.
is limited to 55 kph (35 mph), the active
dynamics panel is disabled, the luggage
compartment and service tray access panels
remain locked, and a confirmation message
appears in the left-hand display.
✷
✷
♦
▲
To switch on Valet Mode you must input a PIN
number after selecting the "Valet Mode! from
the Vehicle menu screen.
The factory set PIN number is 0000. Use this
PIN the first time to switch on Valet Mode.
You should change this PIN at the earliest
opportunity.
INSTRUMENTS
✒
✍
✍
✍
✥
✔
✠
✒
❋
✠
✠
✥
✧
✠
✒
✥
✠
✡
✌
✡
✡
✑
❏
✌
✭
✽
✤
✡
✌
✝
✡
✍
✬
❂
✭
✭
✱
✡
✼
✬
✰
✥
❨
❲
◗
☛
➉
❛
✬
✻
✯
✡
✑
❯
✿
✍
✍
✥
❋
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
✌
✤
✡
✌
♠
✝
✡
✍
✡
✔
✧
✠
✟
✍
☞
✭
❛
❈
✒
✌
✓
☞
✼
❛
✬
✯
✻
✑
✌
✥
❯
✝
✵
✠
✒
✒
✤
✒
✌
✓
☞
♠
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
❥
✌
✡
◆
✥
will be set to on.
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
automatically lock and the alarm set if
unlocked and left for 30 seconds with all
doors, luggage compartment lid and service
access panels left fully closed.
❀
❃
✭
✬
✡
✡
✠
✬
✶
✬
✓
✴
✒
✬
☛
✡
✑
❯
✻
❛
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
The vehicle doors will automatically lock as
the vehicle moves off.
▲
✷
♦
Switch Auto Door Lock off, and the doors
remain unlocked after moving off, unless,
they are locked manually.
▲
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
♠
NOTE: This option has no effect on the
operation of the Navigation system on
IRIS.
✯
When "TRACK ONLY! is selected, PSC will only
be active in Track powertrain or handling
modes.
✔
✌
☛
✡
✠
✠
✓
✝
✤
✡
✌
✝
✡
✍
✡
✔
✔
✥
❨
❲
◗
✟
✍
✴
❑
❉
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
When "OFF! is selected, the PSC function will
be disabled.
When "SPORT AND TRACK! is selected, PSC
will be active in either Sport or Track
powertrain or handling modes.
fold as the vehicle is locked and unfold when
the door is opened. If "OFF! is selected, the
mirrors will remain in their driving position.
If "Display OFF! is selected, the turn-by-turn
guidance on the left-hand display will be
disabled.
✝
✍
✍
✥
❋
✑
✝
✥
✑
❋
✠
♠
sound during full throttle acceleration in
manual gearbox mode, to indicate that an
upshift is required to maintain optimum
performance.
navigation turn-by-turn guidance will be
displayed on the left-hand display if route
guidance has been started using IRIS. See
Navigation, page 3.27.
✔
✸
❈
✬
✔
✥
☛
✒
✌
✟
✺
➴
✝
✥
✤
✪
☛
✯
✥
✌
✺
✦
✥
✻
✑
✫
✱
✔
✡
✍
❅
➴
❍
✥
✤
✓
✪
❀
❈
✟
☛
✸
✿
✟
✭
✬
✔
✥
✫
✭
❙
✪
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
✱
✻
✹
✱
❝
✲
✡
✑
❯
❋
♠
audible indication that reverse gear has been
selected. If "OFF! is selected, the tone will be
disabled.
❁
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
☛
✟
✔
✟
✤
☛
✓
✒
✔
✍
✍
✥
✡
☛
✒
✌
✟
✤
✡
✌
✝
✡
✍
✡
✔
✔
✥
❨
❲
◗
☛
✡
✑
❯
Reverse Select Tone
❈
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
INSTRUMENTS
❖
✷
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
➭
✱
✶
✭
✬
❂
✭
✭
✱
✪
✽
❳
❨
❘
❳
❲
♣
❙
❙
☞
✠
✒
❨
❩
❚
◗
❬
❨
♠
➋
✌
◗
➋
✝
✡
✍
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
✡
When comfort entry/exit is "OFF!, the driver!s
seat will remain in position at all times.
All other lock and unlock features remain
active.
❙
If "OFF! is selected, the turn signals always
flash when the vehicle is locked or unlocked,
irrespective of the method used.
♦
✭
❜
✡
✠
✟
✔
✍
✟
☛
✔
☛
✥
✳
✠
✓
✌
✡
✑
✌
✤
✡
✌
✝
✡
✍
✡
✔
✔
❥
✥
seat will move fully rearwards and to its lowest
position when the ignition is off and the
driver!s door is opened. Seat memory - stalk
return is activated along with this option, see
Comfort entry, page 1.22.
▲
✪
✡
✑
✌
✤
✡
✌
♠
✝
✡
✍
✡
✔
✔
✥
❨
❲
◗
❀
✬
❨
✔
❨
✠
✡
◆
✥
✠
✤
✡
✑
✌
❨
♠
❲
◗
✔
✥
✌
✥
❏
✡
✻
✱
➧
❲
disabled when locking or unlocking using the
keyless entry system.
●
✴
✠
➳
✌
☛
✮
✡
✭
✌
✠
✻
➳
✸
✒
✦
✧
✻
✭
✒
✝
✬
✫
☛
✬
✡
✑
❯
✺
✿
◗
✻
☛
✸
➴
✼
✱
✪
✡
✑
❯
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
❃
☛
✡
❯
✑
✔
❨
✠
✡
◆
✥
✠
✤
✡
✑
✌
✍
☛
✒
✴
✤
✡
✌
♠
✝
✡
✍
✡
✔
✔
✥
❨
❳
❄
❘
❘
☛
❉
✡
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
✑
All closures will lock with either "DRIVERS! or
"BOTH! selected.
❯
When "BOTH! is selected, both doors will
unlock when the vehicle is unlocked using
either the key fob or door button.
START/STOP
button illumination will pulse, when the
vehicle is in Awake, Accessory or Ignition
status. See Vehicle electrical status, page 2.2.
If "OFF! is selected, the illumination pulse will
be disabled.
door will unlock when the vehicle is unlocked
with either the key fob or door button.
✲
✪
✪
✽
✼
✯
✸
✬
✻
✻
✯
✩
✻
✭
✻
➴
Door Unlock
❈
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
"OFF! - no mirror dip will occur when reverse is
engaged.
"BOTH! - both mirrors will dip when reverse is
engaged.
"PASSENGER! - passenger!s side mirror will dip
when reverse is engaged.
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
INSTRUMENTS
❨
▼
❳
❉
❄
❚
✒
✠
❨
❚
☞
❄
❁
▼
◗
❚
✽
❪
☞
✠
✪
❂
✬
✰
✡
✑
✌
✥
✡
❵
➭
✭
✌
✝
✪
✡
✍
❙
reverse is selected:
✡
✱
➭
❡
✪
✮
❡
✪
✭
✱
☛
✡
✑
✤
✍
✍
✥
❋
❑
✥
✔
✠
✒
❋
✠
✠
✥
✧
✡
✑
✌
✌
☛
✓
✒
✧
✟
✡
✑
✌
✌
✡
✔
✒
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Select "BOTH! or "PASSENGER! in the
mirror dip section of the cluster.
3. Depress brake and select reverse gear.
4. Adjust mirror(s) to desired position, see
Adjusting mirrors, page 1.39.
5. Take vehicle out of reverse.
With "AUTOMATIC! selected, wiper operation
in the Auto position will be controlled by the
rain sensor.
The next time reverse is selected, the vehicle
will automatically move the mirror(s) to the
previously set offset from the normal
position.
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
With "TIMED! selected, wiper operation in the
Auto position will be an intermittent wipe. To
set the time delay for intermittent wipe, see
Wiper Sensitivity, page 3.26.
✍
✍
✟
✑
✒
❋
✔
✍
✍
✥
❋
✴
✟
✍
✔
✥
✤
❑
✡
the possible tire types
available. Select the tires fitted to your
vehicle.
✑
❫
✷
♦
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
▲
❚
❚
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
INSTRUMENTS
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
❢
✷
♦
▲
✔
✔
✡
✠
✡
☛
❑
✑
✌
❨
✔
✥
✌
✌
☛
✳
✡
❙
✌
✍
✓
✟
✦
✡
✡
❉
✠
✽
✒
✌
✔
✡
✼
✯
✻
❘
✫
✌
✝
✡
✍
✪
❈
Press the OK button on the end of the control
stalk to confirm your choice.
✡
✶
sensitivity setting. Move the control stalk up
or down (SCROLL + or -) to achieve your
preferred setting for the wiper operation. This
setting will apply for the rain sensor sensitivity
level only and will not affect the intermittent
wipe time delay.
❙
✠
✡
✌
☛
✥
❑
❋
✡
✠
✠
✓
✝
✥
☛
✳
✑
✔
✒
❋
✠
✟
✡
✍
✍
✥
✟
❑
❑
✡
❋
✓
✟
✳
✳
☞
Wiper Sensitivity
the OK button on the end of the control stalk
to confirm that you wish to reset to the
default settings.
INSTRUMENTS
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
Navigation
McLaren Track Telemetry
☛
✒
✥
✌
✟
✝
✥
✍
✟
❑
❑
✌
✡
✠
✴
✧
✡
✍
✡
❚
✝
✟
✠
❚
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
has been launched using IRIS, a lap timer will
be displayed on the left-hand display.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Current lap number
Current lap total time
Current lap delta time
Best lap time
Last lap time
❦
See McLaren Track Telemetry, page 2.18.
✷
NOTE: Always observe local speed limit
information as the there may be
temporary or new speed restrictions in
place.
The lap timer provides the following
information:
♦
If available, the speed limit for the current
road will be displayed on the right-hand side
of the central display.
▲
1. Next turn direction and distance
Closely-coupled next turn if applicable
2. Total distance to destination remaining
3. Total time to destination remaining
▼
✵
will be displayed on the left-hand display if
route guidance has been started using IRIS.
The turn-by-turn display provides the
following information:
✡
✑
✌
✦
❄
✡
✝
☛
✟
✤
✥
✓
✠
☛
✳
✓
✌
➩
✠
✓
☛
✴
❍
➩
✌
☛
✒
✥
✌
✟
✥
◆
✟
✳
☛
✌
☛
✡
✠
✠
✓
✝
✡
✑
❚
NOTE: If no destination has been set
using IRIS, only the compass and current
road name will be displayed.
INSTRUMENTS
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
✔
✡
✟
✔
✔
WARNING: Do not ignore warning
messages, failure to take appropriate
action may result in injury or damage
to the vehicle.
✳
✡
✧
✑
✔
✒
❋
✧
✟
✴
✍
✟
✴
✔
✥
✤
❑
✤
☛
✟
✑
✌
✦
✡
✍
➩
✡
✑
❚
Messages
✸
❛
❀
✬
✱
✻
✪
❈
✹
✽
✽
Battery Management Active
The vehicle is not be able to supply enough voltage and has activate power saving mode. The
climate control and steering will operate with reduced effect. See Power saving mode, page 2.2.
Brake Fluid Level Low
Top up brake fluid, see Brake fluid, page 5.8.
Climate Control Fault
Go to McLaren Service Center
The climate control system is not functioning correctly. Please contact your McLaren Retailer.
See CLIMATE CONTROL, page 4.4.
Clutch Over Temperature
The vehicle has been subject to extreme operating conditions. This may be caused by excessive
hill starts, repeated hard acceleration, driving slowly up steep hills for extended periods. As a
result, the gearbox may limit engine torque.
Stop the vehicle and allow the engine to idle in neutral for a few minutes.
Clutch Temperature High
The vehicle has been subject to extreme operating conditions. This may be caused by excessive
hill starts, repeated hard acceleration, driving slowly up steep hills for extended periods. As a
result, the gearbox may limit engine torque.
Stop the vehicle and allow the engine to idle in neutral for a few minutes.
Engine Oil Level High
See Checking the engine oil, page 5.2.
❧
See Charging the battery, page 5.13.
✷
Battery Low
Battery Charge Required
♦
▲
✪
❂
that refer you to the Owner Manual. The table
below indicates what you should do when one
of these messages is displayed.
INSTRUMENTS
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
✎
✡
➊
✟
✳
✥
✒
✡
✍
❑
♠
☛
✥
✡
☛
✳
✡
✑
✌
✥
☛
✳
✡
✑
✝
✵
✡
✡
❁
❙
✞
✍
✒
❋
✡
◆
✡
✞
✍
✥
◗
✡
☛
✥
☛
Action
✳
The ESC has not been reactivated. Care should be taken while driving in this condition, the
braking and traction control related driving aids will not be fully functional. See Electronic
Stability Control, page 2.34.
ESC OFF Not Possible
The ESC deactivation conditions have not been met. See Electronic Stability Control, page 2.34.
ESC OFF
Invalid Operation
The ESC deactivation procedure has not been followed correctly. See Electronic Stability Control,
page 2.34.
ESC Reduced Not Possible
The ESC reduction conditions have not been met. See Electronic Stability Control, page 2.34.
ESC Reinstatement Not Possible
The ESC reactivation conditions have not been met. Care should be taken while driving in this
condition, the braking and traction control related driving aids will not be fully functional. See
Electronic Stability Control, page 2.34.
Front Left Tire
Over Inflated
Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34.
Front Left Tire
Over Temperature
Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34.
Front Left Tire
Pressure Low
Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34.
➦
ESC Not Reinstated
✷
The Electronic Stability Control is not functioning correctly. As a result, the engine torque will be
significantly limited and the vehicle will enter Limphome mode. Care should be taken while
driving in this condition, the braking and traction control related driving aids will not be fully
functional. Please contact your McLaren Retailer, see Electronic Stability Control, page 2.34.
♦
ESC Failure
Go to McLaren Service Center
▲
❳
Message
INSTRUMENTS
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
✡
✠
✥
❚
✌
✑
✥
✌
Action
✳
☛
✒
❘
➋
✠
Message
Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34.
Front Right Tire
Pressure Low
Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34.
Key Battery Critically Low
See Replacing key fob battery, page 5.28.
Key Battery Low
See Replacing key fob battery, page 5.28.
Launch Mode Aborted
See Launch control, page 2.29.
Launch Mode Unavailable
The conditions to enable a Launch have not been met, see Launch control, page 2.29.
Rear Left Tire
Over Inflated
Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34.
Rear Left Tire
Over Temperature
Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34.
Rear Left Tire
Pressure Low
Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34.
Rear Right Tire
Over Inflated
Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34.
➨
Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34.
▲
Front Right Tire
Over Temperature
♦
▲
Over Inflated
INSTRUMENTS
EFT-HAND DISPLAY
✡
✠
✥
❚
✌
✑
✥
✠
Action
✳
✟
❘
Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34.
Over Temperature
Top up the power steering fluid, see Power steering fluid, page 5.7.
Windscreen Washer Fluid Low
Top up windscreen washer fluid, see Windscreen washers, page 5.9.
Vehicle Limphome
Engine Restart Required
The vehicle has recovered from a previous system error. As a result in this mode, the engine
torque will be significantly limited. Care should be taken while driving in this condition. To
reinstate full performance please stop the vehicle and restart the engine. If the problem persists,
contact your McLaren Retailer. See Limphome mode, page 2.14.
♥
Steering Fluid Level Low
▲
Stop the vehicle and inspect wheels and tires, see Inspecting wheels and tires, page 5.34.
♦
Rear Right Tire
Pressure Low
▲
❘
✡
Message
INSTRUMENTS
➽
➄
➇
❿
➂➈
➅
➇
➄
❮
➸
➁
➀
➆
ENTRAL DISPLAY
✑
✌
✥
✡
✠
❋
◆
✥
✠
✤
✡
✑
✌
✔
✡
✤
✥
◆
✒
✠
❑
❋
✒
✤
☛
✥
✪
❂
✰
✬
✍
✟
❋
✴
❑
✔
✥
✼
❈
✿
✤
✭
✡
✑
❚
✬
❝
Display Window
visual access to the control settings and
current performance values of the vehicle.
The central display, as indicated above, is
displayed when the vehicle is in Normal
mode.
✷
▲
♦
▲
The information displayed in the center
section of the instrument cluster will change
dependent on the mode selected. See Sport
Mode, page 3.33 and Track Mode, page 3.34.
For more information regarding individual
functions see:
• LEFT-HAND DISPLAY, page 3.4
• CENTRAL DISPLAY, page 3.32
• RIGHT-HAND DISPLAY, page 3.36
INSTRUMENTS
ENTRAL DISPLAY
• LEFT-HAND DISPLAY, page 3.4
• CENTRAL DISPLAY, page 3.32
▲
• RIGHT-HAND DISPLAY, page 3.36
▲
The information displayed in the center
section of the instrument cluster will change
dependent on the mode selected.
See Normal Mode, page 3.32 and Track Mode,
page 3.34.
For more information regarding individual
functions see:
♦
visual access to the control settings and
current performance values of the vehicle.
The central display, as indicated above, is
displayed when the vehicle is in Sport mode.
▲
✑
✌
✥
✡
✠
❋
◆
✥
✠
✤
✡
✑
✌
✔
✡
✤
✥
◆
✒
✠
✤
☛
✒
❑
❋
✥
✍
✔
✟
❋
✴
✥
✤
❑
✡
✑
❚
Sport Mode
INSTRUMENTS
ENTRAL DISPLAY
✑
✌
✥
✡
✠
❋
◆
✥
✠
✤
✡
✑
✌
✔
✡
✤
✥
◆
✒
✠
✤
☛
✒
❑
❋
✥
✍
✔
✟
❋
✴
✥
✤
❑
✡
✑
❚
Track Mode
visual access to the control settings and
current performance values of the vehicle.
The central display, as indicated above, is
displayed when the vehicle is in Track mode.
❖
▲
♦
▲
The information displayed in the center
section of the instrument cluster will change
dependent on the mode selected.
See Normal Mode, page 3.32 and Sport Mode,
page 3.33.
For more information regarding individual
functions see:
• LEFT-HAND DISPLAY, page 3.4
• CENTRAL DISPLAY, page 3.32
• RIGHT-HAND DISPLAY, page 3.36
INSTRUMENTS
ENTRAL DISPLAY
✡
✤
✒
✧
✥
✍
✥
✌
✴
✟
✌
❙
✝
✥
☛
✒
✠
✌
✝
✡
✍
❳
✡
✑
✌
✦
✒
☛
✒
✥
✌
✟
✧
✠
✥
✦
☛
❍
❫
▲
♦
selected is displayed. For more information
on the different settings that are available,
see Active dynamics control, page 2.24.
▲
❁
✟
✑
✡
✑
✌
✦
✒
☛
✒
✥
✌
✟
✧
✠
✥
✦
✒
❁
☛
✠
✟
✡
☛
✡
✌
✳
✠
✠
✓
✝
✡
✑
✌
✔
✑
✔
✒
❋
✠
✒
✌
✟
✝
✥
✤
☛
✥
✠
The mode will not be implemented if all
pre-conditions are not met.
✟
For more information, see Manual/Automatic
mode, page 2.21.
✡
NOTE: If the ACTIVE button has not been
pressed (active dynamics panel is off),
the Handling and Powertrain displays will
both show Normal and will be displayed
in white.
✡
The gear position indicator moves to the
center of the instrument cluster, swapping
position with the speedometer, when the
vehicle is in Sport or Track mode. See Sport
Mode, page 3.33 and Track Mode, page 3.34.
✑
ndling and powertrain
mode selected is displayed. For more
information on the different settings that are
available, see Active dynamics control,
page 2.24.
Electronic Stability Control Mode Display
✒
Handling and Powertrain Display
position selected: Neutral, Gear 1-7, or
Reverse. The indicator will also show A or M
depending on whether Automatic or Manual
mode is selected.
✳
❚
Gear Position Indicator
INSTRUMENTS
➽
➄
➇
❿
➂➈
➅
➅
➁
➄
➺➻
➸
➻
➂➃
❮
IGHT-HAND DISPLAY
Oil Temperature
Water Temperature
If the gauge shows high temperature,
ORANGE, slow down until the temperature
drops to normal. If the temperature continues
to rise and the gauge turns RED, a warning
message will appear in the central display.
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✤
✡
✍
✟
✴
✥
✤
✔
❑
✔
✥
✡
✠
✓
✌
✟
✠
✡
✡
✧
❑
✌
✠
✡
✌
✟
✡
✑
❋
❚
✦
✒
✧
✠
✒
✦
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✤
✡
✍
✟
✴
✥
✤
✔
❑
✔
✥
✡
✠
✓
✌
✟
✠
✡
✧
❑
✡
✌
✍
✥
✒
✡
✑
❚
Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits and
contact your McLaren Retailer immediately.
High temperature is indicated if the gauge
turns ORANGE and excessive temperature is
indicated by the gauge turning RED.
High temperature is indicated if the gauge
turns ORANGE and excessive temperature is
indicated by the gauge turning RED.
❢
When the engine is first started the gauge will
be BLUE. As the engine warms up the color
will change to GREEN, indicating normal
temperature.
▲
When the engine is first started the gauge will
be BLUE. As the engine warms up the color
will change to GREEN, indicating normal
temperature.
♦
form of a colored gauge on the right-hand
side of the instrument cluster.
▲
a colored gauge on the right-hand side of the
instrument cluster.
INSTRUMENTS
IGHT-HAND DISPLAY
✡
❘
✡
✑
✌
✍
✥
✌
☛
✓
✡
✝
☛
✟
✌
✔
✥
✤
✤
✡
✌
✟
✧
✥
✌
✪
✔
✡
✡
✑
✸
✭
✼
✹
✌
✔
✥
✯
✪
✡
✟
Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits and
contact your McLaren Retailer.
☛
➉
❈
ORANGE, slow down until the temperature
drops to normal. If the temperature continues
to rise and the gauge turns RED, a warning
message will appear in the central display.
✳
✟
✦
✒
✧
✠
✒
✦
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✤
✡
✍
✟
✴
✔
✥
✤
❑
✔
✥
✪
✲
✪
✼
✼
✪
✯
✼
✍
✡
◆
✡
✍
✍
✡
✓
✦
✡
✑
colored gauge on the right-hand side of the
instrument cluster.
The gauge is green when there is more than
approximately 2.9 gallons (11 liters) of fuel
remaining in the tank.
❦
▲
The gauge turns AMBER when there is less
than approximately 2.9 gallons (11 liters) of
fuel remaining in the tank.
♦
❚
➉
vehicle requires refuelling.
▲
✠
✓
The gauge turns RED when there is less than
approximately 1.3 gallons (5 liters) of fuel
remaining in the tank.
♠
✌
✟
✠
✡
✡
✧
❑
✌
✑
✑
✔
✥
✳
✑
✒
❋
✔
✡
✟
✓
✳
✡
✑
✌
✳
✦
❄
Fuel Level and Range
⑨
❷
⑥
✏
✏
❷
❶
①
❋
✡
⑥
✏
✏
✗
❸
①
☛
✥
✌
③
4.14
4.15
4.15
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.19
4.20
4.21
✚
✗
✏
⑤
①
③
④
③
④
Entry lighting..................................................................................................
Exit lighting .....................................................................................................
Stowage nets..................................................................................................
Stowage compartments............................................................................
Cup holders.....................................................................................................
Owner documentation...............................................................................
Sun visors.........................................................................................................
Accessory power sockets..........................................................................
USB sockets ....................................................................................................
⑥
①
❷
❶
①
⑥
①
⑨
❶
✉
✇
①
①
⑨
❷
❋
✡
✥
◆
✠
③
▲
❶
✡
◆
❷
♥
♦
In the event of a theft ................................................................................. 4.13
❖
⑨
Controls ............................................................................................................... 4.4
Modes of Operation ........................................................................................ 4.5
A/C (Screen) Button ....................................................................................... 4.7
Demisting/Defrosting.................................................................................... 4.7
Temperature Control ..................................................................................... 4.8
Air Recirculation Mode .................................................................................. 4.8
Blower Speed Control .................................................................................... 4.9
Air Distribution Settings............................................................................. 4.10
Heated seats................................................................................................... 4.10
Heated mirror................................................................................................. 4.11
System Calibration ....................................................................................... 4.12
✈
✳
✳
✴
✥
◆
✠
⑨
⑤
✡
◆
◗
✉
❶
Opening and closing....................................................................................... 4.2
◗
①
⑥
✑
✥
✍
②
⑥
①
✉
✉
✒
✥
✠
✡
✌
☛
❄
✎
✏
✌
✡
✦
✟
❙
✠
WINDOWS
❷
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
➈
trapped as you open or close the
windows. Do not rest any part of your
body against the window. There is a
risk of becoming trapped by the
movement of the window. If there is a
risk of entrapment, stop movement
of the window.
✪
❅
✻
✽
❈
❣
✬
✼
✼
❤
✬
✫
✮
✪
❥
❞
❡
✪
❅
❝
✾
❝
❊
❜
❵
✪
❀
❈
❤
✸
✪
✸
✬
✬
❈
✸
✻
❅
✻
✪
✭
✯
✽
❞
✸
➳
❝
✾
❊
❝
Opening and closing
❜
❛
❵
Safety
❛
❰
❾
➅
➂➁
❰
INDOWS
engine to be started and is also used
to activate other features on the
vehicle.
Take the key fob with you, every time
you leave the vehicle to prevent
unsupervised operation of the
windows, which may result in injury.
Switches for both windows are located on the
driver!s door console. A switch for the
passenger!s window is located on the
passenger!s door console.
1. Driver!s window switch.
2. Passenger!s window switch.
Press switch (1) or (2). The window will open
for as long as the switch is pressed.
Pull switch (1) or (2). The window will close for
as long as the switch is pressed.
To open or close a window fully, press or pull
switch (1) or (2) fully and release.
✷
♦
❖
NOTE: To stop a window opening or
closing, press or pull the appropriate
switch.
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
✸
✪
✭
❀
✰
✼
✱
❅
✪
✲
✪
✼
✻
✬
✸
✬
❈
✸
❀
✬
✱
✻
✪
❞
✶
➭
➭
✻
✬
❝
✾
❝
✭
❈
➪
✭
❊
✔
Push switches (1) and (2) downwards until the
windows are open and hold them in this
position for 5 seconds.
Pull both switches upwards until the windows
are closed and hold them in this position for
5 seconds.
The windows are now reset.
▲
♦
If this does not resolve the issue, please
contact your McLaren Retailer immediately.
❖
✟
✑
✴
✠
✡
✌
✌
✟
❍
✡
✑
✌
✦
✥
✌
✡
✔
✽
✡
❣
✠
✬
✸
✰
✡
✱
✔
✌
❍
❣
✓
✪
✧
❅
✻
❋
✔
✹
✱
✻
✸
✒
✤
☛
✻
❋
✥
✪
❜
✽
✪
✡
✑
✻
If the anti-trap protection is triggered, check
the window and the window aperture and
remove any obstruction, before operating the
windows again. In the event of an anti-trap
event when closing the door, see Closing a
door, page 1.9.
• a door is opened
❚
❜
Anti-trap protection will stop windows closing
if an obstruction or resistance is detected.
• the vehicle enters sleep mode
Ensure that both doors are closed and the
ignition is switched on.
❛
❵
unattended in the vehicle, they could
be injured by the movement of the
window.
• the windows are fully closed
been discharged or disconnected, or if the
anti-trap feature has been activated.
✱
❛
mode, window control will not be
available. If accessory mode is entered
just after the engine has been stopped
using the START/STOP button and the
windows are not fully closed, window
control will still be available until:
✻
✸
➬
➡
➞
➔
➔
➛
➤
➤
↔
➙
↕
➔
↕
➛
➝
➤
↕
➢
➛
➛
➢
➣
✃
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
➷
INDOWS
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
➇
❾
❮
➸
➁
❾
➆
➀
➸
➄
➾
➂
➇
➆
LIMATE CONTROL
✝
✥
✌
✟
✧
✒
✌
✓
✟
☛
✥
✤
✡
✌
✟
✠
✡
✡
✒
❑
☛
❍
✟
Controls
✝
✧
✡
✌
✔
✴
✔
✡
✑
❚
Overview
mode or settings can be adjusted manually.
The combination filter reduces the quantity
of dust and pollutants entering the vehicle.
NOTE: The interior air temperature
sensor is located between the steering
wheel and the center console. Do not
obstruct airflow to this sensor or the
performance of the climate control
system will be reduced.
❖
♦
❖
NOTE: The vehicle will retain the current
climate control settings when the
ignition is switched off.
☛
✥
✔
the touchscreen located on the center
console. Press the button to switch on the
climate control screen.
✳
✓
✤
✡
✌
✟
✠
✡
✔
✥
✒
❑
✧
✡
✌
✔
✔
✍
✒
✴
✠
✌
☛
✒
✝
✡
✌
✟
✧
✥
✍
✝
✡
✑
NOTE: The climate control system
operates more effectively with the doors
and windows closed. However, if the
vehicle has been standing in a hot
environment for a long time, ventilate by
opening the windows briefly.
❚
WARNING: Follow the recommended
settings given for heating or cooling.
If the windows mist up, you may no
longer be able to observe road and
traffic conditions and could cause an
accident.
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
LIMATE CONTROL
✪
❂
✰
❀
✬
❈
✱
✿
✻
✬
✻
✯
☛
✒
✌
✌
✓
◗
❲
✍
✒
✠
✌
☛
✒
✝
✡
✌
✟
✧
✥
✍
✝
✡
✑
✌
✡
✤
♠
✒
✧
✝
✥
✌
✟
✧
✒
✌
✓
✟
☛
❍
system maintains the set interior
temperature using a combination of differing
blower speeds, air recirculation and air
distribution.
The control panel uses different colors to
indicate operational states:
• Orange indicates ON.
• White indicates OFF but available for use.
• Grey indicates not available for use.
To switch on automatic mode, touch the
AUTO button.
The light on the button illuminates and the air
distribution, temperature and blower speed
are adjusted automatically on both sides of
the vehicle.
❫
♦
In AUTO mode, there is no need to adjust the
blower speed or air distribution, the system
will operate whichever controls it needs to
maintain the set temperature.
❖
Heated mirror button
AUTO/AUTO LO button
Air conditioning (A/C) button
Demist button
Air recirculation button
Temperature control - Right-hand side
Heated seat button - Right-hand side
Blower speed control
Heated seat button - Left-hand side
Air distribution buttons
Temperature control - Left-hand side
❄
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
◗
▼
✗
Climate Controls
❛
Modes of Operation
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
the AUTO LO mode will be activated again.
Pressing the AUTO button a second time will
select the AUTO mode.
✡
To switch on AUTO LO, press the AUTO
button once when in AUTO mode. The AUTO
LO symbol will change from white to orange.
To return to AUTO, press the AUTO button a
single time.
❢
♦
❖
If the blower speed is adjusted while AUTO LO
is active the manual mode will be selected by
default. If the AUTO button is then pressed
✡
✡
✔
✡
✠
✓
♠
✌
✟
✠
✡
✧
✡
❑
✌
✠
✥
✟
✪
❂
✰
❈
✬
✡
✑
✌
✌
✔
✓
✼
❈
✯
❹
✤
✟
✒
❚
✸
❂
If necessary, the system settings can be
manually adjusted, see Manual Mode,
page 4.6.
Temperature Control, page 4.8.
✠
✡
◆
✥
✠
✤
✡
✑
✌
✔
✡
✳
☛
✟
✑
✝
✟
☛
✴
❋
✔
✪
✒
✍
✍
✟
✡
✤
✰
❂
✒
✧
◗
❲
✬
➫
❝
➫
❂
To adjust the blower speed manually, see
Blower Speed Control, page 4.9.
◗
This is denoted by the color of the blower
speed slider. The bar is grey and the slider
moves by itself when the blower is under
automatic control. Here, the system is
continuing to control the blower speed to
maintain the set temperature. There is an
additional mode known as AUTO LO. The
AUTO LO function operates the fan at lower
speeds to achieve and maintain the desired
cabin temperature. This reduces the level of
sound emitted from the climate control
system whilst retaining auto functionality.
▼
✟
☛
✳
✑
✝
✒
✌
✑
✔
✥
✒
✤
❋
✓
✒
✦
the air distribution of
the climate control system, touch the
preferred button. This will then put the
system into AUTO fan mode.
✴
❄
LIMATE CONTROL
makes to their air temperature settings to be
mirrored automatically to the passenger!s
temperature setting.
Touching the on-screen MONO button will
cause it to illuminate and automatically
implement the driver!s air temperature
settings to the passenger!s side.
The driver can exit MONO mode at any time
by a single touch of the MONO button. The
MONO button on the screen will then
extinguish.
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
LIMATE CONTROL
☛
of air. It is used by max-cooling and defrosting
modes.
✡
✑
✌
✡
✌
✟
◆
✥
✌
✝
✟
✒
✌
☛
✒
✌
✌
✓
✌
✔
✥
❍
✧
✡
✤
✡
✑
✌
✑
✝
✓
✒
screen demist function. The button will
illuminate and an icon will be displayed at the
top of the screen to indicate the function is
active. The air conditioning switches on if
previously off and the blower will operate at
full speed with the air temperature set to "HI!.
NOTE: It is possible to manually reduce
the blower speed, see Blower Speed
Control, page 4.9.
❦
NOTE: Air recirculation is inhibited when
demist mode is selected.
♦
❚
Use the A/C screen button as an ON/OFF
switch.
❖
✥
✦
✥
✤
✥
Touch the demist button again to exit the
demist mode. The icon on the button
extinguishes, and the air temperature and
blower speed return to their original settings.
✳
✴
✧
✓
✑
✡
✤
✤
☛
✟
☛
✥
✍
Demisting/Defrosting
✳
✒
✒
✝
✔
✡
✝
☛
✟
✑
☛
✡
➧
☞
❁
✡
✑
❚
A/C (Screen) Button
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
LIMATE CONTROL
Temperature Control
Air Recirculation Mode
To set the temperature to maximum, touch
the + button until "HI! is displayed. In AUTO
mode, the climate control system adjusts the
air temperature to the highest setting, the
blower speed is set to maximum and air is
directed to the footwells.
temperature, or touch the - button to
decrease. Alternatively, touch the
temperature control slider and drag it to the
desired setting.
❧
♦
❖
NOTE: The temperature can be adjusted
in 1°F (0.5°C) increments from 61°F to
83°F (16°C to 28°C) by using the + to
increase and - to decrease the
temperature, until the desired setting is
achieved.
NOTE: With "LO! selected, it is not
possible to switch off the air
conditioning.
✌
☛
✟
✔
✟
✡
✍
✓
☛
❑
☛
✡
✑
☛
✒
❋
✥
✌
✟
✍
✓
✝
✠
✥
✝
✡
✠
✠
✥
✟
✌
✝
✡
✍
✡
The temperature set will appear on the
displays above the driver!s and passenger!s
controls on the touchscreen.
❙
✡
✑
✌
✡
✔
✟
✡
✠
✝
☛
✥
✒
✌
☛
✒
✌
✌
✓
✖
✡
❍
✑
✌
✑
✝
✓
✒
❚
To set the temperature to minimum, touch
the - button until "LO! is displayed. In AUTO
mode, the climate control system sets the air
temperature to the lowest setting, the blower
speed is set to maximum and air is directed to
the center air vents.
smells or fumes are entering the vehicle. Air
from outside the vehicle is now prevented
from entering the cabin.
WARNING: Switch to air recirculation
mode briefly if outside temperatures
are low. Be aware that the windows
could mist up, which may impair your
visibility. As a result, you could be
distracted from road and traffic
conditions and cause an accident.
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
LIMATE CONTROL
Touch the + button to increase the blower
speed, or touch the - button to decrease
blower speed. Alternatively, touch the fan
icon and drag it to the desired setting.
➞
prevent the windows misting.
Touch the air recirculation button, to activate
air recirculation. The touch screen button will
illuminate. To switch off air recirculation,
touch the button again and the button
illumination will be extinguished.
If in automatic mode, adjusting the blower
speed will cause the AUTO button to
extinguish.
➜
➛
➣
➡
↔
➣
➔
➣
➔
➡
↕
✃
➔
↕
➛
➙
↕
➟
➙
➛
➛
➢
➣
➙
➛
➢
➒
➑
➐
➏
the blower speed is limited and the air is
directed at the windscreen until the
engine has warmed up.
The blower speed may be limited,
dependent on the ignition.
➦
NOTE: When the engine is restarted from
hot, the blower may operate at low
speed. This removes warm air from the
vents, the blower speed will then
increase to the requested setting.
♦
➎
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic
mode.
❖
➣
➟
➙
↕
➙
➞
↕
➣
↕
➜
➙
➞
➤
➡
↕
↔
➛
➢
➣
➙
➞
➢
➲
➤
➣
↕
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
Blower Speed Control
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
LIMATE CONTROL
✐
➹
✮
✭
✯
✸
✱
✫
✬
❥
✽
✱
✭
✪
❅
✻
✰
✱
❈
✬
✲
❞
❡
✬
❝
✾
✽
✻
✸
✪
❛
❱
✭
✱
❈
✰
✭
✬
❤
❅
✽
✶
❈
❊
❝
❜
❛
Heated seats
❵
Air Distribution Settings
constantly monitor the seat
temperature.
✡
✑
✌
✥
✔
✓
☛
✳
✌
✡
✔
✡
✟
✝
☛
❍
☛
✒
✥
✌
✓
✥
✠
✌
✔
✥
❍
✤
✠
✥
✟
✡
✑
❚
WARNING: The heated seats will not
switch off automatically once it
reaches its optimum temperature
dependent on the level selected.
Please ensure the switch of the
heated seat function is turned off
once the desired heat/period of heat
has been achieved.
Press the top screen area to direct air to the
windscreen, press the middle screen area to
direct air to the center air vents, press the
bottom screen area to direct air to the
footwell vents.
All three screen areas, a combination of any
two or an individual area can be selected at
any time.
➨
♥
♦
❖
When an air distribution screen area is
pressed, the screen icon will illuminate.
the vent is open or closed.
✍
✥
✌
☛
✓
☛
✒
✥
✌
✝
✡
✠
✥
✤
✠
✡
✑
✌
✥
✡
☛
✥
☛
✠
✓
✌
✠
✡
✌
✠
✟
✓
➥
✟
☛
✠
✓
❚
air-distribution controls.
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
LIMATE CONTROL
Heated mirror
NOTE: Seat heating is only available
when the engine is running. If seat
heating is not available, the button will
appear greyed out.
❈
✰
✪
✻
✼
✿
✯
❀
❈
❀
✯
❈
✮
✸
✪
✿
✲
✬
❞
❜
✪
❝
✾
The heated mirrors switch off automatically
after a set time, depending on the outside air
temperature.
♥
The seat heater will remain in operation until
switched off.
Touch the button to heat the exterior mirrors.
The icon on the button will illuminate. To
switch off, touch the button again and the
icon on the button will be extinguished.
♥
To switch off, touch the button again and the
icon on the button will be extinguished.
ice or snow from the mirrors and
windows before setting off. Impaired
visibility could endanger yourself and
others.
♦
on to the low temperature setting, the icon
on the button will partially illuminate. Touch
again to switch to the high temperature
setting, the icon on the button will fully
illuminate.
❖
✥
✌
✟
☛
✳
✡
✑
✌
✟
✡
✔
✑
✝
✌
✥
✒
✔
❋
✌
✡
✝
☛
✒
☛
✒
✌
✌
✓
✡
✑
❍
✌
✑
✝
✓
✒
❚
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
NOTE: Seat heating will switch off
automatically when the engine is
stopped by the Eco Start-Stop System,
but will resume heating when the engine
restarts. See Eco Start-Stop system,
page 2.12.
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
LIMATE CONTROL
✍
✟
✝
✥
✍
✴
✤
✒
✥
✠
✡
✧
✟
❑
✴
✧
✡
✌
✔
✔
✍
✒
✠
✴
✌
☛
✒
✝
✡
✌
✟
✧
✥
✍
✝
✡
✑
❚
System Calibration
re-calibrate itself to ensure optimum system
performance is maintained. During this cycle,
the #Calibrating$ message is shown on the
display and system operation is inhibited.
Calibration should take no more than a
minute and when complete the #Calibrating$
message will disappear from the display.
✷
♥
♦
❖
If the #Calibrating$ message does not
disappear, contact your McLaren Retailer.
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
☛
✡
✡
✟
✑
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
✌
✠
✡
◆
✒
✝
✔
✥
✤
✓
✒
✦
❄
✔
❍
▲
♥
♦
Once installed, the transmitter and the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) are
registered with the National Crime
Information Center (NCIC) database, used by
federal, state and local law enforcement
agencies throughout the USA.
stolen, report the theft to the local Police
authority including the details of the VIN.
2. The theft is then recognized by the NCIC
database which automatically triggers
the activation of the Lo-Jack transmitter
in the stolen vehicle.
3. Once the transmitter is activated, it will
transmit a signal which can be detected
by tracking units fitted to Police vehicles
within a 2-3 mile radius.
4. When the Police secure the stolen
vehicle, arrangements will have to be
made with you for the vehicle to be
collected. The Police may recover the
vehicle to a secure compound for
further investigation.
You may be liable for any recovery and
storage charges.
❖
The Lo-Jack system comprises a small, silent
radio transmitter installed in the vehicle to aid
locating the vehicle in the event of a theft.
✴
✗
Jack Vehicle Recovery System. If you need
further clarification, contact your McLaren
Retailer.
➩
✒
✠
✞
✡
✑
✆
✌
✦
✒
☞
✠
☛
✡
✠
In the event of a theft
❋
✡
✥
◆
✠
✡
◆
✒
☛
✟
✟
✞
✁
✔
✡
✤
✥
◆
✒
✠
✆
✝
☛
☎
✄
✂
❑
✒
✥
✌
✝
✡
✔
✔
✥
✑
❚
✁
RECOVERY
SYSTEM
Overview
✌
O-JACK STOLEN VEHICLE RECOVERY SYSTEM
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
➈
✥
✠
✓
✌
✴
✝
✡
✔
✤
☛
✟
✥
✍
✥
✌
✴
✔
✥
◆
✥
❍
✔
✡
◆
✒
✠
✥
✧
❑
✥
✌
☛
✳
✑
✍
✠
✥
✳
✽
✻
❅
✹
✱
✼
✹
❈
✸
✱
✰
✪
❜
✴
❳
Entry lighting
✌
■
Interior lighting
☛
➀
❮
➸
➄
➀
➼
❮
❾
➂
❮
➸
➂➁
➀
NTERIOR FEATURES
✔
✤
✟
when you approach the vehicle.
❑
✑
✝
✓
✒
✌
✔
✔
✡
✠
(1) or (3) to switch on the
desired reading light.
For gradual reading illumination, press and
hold touch pad (1) or (3) until desired lighting
is achieved.
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✌
✥
✍
✔
✥
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
▼
✠
✹
✸
✓
✴
✒
✱
✻
✦
❅
✹
✒
✱
✮
✽
✼
✠
✒
✥
✠
✡
✻
✭
✪
✌
☛
✥
✯
✬
✡
✑
❚
✺
Press touch pads (1) or (3) again to switch off
the respective reading light.
following areas:
✍
✟
✓
✤
✟
✠
✦
✦
➧
✳
✒
➧
☛
✒
✌
✑
✍
☛
✥
✤
✥
✳
✳
✟
✡
✠
✤
☛
✟
✑
➩
✌
✦
✡
✞
✗
• the driver!s and passenger!s footwells,
touch pad
2. Interior lighting on/off touch pad
3. Right-hand reading light on/off/gradual
touch pad
For full interior lighting, press the touch pad
(2) quickly.
when you open a door
• the center console (illuminated by a light
within the overhead light panel), if the
ignition is on
• the interior door handles, if the ignition
is on
❖
The luggage compartment light illuminates
when the luggage compartment is opened.
♥
To switch off the interior lighting, press touch
pad (2) again.
♦
The courtesy lighting extinguishes one
minute after the doors have been closed or
when the ignition is switched on.
❖
NOTE: Ensure that the interior lighting is
switched off when leaving the vehicle.
When the vehicle is unlocked, the headlamps
and tail lamps illuminate for a period of time
or until the ignition is switched on.
To set the entry lighting duration, see External
Lighting, page 3.18.
NTERIOR FEATURES
✻
✪
✸
✹
❣
✬
✻
✽
✼
✼
✪
❣
✻
✬
✬
✫
✽
✭
✪
✹
✸
✪
✽
✽
Exit lighting can also be activated manually by
pulling the turn signal stalk towards you
momentarily three times. The vehicle must
be in an awake state with the ignition off.
❈
To set the exit lighting duration, see External
Lighting, page 3.18.
❈
✻
✪
✸
✹
❣
✬
✻
when you leave the vehicle by illuminating
the headlamps and tail lamps for a period of
time.
✪
❈
❈
✽
✰
✪
❅
❥
✼
✯
✩
✴
✴
❍
❑
✳
✳
❏
WARNING: Do not use the stowage
net to transport any heavy, sharpedged or breakable objects.
Occupants could be injured by
objects being thrown around during
sharp braking, a sudden change of
direction or an accident.
✌
✥
✠
✓
✝
✡
✔
✤
☛
✟
✌
✥
✍
✥
✥
✔
✥
◆
✔
✡
◆
✒
✠
Stowage nets
✧
✥
☛
✥
✌
✑
✥
✍
✌
✥
❳
Exit lighting
✪
■
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
✤
✟
✡
✑
✓
✍
✵
✑
✡
❍
✌
☛
✒
✤
✡
✌
✌
✥
✦
✔
✥
✌
✡
☛
✡
✳
✟
✒
❋
✌
✔
between the seats for storing small items.
✔
❨
✠
✡
✳
☛
✡
✔
✔
✟
❑
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✌
✡
☛
✡
✳
✟
❋
✒
✌
✔
✟
✔
✥
✡
✠
✡
✑
NOTE: The maximum weight the
stowage pocket can support is 2.2 lbs
(1 kg).
❫
♥
♦
footwell for storing small items.
❖
❚
Once the vehicle has been exited, locked and
completed its set operating time, the exit
lighting will be extinguished and the function
will not be available, unless it is switched on in
the instrument cluster or is manually
activated again through the turn signal stalk.
☞
Every additional pull on the turn signal stalk
whilst the exit lighting has been activated will
increase the time increment by an additional
15 seconds.
WARNING: Do not use the stowage
net to transport any heavy, sharpedged or breakable objects.
Occupants could be injured by
objects being thrown around during
sharp braking, a sudden change of
direction or an accident.
➛
➢
➣
➡
➞
✃
➔
➛
➯
↕
➔
➛
➣
↕
→
↕
↔
◆
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
➯
NTERIOR FEATURES
➯
■
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
passenger!s stowage net are as follows:
• Maximum item size 1 - 9.84 in Height x
7.87 in Width x 0.79 in Depth.
• Maximum item size 2 - 3.94 in Height x
7.87 in Width x Depth 2.76 in.
Passenger!s footwell stowage net maximum
item size 2 - 3.94 in Height (1) x 7.87 in Width
(2) x Depth 2.76 in (3).
❢
♥
♦
❖
Passenger!s footwell stowage net maximum
item size 1 - 9.84 in Height (1) x 7.87 in Width
(2) x 0.79 in Depth (3).
WARNING: Do not place items in the
passenger!s footwell stowage net
that exceed the dimensions stated
previously. It could lead to personal
injury or prevent the occupant
restraint system from performing
correctly.
■
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
NTERIOR FEATURES
✻
NOTE: Always close the stowage
compartment when leaving the vehicle,
or the interior motion sensor (if fitted)
will not function.
NOTE: The area behind the seats is not
designed for storing luggage or any
other personal items.
✡
✍
✒
✔
☛
✸
✿
✪
✒
✝
➭
❈
✻
✠
✡
✌
☛
✡
✝
✭
✿
❀
✡
✑
✌
✬
❈
✹
✪
☛
✥
✬
✻
✽
✪
✼
✬
✽
❣
✤
✡
✌
✌
✥
✦
✔
✥
✌
☛
✡
✬
✭
✪
✻
✸
✧
✌
✠
✟
WARNING: The stowage compartment
must be closed when items are stored
in it. Occupants could be injured by
objects being thrown around during
sharp braking, a sudden change of
direction or an accident.
❑
✧
✪
✸
✒
✝
☞
✺
❀
Stowage compartments
for storing small items.
❦
♥
♦
NOTE: When the vehicle is locked or
Valet Mode is on, the stowage
compartment will be locked and the
release button disabled.
The USB and a 3.5 mm auxiliary audio input
sockets are located in the stowage
compartment. See USB sockets, page 4.21.
❖
Depress the release button on the underside
of the lid and lift to open. To close, push the
lid down firmly and ensure that it is latched
securely.
■
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
NTERIOR FEATURES
Cup holders
✡
✑
✌
✦
✒
✡
✡
✌
✤
✳
☛
✒
✠
✦
✡
✻
❀
❥
✪
✑
✌
✒
✌
✤
✬
❈
✹
❣
✪
✡
✌
✌
✥
✦
✔
✥
✌
✡
✬
❈
✻
✽
✻
✝
✵
➴
✪
✒
☞
❑
➭
WARNING: The stowage compartment
must not be opened when the door is
open as there is a risk of objects
falling out.
Door stowage compartments
✠
✒
✦
✠
✒
✒
✤
✑
✝
✟
✡
☛
✥
✤
✡
✌
✌
✥
✦
✔
✥
✌
☛
✡
✧
✌
✠
✟
✧
❑
✒
✝
☞
✌
☛
✡
✥
☛
✡
◆
☛
✒
✝
✡
✦
✟
✔
✠
✒
✦
✔
✠
✡
✤
✍
✒
✑
✓
✝
❑
✡
✑
✌
✡
★
✥
✍
✥
✌
❪
driver!s seat for storing small items.
storing small items.
Pull the front edge of the lid to open, push
back to close.
❧
♥
♦
❖
WARNING: The stowage compartment
must be closed when items are stored
in it. Occupants could be injured by
objects being thrown around during
sharp braking, a sudden change of
direction or an accident.
storage of closed drink containers when on a
journey.
WARNING: Drinking while the car is
moving could cause you to become
distracted which could lead to an
accident.
■
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
NTERIOR FEATURES
✥
☛
✳
✍
✍
✒
✒
❋
✦
✡
✑
✌
✑
✌
✥
✤
✡
Sun visors
❋
✓
✥
❑
➥
❑
✡
✔
✥
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
▼
✠
✓
✒
❴
Owner documentation
documents:
• Service and Warranty booklet - provides
✔
✡
✡
✠
✴
✓
✒
✌
✝
✴
✡
✌
✒
✠
✒
✌
❑
☛
✒
✤
❋
✔
✠
✒
✔
✥
◆
☛
✓
✔
✡
✑
✌
✤
✍
➋
✒
information on what to do and who to
contact in the event of problems.
• IRIS user guide - provides information on
how to operate all the functions of the
IRIS system fitted to your McLaren.
✟
✍
✟
✡
◆
✡
✠
✒
✌
✔
✠
✒
✔
✥
◆
☛
✓
✔
✡
✑
✌
✽
☛
✒
✭
✍
✡
✬
✭
☛
✭
❑
✟
✱
✿
✡
✻
✮
✑
✌
✱
✡
✸
✤
✥
✍
❙
❱
❈
from bright sunlight as you are driving.
personal mirror.
➦
♥
♦
❖
These documents can be stored in a slot
under the dashboard on the passenger!s side.
■
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
NTERIOR FEATURES
➣
➛
➤
➞
➔
➣
➯
➙
➛
➣
➡
↔
➠
➞
➤
➛
➟
↔
➟
➟
→
✍
➯
Accessory power sockets
The accessory socket, located in the luggage
compartment, has a maximum load rating of
20 Amps and is the only one that can be used
to connect a McLaren supplied battery
charger.
➨
✷
♦
❖
NOTE: Do not leave any device (except a
McLaren supplied battery charger), that
draws power from the vehicle,
connected to the socket for extended
periods without the engine running. This
may lead to excessive battery drain.
Interior accessory 12V socket
The interior accessory 12V socket is located
inside the center console stowage
compartment and has a maximum load rating
of 15 Amps.
NOTE: Do not connect a battery charger
to the interior accessory socket.
■
COMFORT AND CONVENIENCE
NTERIOR FEATURES
❡
✪
✼
✪
❀
❈
❥
✭
✸
❃
❈
✪
NOTE: The MTT application will
automatically overwrite the files
previously saved on any USB flash drive
connected to this socket.
✡
✑
✌
✡
✤
✥
✔
☛
✥
✤
✡
✌
✟
✝
✒
✍
✡
✠
✟
✔
✌
✡
metry USB socket
Video and telemetry data from the MTT
application will be saved to the USB flash drive
connected to this socket.
✵
✝
✒
✔
❬
❙
❪
✟
✥
✤
✡
✧
✡
✑
center console stowage compartment.
❬
❙
❪
❚
❚
▼
✌
✡
✠
➚
✴
✧
✡
✍
♥
✷
♦
socket is located inside the center console
stowage compartment, along with the media
USB sockets.
❖
These sockets can also be used to charge
compatible cell phones or media devices.
✡
❚
✵
✝
✟
✠
❚
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
▼
✡
✑
The 3 media USB sockets can be used to
connect USB flash drives, iPods and other
compatible MP3 players to the IRIS system.
❚
❚
✭
❀
✽
✻
❂
❡
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with
McLaren Track Telemetry (MTT), USB
socket 3 will be replaced with a
dedicated MTT socket.
❀
✪
❥
✬
➴
✽
✩
❈
➍
✱
✰
✪
❂
USB sockets
⑦
✉
❺
①
❷
⑩
⑦
✟
❍
⑥
③
①
✙
✚
➊
✔
✡
✤
✟
✍
❍
✠
✡
✥
❑
❋
✎
➊
✚
③
①
⑥
✉
✔
✡
❻
✚
➊
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
①
✝
▼
✠
✓
①
⑨
❶
✉
✇
①
①
➊
✎
✏
➊
✔
✌
☛
✥
✒
❑
✳
☛
✥
✌
✦
✥
✍
✡
❶
✚
✏
①
✡
✝
✉
③
③
☛
✟
✌
③
✔
✥
✔
✔
☞
☛
✡
①
⑥
✠
✟
✞
✝
⑨
▼
⑤
▼
✌
☛
✡
✧
✡
✝
✟
✍
✡
✠
Replacement battery .................................................................................. 5.43
In the event of a breakdown .................................................................... 5.43
Towing for recovery..................................................................................... 5.44
✚
✎
♥
♦
❫
➊
✔
✌
✑
✥
✳
✉
✍
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✇
⑦
❑
✡
✔
✤
✡
✠
❺
✉
⑧
✳
✟
✑
✝
✔
✥
✤
✡
⑩
✠
✥
✌
⑥
❶
✒
✳
✴
✇
⑦
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
①
✴
③
①
❸
③
②
✡
✉
⑦
➋
✓
................................................................................ 5.17
Main fuse box.................................................................................................. 5.17
Secondary fuse box...................................................................................... 5.20
Battery fuse box............................................................................................. 5.21
⑨
▲
❶
✉
❷
⑨
❸
✥
☛
➩
✳
✑
✌
✤
☛
✟
③
✔
☛
①
⑨
❶
✥
✑
✉
✔
✟
✉
③
✉
⑥
Cleaning the interior ................................................................................... 5.40
Car cover .......................................................................................................... 5.41
✌
✡
✦
✟
✔
✠
✴
✡
✌
✌
☛
✳
✥
✝
✟
✍
⑨
✍
✡
①
✡
✑
①
⑧
✇
❯
✇
❯
①
Deflated tire .................................................................................................... 5.36
❶
①
✉
⑤
⑩
①
⑥
❶
⑥
④
①
................................................................................... 5.13
Charging the battery ................................................................................... 5.13
Boost starting from another vehicle ..................................................... 5.14
✟
❬
③
⑥
①
✇
③
❑
✙
✗
➊
✴
✌
✡
✦
✟
❙
✌
❘
✡
①
⑤
☛
✡
✧
✥
✓
❑
➥
❳
✝
✴
☛
✡
✳
✠
✡
✧
❳
Luggage compartment equipment ...................................................... 5.10
Warning triangle ............................................................................................ 5.10
First Aid kit ....................................................................................................... 5.11
Tire sealant ...................................................................................................... 5.11
Towing eye ...................................................................................................... 5.12
Fuel funnel....................................................................................................... 5.12
Fire extinguisher............................................................................................ 5.12
5.24
5.26
5.26
5.27
5.28
❺
✉
❸
❊
①
④
❶
①
⑦
①
⑤
①
⑥
⑧
Gearbox oil level ............................................................................................... 5.5
Coolant................................................................................................................. 5.6
Power steering fluid........................................................................................ 5.7
Brake fluid ........................................................................................................... 5.8
Windscreen washers....................................................................................... 5.9
⑩
➊
✳
✵
✝
✒
✍
☛
❪
ttery ..............................................................
Starting the vehicle......................................................................................
Door opening from inside - discharged battery...............................
Opening luggage compartment - discharged battery ..................
Replacing key fob battery .........................................................................
✎
✍
✥
✒
✡
☛
✥
☛
❳
⑤
❸
FLUID TOPPING UP
⑨
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
❿
➃
➂➁
❋
❿
❾
➸
➅
➂
➇
➼
❿
LUID TOPPING UP
Engine oil
✒
✠
❏
✟
❑
✔
✡
❑
✔
✓
✡
☛
✥
☛
✡
✳
✡
imately 0.1 quarts of
oil for every 625 miles (1,000 km), depending
on your style of driving. The oil consumption
may be higher than this when the vehicle is
new or if you frequently drive at high engine
speeds.
✑
❚
To check the engine oil level manually:
You will only be able to estimate the oil
consumption after the vehicle has been
driven for several thousand miles or
kilometers.
✍
✟
✓
☛
✟
✧
✍
✴
❍
✡
✼
✬
✪
✱
✌
✔
✓
✸
✧
✱
✍
✹
✡
✸
◆
✪
✡
✍
✪
✍
✥
✻
✹
❅
✒
✡
☛
✸
❥
✱
✥
☛
✳
✡
✪
❅
✡
✑
❚
✺
❀
NOTE: Lubricant additives could damage
the engine or gearbox. Damage caused
by such additives is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Further information is
available from your McLaren Retailer.
✷
♦
❫
checked. No automatic level checks or
warnings are provided.
1. Ensure the following conditions are met:
• Vehicle stationary and positioned on
a level surface.
• Neutral selected and the foot brake
applied (use left foot).
NOTE: The foot brake must be applied
for the entire duration of the oil level
check.
2. The level is viewed in the Vehicle Info
section in the left-hand display, see
Vehicle Info, page 3.9.
3. Start the engine and hold the engine
speed at 2,000 rpm for 40 seconds.
Allow the engine oil temperature to
reach a temperature between 104°F
(40°C) and 158°F (70°C).
NOTE: The throttle can be fully
depressed as the engine speed will be
electronically limited to 2,000 rpm.
4. When the timer has reached "0!, the oil
level will be shown on the display along
with a description.
NOTE: The line on the display indicates
the maximum oil level for 19 seconds
after the oil level is read.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
✫
✱
✮
✭
✯
✸
✱
✫
✬
❥
✽
✱
✭
➹
✼
✱
✬
✪
✸
✱
✹
✪
✸
❈
✽
✱
✪
✭
✪
❡
❞
❊
❅
✪
➭
❅
✻
✯
❝
✾
❝
❜
➭
➭
✹
❛
✸
✱
❵
✬
❡
❋
LUID TOPPING UP
the service cover is open, even when
the engine is not running.
Engine components become very hot.
Avoid contact, there is a risk of severe
burns.
NOTE: McLaren only recommends the
use of Mobil 1 New Life 0W-40 engine oil.
1. Open the service cover, see Service
Cover, page 1.11.
NOTE: Do not overfill. Top up in 0.26
quart quantities and then re-check
before adding further oil.
▲
NOTE: Once the oil level check has been
completed and returned a value, do not
continue to test the system. This may
lead to aeration of the oil and return a
false value. To end the oil level check,
release the throttle pedal and return to
the Vehicle info menu by moving the
menu stalk back.
NOTE: The engine must be switched off
before carrying out the oil top up
process.
2. Unscrew the engine oil filler cap.
3. Top up with the correct quantity of
Mobil 1 New Life 0W-40 engine oil, in
0.26 quart quantities. Approximately
2.90 quarts is required to raise the level
from minimum to maximum. Refer to
Top up quantity, page 5.4.
♦
top up the oil in accordance with the
following procedure.
WARNING: If the engine is stopped
due to the Eco Start-Stop System you
should be aware that the engine may
restart without warning.
❫
✡
◆
✍
♠
✡
✍
✌
✡
✟
✌
✠
✳
✡
✑
✌
✍
✡
✒
❋
✥
✍
✥
✔
❍
✒
✡
☛
✥
☛
✡
✡
✑
✌
✦
✳
➊
❄
WARNING: Never top up the engine oil
and the coolant at the same time as
there is a risk of cross contamination.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
✮
❖
♦
✸
✬
✽
✻
✸
✪
✪
✭
✯
❈
✻
✭
✪
➭
✿
✪
✼
✻
hand display, add the required quantity of oil
as shown in the following table.
✥
☛
☛
✳
✠
✟
✟
❋
✥
✑
✑
♠
✳
✒
✒
✌
✔
✥
✡
✠
✓
✌
✟
✠
✡
✧
✡
✌
❑
✍
✥
✒
✡
✑
✌
✦
❄
✦
✡
✍
✌
➩
✡
✑
✌
☛
✒
✤
✡
✍
✟
✴
✔
✥
✤
❑
✔
✓
✌
✟
✌
✔
✍
✥
✒
✡
✑
✌
☛
✒
✤
✡
✔
✟
❬
✱
➫
ENVIRONMENTAL: When topping up,
take care not to spill any oil. Oil must not
be allowed to escape into the soil or
waterways.
❫
Quantity of oil
required
2.0 pt. (1.00 liter)
1.5 pt. (0.75 liter)
1.0 pt. (0.50 liter)
0.5 pt. (0.25 liter)
0.2 pt. (0.10 liter)
0.0 pt. (0.00 liter)
0.0 pt. (0.00 liter)
Contact your
McLaren Retailer
display
1 - red - under filled
2 - yellow - min.
3 - green - OK
4 - green - OK
5 - green - OK
6 - green - target
7 - yellow - max.
8 - red - overfilled
NOTE: If you have inadvertently
overfilled the engine with oil, you must
have any excess removed at your
McLaren Retailer. The engine or the
catalytic converter could be damaged.
5. Refit the engine oil filler cap.
NOTE: Ensure oil filler cap is refitted
correctly.
6. Close the service cover, see Service
Cover, page 1.11.
✹
✪
➴
level is correct.
✿
✻
❈
✱
✻
✸
➭
✯
➭
✯
❡
✬
✡
✠
✓
✔
☛
✡
✒
✌
✍
✔
✥
✤
✟
✴
❑
✤
☛
✟
✑
✦
✡
✍
✌
➩
✡
✑
✌
✝
✡
✑
✵
❁
✏
❋
LUID TOPPING UP
will be displayed in the left-hand display.
Reduce the vehicle and engine speed until
the warning message disappears.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
❋
LUID TOPPING UP
✑
✌
✥
✧
✔
❋
✡
✍
✠
✒
❍
✒
✠
❑
✔
✔
✒
✍
✍
✥
✒
✡
✝
☛
✡
✥
✠
✡
✓
✡
❑
❏
✒
✦
✴
gear shifts, have the gearbox checked by your
McLaren Retailer.
❫
♦
NOTE: The clutch and gearbox oil has
mileage related service intervals. This
maintenance can only be carried out by
your McLaren Retailer.
❫
❄
Gearbox oil level
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
❋
LUID TOPPING UP
✤
☛
✟
✠
✡
✌
✟
✦
✒
❋
✡
✠
✓
✌
✥
✧
✟
❏
✔
✥
✌
☛
✟
✍
✒
❁
✒
Coolant
✽
✱
✪
✻
✽
✮
✽
✹
✸
✱
✼
✬
✬
✿
✻
✸
❈
✼
✪
❅
❀
✬
❀
✬
❡
✪
❊
❞
❅
✻
➭
❝
✾
❝
❜
✯
➭
✹
✸
❛
❵
✱
➭
✬
❡
antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Only check the
coolant when the vehicle is positioned on
level ground and the engine is cool.
pressurized. Only unscrew the cap
when the engine is cool. You could be
scalded by hot escaping coolant if you
attempt to unscrew the cap whilst the
engine is still warm.
WARNING: If the engine is stopped
due to the Eco Start-Stop System you
should be aware that the engine may
restart without warning.
NOTE: The engine must be switched off
before carrying out the coolant level
check and top up process.
1. Open the service cover, see Service
Cover, page 1.11.
WARNING: Coolant is highly
flammable. Fire, naked flames and
smoking are prohibited when
handling coolant.
WARNING: Coolant is toxic. Keep
containers sealed and away from
children. If coolant is accidentally
consumed, seek medical help straight
away.
❢
♦
❫
WARNING: Never top up the engine oil
and the coolant at the same time as
there is a risk of cross contamination.
2. Slowly unscrew the cap by half a turn
counter-clockwise and allow excess
pressure to escape.
3. Unscrew the cap fully and remove it.
4. The coolant level is correct when it is
between the lower and upper steps
inside the filler neck.
5. Top up if necessary using only Mobil
Antifreeze Extra.
6. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise
to the stop.
7. Close the service cover, see Service
Cover, page 1.11.
❋
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
LUID TOPPING UP
✽
✱
✰
✱
✯
✼
✫
✹
✸
✱
✭
✪
✪
✻
✽
✭
✪
❞
❣
✬
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
highly flammable. Fire, naked flames
and smoking are prohibited when
handling power steering fluid.
WARNING: Power steering fluid is
toxic. Keep containers sealed and
away from children. If fluid is
accidentally consumed, seek medical
help straight away.
Left-hand drive models
❦
♦
engine. Select normal handling mode,
see Handling control, page 2.25.
2. Allow the engine to idle for 20 seconds
before checking the fluid level.
3. Open the luggage compartment, see
Luggage compartment, page 1.12.
4. Remove the access cover, then unscrew
the cap counter-clockwise and remove
it.
5. Measure the distance, inside the
reservoir, down to the fluid level.
Maximum fill level is 50 mm and
minimum fill level is 55 mm from the top
of the filler neck.
6. Top up if necessary using only Pentosin
CHF202 power steering fluid, contact
your McLaren Retailer.
7. Replace the cap and access cover.
8. Close the luggage compartment, see
Luggage compartment, page 1.12.
❫
✡
✑
✌
✌
✠
✟
✌
✔
✤
☛
✟
☛
✪
✲
✪
✼
✰
✱
✯
✼
✫
✼
✒
☛
✒
✥
✌
✥
☛
✥
✳
✡
✑
✌
✹
✑
✝
✌
✥
✸
✱
✪
❅
❥
❋
❙
✗
✺
❀
Right-hand drive models
❵
Power steering fluid
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
❋
LUID TOPPING UP
✮
✼
❅
✹
✱
❅
✽
✱
✰
✱
✯
✼
❈
✫
✪
❥
❞
✭
✩
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
Brake fluid
flammable. Fire, naked flames and
smoking are prohibited when
handling brake fluid.
WARNING: Brake fluid is toxic. Keep
containers sealed and away from
children. If fluid is accidentally
consumed, seek medical help straight
away.
WARNING: Only use fluid from new,
air tight containers.
✡
✡
✔
☛
✡
✌
♠
✧
✌
✠
✟
✒
✧
❑
✪
✲
✪
✼
✰
✱
✯
✼
✫
✼
✝
✡
✳
✟
✳
✳
✓
✍
✡
✑
✌
☛
✡
✹
❀
✸
❥
✪
❅
✱
❑
◗
✺
❧
♦
❫
NOTE: The engine must be switched off
before carrying out the brake fluid check
and top up process.
Left-hand drive models
Right-hand drive models
✗
NOTE: Avoid spilling brake fluid, it is
harmful to painted surfaces. Any
spillages must be removed immediately
with a mixture of car shampoo and
water.
Luggage compartment, page 1.12.
2. Remove the access cover, then unscrew
the cap counter-clockwise and remove
it.
3. The brake fluid is correct if the level just
covers the base of the filter in the filler
neck.
4. Top up if necessary using only new
Pentosin DoT 5.1 brake fluid.
5. Replace the cap and access cover.
6. Close the luggage compartment, see
Luggage compartment, page 1.12.
❋
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
LUID TOPPING UP
❈
WARNING: Washer fluid is toxic. Keep
containers sealed and away from
children. If fluid is accidentally
consumed, seek medical help straight
away.
✡
✡
✔
☛
✌
♠
✡
✧
✌
✠
✟
✒
✧
❑
✪
✲
✼
✝
✡
✳
✼
✰
✱
✯
✼
✫
✹
✪
✟
✳
✳
✓
✍
✡
✑
✌
☛
✡
✸
❥
✪
❅
✱
❑
◗
✗
highly flammable. Fire, naked flames
and smoking are prohibited when
handling washer fluid.
✺
❀
✪
✭
✽
✰
✱
✯
✼
✫
✭
✪
❈
❅
✽
✿
❣
✪
❞
➴
✬
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
Windscreen washers
Luggage compartment, page 1.12.
2. Mix a solution of Mobil Screenwash
concentrate and water in a container
before adding to the reservoir.
Concentration of the washer solution
should be mixed to suit the outside
temperatures.
4. Open the reservoir cap, top up the
reservoir with washer fluid and close the
cap.
5. Replace the access cover.
6. Close the luggage compartment, see
Luggage compartment, page 1.12.
NOTE: McLaren recommends the use of
Mobil Screenwash concentrate.
NOTE: Add washer fluid to the reservoir
all year round.
The reservoir for the windscreen washers is
located in the luggage compartment.
The reservoir has a capacity of approximately
2.6 quarts.
➦
♦
❫
3. Remove the access cover.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
➸
➁
➀
➾
❿
➂
✏
➀
➽
✎
➁
➀
➃
❮
➀
➾
➀
➆
MERGENCY EQUIPMENT
✌
☛
✡
Warning triangle
♠
✧
✥
✓
➥
Luggage compartment equipment
❑
✡
☛
✡
✝
✴
✡
✧
✠
✳
✡
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✳
✔
✓
✡
✠
✒
✦
✡
❬
Emergency Equipment Safety
familiarize yourself with the following safety
information.
➝
➛
→
✃
➛
➢
➣
➜
➙
↔
➛
➛
➟
➙
↕
➞
➣
➛
➢
➐
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
➨
♥
♦
❫
funnel are supplied fitted inside the first
aid kit case.
✡
✍
✟
✥
☛
✳
✠
✌
✥
☛
☛
✳
✠
✟
✡
✑
(1) is located at the front
of the luggage compartment.
❋
➬
➲
❚
WARNING: Always ensure the
emergency equipment supplied is
used in the proper manner and for the
purpose it was designed. Always use
the emergency equipment in a safe
and responsible manner and be aware
of other road users.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
✎
MERGENCY EQUIPMENT
First Aid kit
Tire sealant
(2) is located at the front of the
luggage compartment.
(3) is located at the front of
the luggage compartment.
✌
☛
✟
✍
✟
✡
✔
✡
✠
✥
✌
✡
❚
✌
✥
✤
✥
✟
✑
For instructions on how to use the tire
sealant, see Deflated tire, page 5.36.
NOTE: Check the expiry date of the tire
sealant every year, and replace if
necessary.
♥
Place the warning triangle at an appropriate
distance from the vehicle to warn other traffic
of a breakdown.
NOTE: Check the expiry dates of the first
aid kit materials every year, and replace
them if necessary.
♥
Pull side reflectors (2) upwards to form a
triangle and lock them at the top using pressstud (3).
♦
(1) sideways from the bottom.
❫
✔
✍
✡
✑
✌
✤
✍
✡
✳
➋
✒
✵
✌
✔
✠
✥
✦
✡
✑
❚
Setting up the warning triangle
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
NOTE: Your McLaren is equipped with a
front towing eye mounting only. It is not
possible to tow other vehicles.
✷
♥
♦
❫
For information on installing the towing eye,
see Towing eye and mounting, page 5.44.
NOTE: Only use the fuel funnel when
filling the vehicle with fuel from sources
other than a fuel pump at a gas station.
Do not use the fuel funnel when topping
up coolant, engine oil or any other fluids
in the vehicle.
the luggage compartment.
Release the retaining strap and remove the
fire extinguisher.
To operate, follow the manufacturer!s
instructions on the side of the fire
extinguisher.
NOTE: The fire extinguisher must be
checked every year or it may fail in an
emergency. Once the extinguisher is
used it will have to be replaced.
✦
✒
✠
✟
✡
✠
✡
✑
✌
✌
✟
✤
✡
✌
✟
✝
✒
✍
✔
✥
✠
✡
✑
✔
✥
✓
✥
✌
☛
✳
✡
✡
✠
❏
✥
✦
✡
✑
❚
✍
Fire extinguisher
✡
☛
☛
✓
✦
✍
✡
✓
✦
✡
✑
❚
✡
✡
✴
☛
✳
❋
✥
(5) is located inside the first
aid kit case at the front of the luggage
compartment.
✒
(4) is located inside the first
aid kit case at the front of the luggage
compartment.
✌
Fuel funnel
✡
Towing eye
✑
❚
✎
MERGENCY EQUIPMENT
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
➀
➙
➯
➞
↕
→
↕
➢
➣
↕
➝
➬
➡
→
➞
➙
↕
↔
➣
➙
➯
↕
↔
➞
➐
➒
➑
Do not place any metal objects on a
battery. You could cause a short
circuit and the battery could ignite.
Keep the charger out of reach of
children at all times.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the
battery charger. The charger connects to the
accessory socket in the luggage
compartment.
▲
WARNING: Leave a suitable lithium
ion battery charger connected to the
lithium ion battery and switched on
during periods when your vehicle is
not in regular use. This will help
maintain and prolong the life of the
battery.
Never charge a damaged battery. The
battery must only be charged in a well
ventilated area; the charger must
never be covered or placed on the
battery.
NOTE: Do not connect the battery
charger to the interior accessory socket.
♥
WARNING: The lithium ion battery
fitted to your McLaren is sealed for
life and no attempt should be made to
break the battery seal to inspect the
battery cells.
Ensure that all cables are kept away
from sharp edges, are not pinched or
trapped and are not close to hot
surfaces or water.
battery in optimum condition, always
leave the McLaren supplied battery
charger connected to the battery and
switched on during periods when your
vehicle is not in regular use.
♦
WARNING: Your McLaren is fitted with
a lithium ion battery. Only a lithium
ion battery charger can be used on
this type of battery. Contact your
McLaren Retailer for more
information.
WARNING: Before use, check that all
cables are in good condition; do not
use cables that are damaged.
❫
yourself with the following safety information.
➐
✡
★
✥
✠
✟
✥
✍
✥
✧
✟
✦
✡
✠
♠
✟
✑
✠
✳
✝
✡
✌
✌
✠
✴
✟
✑
✡
❍
✌
Charging the battery
➏
❇
✳
☛
✥
✔
✓
✡
✠
✒
✦
✡
❬
Battery safety
➎
➆
➁
➄
➁
➀
➸
➂➁
➄
➾
➅
➁
➄
➀
❮
➆
➽
❮
➀
➸
➸
➄
➄
ATTERY CARE AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
❇
ATTERY CARE AND MAINTENANCE
are 12V and that the booster cables
have insulated clamps and are
approved for use with 12V batteries.
WARNING: Do not connect positive (+)
terminals to negative (-) terminals.
WARNING: Take care when working
near rotating parts of the engine.
Ensure cables are kept well clear.
NOTE: Do not use a 24V booster start
system. These produce excessive
voltage and can damage the vehicle!s
electrical system.
NOTE: It is not possible to push or tow
start a vehicle with a discharged battery.
❖
♥
♦
NOTE: If using a donor vehicle, please
allow it to have the engine running for a
minimum of two minutes before trying
to start the disabled vehicle.
❫
✒
✔
✌
✥
✟
✠
✵
✡
✤
❑
♠
✔
✓
✡
✌
✒
❍
✭
✪
✔
✥
✡
✍
✝
✥
✯
❀
✪
✰
✑
✡
◆
✭
✬
✠
✒
✸
✱
✻
✽
✬
✬
✹
☛
✒
✤
✟
✦
❄
✽
✪
✱
✭
❈
✪
✻
✻
❤
❅
✻
✬
❈
❤
✻
❅
✻
✪
✭
✯
✽
✸
➳
❞
❊
❝
✾
❝
❜
❛
❵
✗
✩
➭
✽
❈
✪
✼
❤
✭
✪
✻
✽
✬
✬
❤
✹
✸
✱
✽
➍
❀
Boost starting from another vehicle
that the battery location is adjacent, but
ensure the two vehicles do not touch.
2. Apply the parking brake and ensure that
the transmission of both vehicles is set
in neutral (or Park for vehicles with
automatic transmission).
3. Switch off the ignition and all electrical
equipment in both vehicles.
4. Open the luggage compartment and
remove any items stowed inside.
5. Remove the 2 quarter turn screws
securing the top of the battery access
cover.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
❇
ATTERY CARE AND MAINTENANCE
12. Check that the cables are clear of any
moving components and that all four
connections are secure.
17.
NOTE: Do not switch on any electrical
circuits on the previously disabled
vehicle until after the booster cables
have been removed.
❫
NOTE: Before connecting the booster
cables, ensure that the battery terminals
on the disabled vehicle are correctly and
securely connected and that all
electrical equipment has been switched
off.
15.
16.
♥
access cover and disconnect the 3
electrical connectors on the back of the
cover.
7. Lift the battery access cover upwards, off
its locating pegs, and remove.
♦
✡
✌
✌
✠
✴
✟
✑
✌
✡
❍
✦
✒
✌
✒
❑
✡
✑
✌
✦
✒
✌
✒
❑
✡
✑
✌
☛
✡
◗
❑
❼
14.
8. Connect one end of the positive (+)
booster cable to the positive (+) terminal
on the donor vehicle!s battery.
9. Connect the other end of the positive (+)
booster cable to the positive (+) terminal
tab on the disabled vehicle!s battery (A).
10. Connect one end of negative (-) booster
cable to the negative (-) terminal on the
donor vehicle!s battery.
11. Connect the other end of the negative (-)
booster cable to the negative (-) terminal
on the disabled vehicle!s battery (B).
❫
13.
WARNING: Ensure that each
connection is securely made and that
there is no risk of the clips
accidentally slipping or being pulled
from the connection points/battery
terminal - this could cause sparking,
which could lead to fire or explosion.
Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for two minutes.
The electrical system on the disabled
vehicle should now be ready for the
engine to be started.
Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
Allow both vehicles to idle for two
minutes.
Switch off the donor vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
❈
❀
❀
✐
✮
✭
✯
✸
✱
✽
✯
✬
✱
✭
✪
✽
✰
✱
✬
✲
➹
✽
✪
✼
❤
✪
❅
❈
✻
❞
❡
✬
✹
✸
✻
✱
❝
✪
❊
✾
❝
❜
✸
✬
✽
✱
✸
❛
has been disconnected, it may be
necessary to reset the windows, see
Resetting the windows, page 4.3. If this
does not resolve the issue, please
contact your McLaren Retailer
immediately.
❵
✶
➡
➞
➜
➛
➟
➡
↔
➢
➤
➔
↕
➜
➝
➝
→
✃
➔
↕
➡
➛
➣
➣
↔
✃
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
❀
➬
➬
➮
➷
❇
ATTERY CARE AND MAINTENANCE
use caution when removing the
booster cables as the engine on the
previously disabled vehicle will be
running. You will be working close to
components carrying high voltage, or
may be hot.
❢
♥
♦
❫
1. Disconnect the booster cables in the
reverse order to that used for
connection.
2. Refit the battery access cover, connect
the 2 electrical connectors and secure
with the 2 screws.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
➈
❀
❀
✽
✽
❈
✪
●
✬
❤
✪
✽
✯
❂
❈
✫
✸
✱
✕
✒
❏
✡
✔
❍
✓
✦
☛
✥
✟
✧
✡
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
• if a manual seat is fitted, lift the tilt
❦
♥
♦
release lever and tilt the left-hand
seat backrest forwards
• if an electric seat is fitted, pull the
release strap (shown above) and tilt
the left-hand seat backrest forwards
• if a racing seat is fitted, slide the
racing seat forwards
❫
On top of the battery, in the
luggage compartment,
beneath the luggage
compartment cover.
✝
Battery fuse
box
✝
Below the dashboard on the
passenger!s side.
✟
Secondary
fuse box
✒
✸
❀
❈
✬
✱
✻
❃
✬
●
✬
✩
✪
✽
Behind a panel in the rear
bulkhead, behind the lefthand seat.
❚
NOTE: Before removing a fuse, turn off
all electrical equipment and switch off
the ignition.
Main fuse
box
✗
Use replacement fuses of the same
rating and type. Incorrect fuse ratings
can overload a system and cause a
fire or malfunction. Blown fuses
should be replaced and no attempt
should be made to repair a blown
fuse.
There are three fuse boxes fitted to your
McLaren.
✯
electrical systems. The failure of any
fuse will render the system it protects
inoperative.
➉
❀
✽
✪
✼
✱
❅
✪
✲
✪
❀
❅
✻
✻
✪
✻
✬
✭
✽
✪
✽
➭
Main fuse box
❞
✯
➉
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
Fuse replacement
➀
➈
➼
❋
USES
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
❧
♥
♦
❫
NOTE: A label identifying the fuses is
attached to the inside of the access
panel.
4. Remove the appropriate fuse and
replace it with a fuse of the same value
as the original. If in doubt, check the fuse
specification chart.
➩
➩
✙
F12
F13
Powertrain Chassis Control
Unit
F14
Engine Control Module
F15
10
Relays
F16
10
OBD Diagnostics
F17
Door Locking Switch
F18
50
ECU Main Relay Control
F19
F20
30
Seat Driver!s
❈
✻
✭
❀
❅
✸
❀
❈
✬
✱
F11
✰
✪
✻
✪
✻
✬
✭
❀
✻
❀
✱
✫
✱
➭
✪
✽
✪
➭
✻
✱
✯
✭
✱
✺
❀
✽
●
✯
✫
✬
❤
✪
✽
✯
✽
➭
✿
❛
✫
❈
✸
♦
Circuit protected
60
Secondary Air Pump
F2
F3
F4
F5
30
Powertrain Chassis Control
Unit
F6
30
Powertrain Chassis Control
Unit
F21
30
Seat Passenger!s
F22
30
Fuel Pump 1
F7
30
Starter
F23
Tilt and Microwave Sensor
F8
20
Heated Mirrors
F24
15
Audio Amplifier (Tier 1 & 2)
F9
30
Audio Amplifier (Tier 3)
F25
10
Driver!s/Passenger!s Door
Latch
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✠
✓
panel to the bulkhead and remove the
panel
3. Refer to the fuse specification chart on
page 5.18 to determine which fuse
protects the non-functioning electrical
system.
Amps
F1
✳
✝
✡
✔
✔
✍
✝
✠
✥
❑
✡
✍
✒
✒
❋
✡
✑
✌
❋
✌
✡
✔
✟
✡
✍
✡
❘
✎
✬
❝
✱
❂
NOTE: If a replacement fuse does not
solve the electrical problem, or it fails
immediately, contact your McLaren
Retailer.
No.
✗
5. Fit the access panel by inserting the two
upper retaining clips in the bulkhead and
securing with the two lower clips.
➋
❋
USES
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
No.
Amps
Circuit protected
✔
☛
✟
☛
✥
✍
✒
✒
✘
✎
✏
F28
R44 -
F29
F45
10
F30
Electrical Thermostats,
Camshaft Actuators
F31
50
Cooling Fan Left-Hand
F46
F32
50
Cooling Fan Right-Hand
F47
F33
F48
F34
20
Wheel Arch Fan
F49
Starter
F35
F36
20
Battery Main Relay
F37
15
Canister Purge
F38
15
Fuel Injection and Ignition Left-Hand Bank
F39
15
Fuel Injection and Ignition Right-Hand Bank
F40
10
Engine Ancillaries
Wheel Arch Fan
R50 -
R51 -
Heated Mirrors
R52 -
R53 -
Powertrain Chassis Control
Unit
R54 -
Powertrain Chassis Control
Unit
R55 -
Starter
R56 -
Secondary Air Pump
➋
✳
❁
➩
➊
R58 -
ECU Main relay Control
➦
♥
R43 -
♦
Audio Amplifier (Tier 1 & 2)
❫
15
❘
➩
➩
❘
F27
R41 -
No.
Circuit protected
❁
❁
➋
Amps
Circuit protected
❄
Amps
✗
❼
✎
No.
✙
❋
USES
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
❋
USES
➨
NOTE: If you wish to lower the closing
panel fully, also remove the two clips at
the rear (3).
✷
✸
❀
❈
✬
✱
✻
❀
✱
✫
✱
➭
✪
✽
✪
✽
●
✯
✫
✬
❤
✪
✽
✯
✫
❈
✮
✭
✰
➴
❀
✸
✬
✔
✥
✒
2. Remove the two front screws (1).
3. Remove the side fixing clip (2).
♦
chart
5. Remove the appropriate fuse and
replace it with a fuse of the same value
as the original. If in doubt, check the fuse
specification chart.
6. Raise the closing panel into position, fit
the clip and fit and tighten the two front
screws.
✰
✪
✻
❀
✪
✻
✬
✭
➭
✻
✱
✯
❀
✭
✱
✺
✽
➭
✿
❛
♦
✬
NOTE: Do not lower the closing panel
further than necessary as it could be
damaged.
❝
❏
✔
✡
❍
✓
✦
✴
gained by lowering the closing panel
below the dashboard on the passenger!s
side.
❫
✪
❀
✽
❀
4. Lower the closing panel, sufficiently to
gain access to the fuse box.
✠
✟
✽
❈
●
✪
✤
☛
✒
❤
✪
✽
✯
✬
✝
✡
✔
✡
✑
✌
✒
✌
✫
❈
✭
✰
✸
✮
✔
✔
✡
✝
✝
☞
✬
❀
✗
✪
➴
Secondary fuse box
F1
20
Driver!s door
F2
20
Passenger!s door
F3
25
Lights
F4
20
Lights
F5
35
Body
F6
35
Body
F7
35
Alarm
F8
Off Board AM/FM Tuner
F9
USB AUX Module
F10 10
Air conditioning
F11 3
Alarm Control Unit
F12 3
Tracker
F13 7.5
Alarm
F14 10
Instrument cluster
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
❋
USES
❀
✤
☛
✟
✤
✥
✍
✌
☛
✡
✧
✌
✠
✟
❑
✧
✽
✒
✽
✝
❈
❀
✳
✡
✪
●
✟
❤
✪
✽
✯
✫
✮
✭
✪
✬
✳
✳
✓
✍
✡
✑
✌
☛
✡
❑
◗
✻
✻
✗
remove any items stowed inside.
♥
✷
5. Press the 2 catches on the right-hand
side of the cover and remove the cover
from the fuse box.
♦
2. Remove the 2 screws securing the top of
the battery access cover.
3. Open the top of the battery access cover
and disconnect the 2 electrical
connectors on the back of the cover.
4. Lift the battery access cover upwards, off
its locating pegs, and remove.
❫
✩
❈
Battery fuse box
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
✷
✷
♦
❈
✻
✭
❀
❅
✸
❀
❈
✬
✱
✻
✱
❀
✰
✪
✻
✪
✻
✬
✭
❀
✫
➭
✱
✪
✽
✪
✻
✱
✯
➭
✽
●
✯
✫
✭
✱
✺
❀
✬
❤
✪
✽
✯
✫
✭
✮
✽
➭
✿
❛
✪
✻
✻
♦
30
Air Conditioning - Motor Control Module
50
Secondary Fuse Box Supply
20
Electronic Stability Control
valves
40
Electronic Stability Control
motor
20
Auxiliary Power Socket Luggage Compartment
40
Secondary Fuse Box Supply
100
Electro Hydraulic Power
Assisted Steering
10
200
Main Fuse Box Supply
11
✤
☛
✟
✡
✔
✓
✦
✡
✌
✟
✥
✠
✒
✠
replace it with a fuse of the same value
as the original. If in doubt, check the fuse
specification chart.
7. Engage the left-hand side of the cover
with the fuse box, and push the righthand side down to fully engage the clips.
8. Refit the battery access cover, connect
the 2 electrical connectors and secure
with the 2 screws.
9. Stow the contents removed from the
luggage compartment.
❫
❑
✡
✟
❑
❑
✑
✌
✡
◆
✒
✧
✡
❘
❼
✬
❝
✩
❈
❋
USES
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
➃
➂➁
➸
➻
➂➃
➇
IGHTING
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✦
✒
✌
✝
✡
✔
✟
✌
❑
☛
✟
✌
✠
✒
✧
✥
❑
☛
✟
✔
✥
✳
☛
✥
✌
✑
✥
✳
✞
Vehicle lights
safety. You must ensure that all lights are
working at all times.
All the external lights on your McLaren use
the latest Light Emitting Diode technology.
✳
☛
✥
✌
✌
✥
✧
❳
✌
✑
✥
✳
✞
✑
✌
✥
❋
✤
✡
✌
✌
✥
✦
✔
✥
☛
✡
✠
✽
➭
❈
✿
✟
✞
✝
✼
▼
✠
✰
❈
✓
✒
❴
✪
❐
Unlike traditional filament bulbs, these lights
have a long life and low power consumption
while providing the same amount of
illumination.
Diode headlamps. These provide greater
visibility on both dipped and hi beams,
especially during adverse weather and driving
conditions.
▲
✷
♦
❫
NOTE: Do not attempt to change Light
Emitting Diodes yourself, as you could
damage the vehicle lighting systems. In
case of failure, contact your McLaren
Retailer.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
➃
➂➁
➁
➀
❿
❾
➅
➁
➄
➃
➂➁
✑
➆
❾
➇
➁
➇
➄
➁
➄
➾
ANUAL UNLOCKING AND OPENING
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
✌
✪
✭
❀
✯
✰
✪
➭
✬
✭
✹
✸
✱
➭
✸
✪
✬
❈
✰
✸
✹
✸
✱
❥
✬
✼
✸
➍
❀
✒
✍
✝
✵
☛
✓
✠
✒
✒
✍
✝
✵
✒
✌
✡
✍
✟
❍
☛
✓
✡
✠
✟
✓
✒
✦
✴
❄
Unlocking - discharged battery
because the vehicle battery or key fob battery
has become discharged, use the mechanical
key.
❖
✷
♦
❫
the back cover away from the key fob.
✡
✤
✥
✍
✔
✤
☛
✟
✌
☛
✡
✤
☛
✥
❍
✧
✓
✑
✌
✡
✑
✌
✌
✔
☛
✥
✟
✟
✳
✑
✔
✓
✗
NOTE: In the event of an extremely low
state of battery charge, the windows will
lower slightly so that the left-hand door
can be opened with the manual key. The
alarm system will be disarmed to prevent
the alarm sounding.
2. Release and remove the mechanical key
from the key fob.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
6. Insert the mechanical key into the lock
and, using the attached panel for
leverage, turn the key until mechanical
resistance is preventing full release of
the door.
7. Apply pressure to the latch area of the
door (to counteract pressure of the door
seals), and turn the key further to release
the door
❫
NOTE: If the vehicle battery is discharged
and if the windows have not lowered.
Take care when opening or closing the
✷
NOTE: The panel is not tethered to the
vehicle and can be removed completely.
Ensure that the panel is stored safely and
cannot be damaged when the
mechanical key is used.
5. Insert the mechanical key into the slot
on the removed panel.
♦
the door on the sill panel, underneath a
removable panel.
4. Remove the panel by placing your
fingers in the recess and pulling
outwards.
❫
✍
✡
✒
❋
✡
✌
✤
❍
✟
✝
✒
✍
✔
✥
✝
✒
✍
✍
✵
✟
✝
✥
☛
✟
✑
✝
✡
✧
✡
✑
❚
✚
ANUAL UNLOCKING AND OPENING
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
ANUAL UNLOCKING AND OPENING
Door opening from inside - discharged
battery
➡
➞
➙
➛
➠
➞
➡
➞
➞
➜
➛
➢
➣
➛
➤
➡
➞
✃
➣
➞
➙
➞
❞
➡
➞
➞
➜
Starting the vehicle
❢
✷
♦
❫
✡
✑
✌
✡
✔
✟
✡
✍
✡
✠
✡
✤
✥
♠
✔
☛
✥
✧
✒
✠
✦
✠
✒
✒
✤
✟
✡
✔
✟
✡
✍
✡
✠
✒
and the engine will not start, place the key fob
on the section of the cup holder housing
immediately behind the switch panel.
❚
✡
✤
♠
✟
✑
✠
✳
✝
✔
✥
✤
✡
✧
✒
✝
✡
✟
✑
✔
❍
✡
✌
✌
✠
✴
✟
✦
✒
❍
❍
✡
✴
✡
✑
✌
✵
✦
NOTE: Unlocking the vehicle using the
mechanical key will activate the antitheft system and may cause the alarm to
sound. Once the door is open, place the
key fob on the section of the cup holder
housing immediately behind the switch
panel. within 10 seconds. The vehicle will
recognize the key fob and stop the alarm
from sounding.
9. If the key fob battery has become
discharged, replace the battery at the
earliest possible opportunity, see
Replacing key fob battery, page 5.28.
10. Replace the cover panel.
❄
closed, the door seals or window could
be damaged.
8. Fit the mechanical key back into the key
fob.
manual door release strap retainer and pull
the strap.
In this position the vehicle is able to sense the
presence of the valid key fob and the vehicle
can be started and driven.
The door latch will then release, allowing the
door to be partially raised before it
automatically swings outwards and upwards.
Replace the key fob battery at the earliest
possible opportunity, see Replacing key fob
battery, page 5.28.
To refit the release strap, feed the strap into
its holder and snap the retainers into place.
NOTE: Only use this strap when the
battery has become discharged.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
ANUAL UNLOCKING AND OPENING
✪
✭
❀
✯
✰
✪
➭
✬
✭
✹
✸
✱
➭
✸
✠
✒
✒
✤
✤
☛
✟
✑
✦
✡
✍
✌
➩
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✡
✍
✤
☛
✟
✑
✡
✑
✌
✑
✔
❦
✷
♦
aperture.
2. The luggage compartment will fully
unlock and open slightly.
3. Lift the front of the luggage
compartment lid, the gas struts will
support it in the fully open position.
❫
button on the center console will not
release the luggage compartment if the
battery is discharged or disconnected. In
the event of this use the manual release
mechanism.
✓
✗
➣
➯
➙
➛
➣
➡
➯
↔
➠
➞
➤
➛
➟
↔
➟
➟
→
➝
➮
➡
➞
➞
✃
➛
➛
➢
➬
✪
➫
NOTE: Please ensure that the manual
door release strap is fully retracted
before fitting the retainers to their BPillar locations.
➐
retainers on the manual door release
strap are fitted correctly, and in the
correct positions on the B-Pillar after
use.
➛
➢
➣
✃
➞
➢
➣
➞
➣
↔
➢
➣
➛
➡
→
➔
➙
➛
➛
➔
↔
➛
➝
✒
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
➮
Opening luggage compartment discharged battery
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
ANUAL UNLOCKING AND OPENING
✑
✌
✔
☛
✒
✧
✎
✗
✡
◆
✠
✴
✡
✡
✌
✌
✠
✴
✟
✦
✒
❍
❍
✡
✴
✵
✡
☛
❋
✟
✌
➋
✥
Replacing key fob battery
You can do this yourself, or entrust it to your
McLaren Retailer.
When the key fob battery is discharged, you
will only be able to unlock the vehicle with the
mechanical key.
You will require a single CR2032 3V battery.
WARNING: The battery contains toxic
substances. If a battery is swallowed,
contact a doctor immediately.
ENVIRONMENTAL: Do not dispose of the
battery with the household waste.
Batteries contain toxic substances.
❧
✷
♦
❫
Take the discharged battery to your
McLaren Retailer or to a recycling point
for used batteries.
1. Push against the thumb indent and slide
the back cover away from the key fob.
2. Unscrew the battery cover and remove
the discharged the battery.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
✡
✑
✌
✌
✟
✑
✌
✥
✠
☛
✳
✓
✔
☛
✡
✡
✌
✠
♠
✴
✌
✟
✡
❍
☛
✟
❋
✍
✍
✟
✌
✔
☛
❄
✚
ANUAL UNLOCKING AND OPENING
polarity is correct.
➦
✷
♦
❫
NOTE: Handle the battery as little as
possible. Moisture and oil from fingers
can affect battery life and cause
corrosion of the contacts. Only hold the
battery on the edges.
4. Refit the battery cover, ensuring that the
seal is seated correctly.
5. Refit the key fob the back cover.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
➈
❮
➀
❿
➂
❰
➅
➁
➄
➈
❮
➀
➻
➈
➄
❰
ASHERS AND WIPERS
NOTE: Never open the luggage
compartment lid when the wiper arms
are positioned away from the
windscreen. You could damage the
luggage compartment lid and/or the
wiper arms.
❈
✪
✰
✼
❤
➭
✭
✪
✱
✿
❈
❣
✸
✱
✪
❅
✻
✪
✿
✲
✬
❜
✪
✬
❡
✽
switched off before you replace the
wiper blades. The windscreen wipers
could be set in motion and injure you.
WARNING: Replace the wiper blades
every twelve months or the
windscreen will not be wiped
properly. You may not be able to
observe the road and traffic
conditions as a result and could cause
an accident.
✽
✪
✡
✑
✌
✔
✔
✡
✠
➨
▲
♦
❫
❈
✧
✠
✟
✠
✡
✥
❑
✰
✼
✪
❋
✡
✑
✌
✒
❤
➭
✪
✱
✭
✌
☛
✒
✡
✤
❣
❈
✸
✱
✍
✟
✿
✠
❍
✡
❑
❋
✥
❣
❈
✪
✡
✑
✸
❈
✼
✻
✽
✼
✌
✡
✤
✥
❙
✸
✱
and rotate 90°.
❈
✰
✼
❤
✭
✪
➭
✱
❣
✪
❅
✻
✹
✸
✱
❈
❥
STOP/START button once to
switch on the accessory mode but DO
NOT touch the brake pedal.
2. Pull the wiper control stalk towards you
twice, the wipers will move to a vertical
winter park position and then to the
diagonal service park position.
✡
✝
✥
◆
✠
✡
✔
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✔
✡
✤
✟
✍
❍
✠
✡
✥
❑
❋
✡
✑
✌
☛
✒
✥
✌
✥
✔
✒
✗
✗
✭
✗
✬
❡
NOTE: Do not lower the wiper arms onto
the windscreen without the wiper blades
fitted.
✍
✱
✸
✬
✱
✻
✱
✸
✹
✱
✪
❅
✻
✪
✭
✯
✽
❞
✸
➳
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
Replacing the wiper blades
park position on the windscreen see
Parking the wiper blades, page 5.30.
2. Lift the main wiper arm from the screen.
3. Rotate the wiper blade through 90° and
remove in the direction of the arrow.
NOTE: Ensure the wiper blade is securely
fitted in the wiper arm.
2. Lower the wiper arms onto the
windscreen.
3. Pull the wiper control stalk towards you
once, the wipers will move back to the
normal park position.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
ASHERS AND WIPERS
To remove the small wiper blade
windscreen. You could damage the
luggage compartment lid and/or the
wiper arms.
❈
✧
✠
✟
✠
✡
✥
❑
✰
✼
✪
❋
✡
✑
✌
❤
➭
✪
✭
✒
✌
✱
✒
✡
☛
❈
❣
✼
✤
✿
✼
✟
✍
✽
✠
❍
✡
❑
✥
❣
❈
✪
✡
❋
✑
✸
❈
✼
✻
✽
✸
✼
✌
✡
✤
✥
✍
❙
✱
✗
✬
❡
NOTE: Do not lower the wiper arms onto
the windscreen without the wiper blades
fitted.
✡
✝
✥
◆
✠
✡
✔
✡
✑
✌
☛
✥
✔
✡
✤
✟
✍
✡
✥
✠
❍
❑
✡
✑
❋
✌
☛
✒
✥
✌
✥
✔
✒
park position on the windscreen see
Parking the wiper blades, page 5.30.
2. Lift the small wiper arm from the screen,
3. Depress the wiper blade clip and slide it
out from the arm.
NOTE: Ensure the wiper blade is securely
fitted in the wiper arm.
2. Lower the wiper arms onto the
windscreen.
3. Pull the wiper control stalk towards you
once, the wipers will move back to the
normal park position.
♥
▲
♦
NOTE: Never open the luggage
compartment lid when the wiper arms
are positioned away from the
❫
✗
and ensure that the clip engages in the
arm.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
➈
➀
❮
➂
➸
➅
➁
➄
➈
➇
➀
➀
➻
❰
HEELS AND TIRES
❈
❀
✰
✪
➭
✼
✪
✭
✽
✪
✭
✱
✻
✸
✭
✬
❣
❐
❈
✪
✲
❞
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
Wheels and tires
in axle pairs and ensure the tires are
fitted as specified. With worn tires,
the driving stability of the vehicle will
be adversely affected, especially
when driving at high speeds.
Consult your McLaren Retailer if you
have had new tires fitted for
information on the appropriate
bedding in time based on your driving
style.
• With new tires, avoid high speed
cornering and excess speed.
• Only have wheels and tires of the
✷
▲
♦
❫
same type and make fitted.
• Never use a tire which has been
punctured and then repaired.
• Only have tires of the correct size
fitted.
• Tires degrade over time due to the
effects of ultraviolet light, extreme
temperatures, high loads, and
environmental conditions. It is
recommended that tires are replaced
every six years, or sooner if required.
McLaren recommends that you only use
Pirelli summer or winter tires, See Wheel and
tire sizes, page 6.10.
bodywork and axle components. This
could result in damage to the tires or
the vehicle.
These tires provide the best possible
performance in conjunction with the safety
systems on your vehicle and have been
specifically approved by McLaren.
NOTE: Retreaded tires must not be used.
Do not fit used tires if you have no
information about their previous usage.
McLaren cannot accept any responsibility for
damage that may result from use of other
tires and wheels. Further information about
wheels and tires can be obtained from your
McLaren Retailer.
WARNING: Using tires other than
those which have been
recommended by McLaren, may
contact the body work and adversely
affect the handling. This may cause
loss of vehicle control, resulting in
serious personal injury or death.
Noise levels and fuel consumption
may also be adversely affected. In
addition, when driving with a load or
when using snow traction devices,
they could cause contact between the
NOTE: Modification to the brake system
and wheels is not permitted, nor is the
use of spacer plates or brake dust
shields. Any such modifications will
invalidate the vehicle warranty on the
area modified.
NOTE: A wheel change must be carried
out at your McLaren Retailer. The vehicle
could be damaged if it is jacked up
incorrectly
NOTE: Store tires in a cool, dry place,
preferably in the dark. Protect the tires
from oil, grease and petrol.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
✽
✪
❀
✭
✱
✻
✱
✭
✻
✿
✪
✿
✮
✔
✥
✌
✟
✑
✌
☛
✠
✡
✌
✌
✟
✟
✡
✤
❑
✠
✌
✟
✡
◆
✟
✑
✔
✡
✠
✥
✌
✝
✥
✠
✌
✡
✧
✧
✔
☞
✪
▲
▲
The outer tread features a larger stiffer tread
pattern that aids with cornering stability. The
inner tread pattern aids stability in wet
conditions. A central groove in the tire aids
straight line stability.
♦
❤
✻
✽
✯
✽
✪
✭
✱
✻
❞
❡
✪
❅
❝
✾
❝
✿
different from one side of the tread to the
other. This combination of tread offers better
grip in both wet and dry conditions.
❫
2. Tire profile given as percentage of tire
width.
3. Indicates that the tire is radial ply.
4. Indicates the diameter of the wheel rim
in inches.
5. The numbers denote load index and the
letter indicates the speed rating. 91
indicates a weight of 1,350 lbs (615 kg)
and Y indicates speeds over 186 mph
(300 kph).
mounted according to the labeling on
the tire wall. The word "OUTSIDE!
must be on the outer edge of the tire
when it is fitted to the wheel or the
stability of the vehicle will be
adversely affected, especially at high
speeds.
✴
✠
✡
✔
✌
✡
✧
✥
✍
✍
✥
✧
☛
✥
✡
✠
✥
✌
✦
✒
✑
✌
✤
✥
❯
✗
❊
❜
✽
❛
❵
✪
✭
✱
❡
6. Displays the maximum load which can
be carried by the tire.
7. Treadwear grade number. The higher
the figure the longer a tire will last.
8. The alpha character denotes resistance
to heat. An "A! rated tire offers most heat
resistance.
9. Information about the manufacture of
the tire. Contains place and date of
manufacture.
✽
Tire markings
❛
HEELS AND TIRES
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
valve. In order to avoid damage to the
sensor, the tires must be replaced using
the correct procedure.
✰
by McLaren are to be fitted to the
vehicle.
WARNING: Tire grip decreases rapidly
on wet or icy roads, particularly when
the tread depth is close to the
minimum. You could lose control of
the vehicle and cause an accident due
to the reduced grip of the tires.
Reduce your speed and drive with
greater care.
♠
❖
▲
♦
✡
✑
✌
✌
✟
✑
✌
✡
✠
✓
✔
☛
✡
✡
✠
☛
♠
✸
✬
✽
✟
✞
✝
▼
✠
❀
❈
✱
✓
✻
✯
✒
✴
✳
✭
✪
☛
✹
✥
✠
✵
✸
✱
✲
✱
✭
❑
☛
✶
➭
All wheels must have a valve cap fitted to
protect the valve against dirt and moisture.
✡
NOTE: It is recommended that you
always have your tires replaced by your
McLaren Retailer. Each wheel has a tire
pressure sensor connected to the tire
Regularly check the pressure of all your tires
and correct the pressure as necessary, see
Tire pressures, page 5.35.
✑
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width
of the tire. Turn the front wheels to full lock in
order to inspect the inner tread.
When the tread is worn to 1.6 mm, the wear
indicators appear on the surface of the tread
pattern, producing a continuous band of
rubber across the width of the tire. Tires must
be replaced as soon as the wear indicator
becomes visible, or sooner if legislation
dictates replacement at a greater tread depth.
❯
punctures, tears, bumps, deformation and
cracks. Check wheels for severe corrosion.
Damaged wheels could cause a loss of tire
pressure.
❫
NOTE: If tread wear is uneven across the
tire, or becomes excessive, the wheel
alignment should be checked.
✔
✌
✓
✝
✠
✒
✦
✔
✡
✠
✥
✌
✡
✑
✽
✵
✌
✪
✭
✝
✱
✻
✡
✰
✑
✝
♠
✴
✔
✸
❈
✽
✪
✼
✟
✤
✪
❅
✏
✗
❣
✠
✴
✡
✹
❀
✸
✱
✻
✡
◆
➭
✪
✌
✔
✟
✽
✡
✍
✌
☞
✸
✾
WARNING: The tires must be
mounted according to the labeling on
the tire wall. The benefits of
asymmetric tires will only be
available if the tires are fitted
correctly.
✟
✪
✰
✿
✸
✪
✿
❀
✬
✪
✭
✽
✪
✭
✱
✻
✮
➫
✼
❞
✸
❝
✾
❊
❝
❜
❛
❵
HEELS AND TIRES
tires do not contact the kerb or other
obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over kerbs,
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
If the vehicle is to be driven at high speeds,
the tire pressure must be checked, and if
necessary adjusted.
NOTE: In some markets, the tire pressure
label is attached to the base of the
driver!s side B-post.
NOTE: Tire pressures given for low loads
are minimum values which offer
optimum ride comfort.
Increased pressures for higher loads will
not adversely affect the running of the
vehicle, but ride comfort will be
impaired.
❫
Check the pressures when the tires are cold. If
it is necessary to check the tires when they
are warm, pressures will be higher. Do not let
air out of warm tires to match the
recommended cold tire pressures.
▲
➭
✽
✪
✭
✪
✭
✱
❡
❞
❊
❝
✾
❝
WARNING: If the pressure in a tire
drops repeatedly, inspect the tire for
foreign objects or signs of punctures,
check the valve for air leaks.
For the tire pressures for various operating
conditions, see Tire pressures, page 6.11.
They are also printed on a label attached to
the fuel filler flap.
♦
✽
✪
✭
✯
✽
➭
✪
✭
❡
✪
✭
✽
❜
❛
sure that is too
high or too low has a negative effect
on the vehicle!s active safety, this
could lead to an accident. Frequently
check the pressure of all tires,
particularly prior to long trips, and
correct the pressure as necessary.
❫
While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
noises and unusual handling characteristics,
e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that
the tires or wheels are damaged. If you
experience anything unusual, reduce your
speed and stop the vehicle as soon as safety
permits to check the tires and wheels for
damage. If you find no signs of damage, have
the tires and wheels inspected at your
McLaren Retailer.
❵
approach the obstacle at a shallow angle or
the tires could be damaged.
✱
✤
☛
✟
✒
✍
✔
✍
✴
❋
✡
◆
✥
✠
✤
✡
✍
✒
✔
♠
✑
✌
✒
✒
✠
❑
✔
✓
✧
❑
✑
✤
✡
✡
❑
✔
HEELS AND TIRES
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
HEELS AND TIRES
✡
✠
✥
✌
✦
✒
☛
✟
✝
✟
✑
✌
✥
✤
✡
❋
✓
✥
❑
➥
• create a risk of tire failure with resultant
4.
5.
❈
✻
✸
✼
✪
✽
✪
✭
✱
✻
✪
❅
✻
✹
✸
✡
✍
❢
▲
♦
✍
✍
✟
✧
✔
✍
✟
✡
✔
punctures, particularly those in the tire!s
tread. The tire sealant can be used at ambient
temperatures down to -4°F (-20°C).
WARNING: The tire sealant is unable
to seal punctures if:
• there are cuts or punctures in the tire
greater than 4 mm
• the rims are damaged
❫
✒
✌
✌
☛
✟
✍
✟
✡
✔
✡
✠
✥
✌
✡
✑
✌
✡
✔
✓
☛
✟
✝
✓
✒
❍
✥
✔
✔
✒
❑
✔
✟
✟
✴
❋
✟
✠
✟
✦
✔
✭
✪
✟
✡
✍
✯
❀
✻
✝
✥
✑
✸
✡
◆
✡
✯
➭
❈
✑
✹
❑
✌
✸
✱
✒
✌
from traffic and on a firm and level
surface.
If on a public highway, switch on the
hazard warning lamps, see Hazard
warning lamps, page 1.44.
Passengers should exit the vehicle safely
and remain well away from the vehicle,
the road and any traffic.
Apply the parking brake and select
neutral.
Place the warning triangle at an
appropriate distance from the vehicle to
warn other traffic of a breakdown, see
Warning triangle, page 5.10.
❴
❅
✻
✱
❣
✽
✼
✪
✪
❅
❣
✰
✪
✲
✬
✭
➭
➭
✽
✼
✮
✼
✸
❈
✪
✪
❅
➫
❣
❊
❞
✹
✱
✹
✸
✸
❝
✾
❝
❜
3.
✭
❈
❙
✱
❜
✪
✗
2.
❈
❛
❅
❀
❵
✭
✪
✾
ENVIRONMENTAL: Check tire pressures
at least every 14 days.
✻
➭
In the event of a puncture, follow the steps
below to ensure your safety and the safety of
other vehicle occupants and other road users.
accidents, causing injury or death
• shorten the life of the tires
• cause increased tire damage
• have a negative effect on handling
characteristics (e.g. by causing
aquaplaning)
✸
✱
sealant, which is located in the luggage
compartment.
too low can:
winter tires can be fitted to your
McLaren as alternatives.
✽
➍
✳
❑
❋
✳
❉
❈
✠
✒
✑
✥
✑
✒
✒
✌
✔
✥
✌
✟
✑
✌
✡
✠
✓
✔
✔
✡
✠
✡
✠
✥
✌
✑
✌
✥
☛
✥
◆
✥
✠
❑
✡
✔
✥
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
▼
✠
✓
✒
❴
Deflated tire
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
➲
HEELS AND TIRES
you have driven at very low tire
pressures or with deflated tires
Contact your McLaren Retailer
immediately.
Remove the tire sealant from the luggage
compartment and follow the instructions on
the container.
NOTE: If possible, locate the cause of the
puncture and position the wheel so the
puncture is at the lowest point to enable
the sealant to be more effective.
WARNING: Keep the tire sealant out of
reach of children. If tire sealant is
swallowed, immediately rinse the
mouth thoroughly and drink a large
amount of water. Do not induce
vomiting. Contact a doctor
immediately. Do not inhale tire
sealant fumes.
NOTE: After using tire sealant, the tire
valve, incorporating the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System sensor, will have to
be replaced.
Have the punctured tire replaced as soon as
possible.
WARNING: Have punctured tires
replaced. McLaren do not recommend
that punctured tires are repaired.
❦
▲
♦
❫
WARNING: If the tire sealant comes
into contact with your eyes or skin,
immediately rinse thoroughly with
clean water, change out of clothing
which has been in contact with the
tire sealant. If an allergic reaction
occurs, contact a doctor immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
➀
❮
❱
➆
➀
➇
➆
➂
➻
➀
➄
EHICLE CARE
❃
❈
✸
✪
❀
✭
❂
✭
✯
✬
✮
✹
✸
❈
✱
❅
✽
❣
❈
✰
✤
☛
✟
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
✌
✵
✝
✒
✍
♠
✳
☛
✥
✑
✔
✟
❋
✤
☛
✟
✑
✒
✌
✠
✒
✥
✠
products contain chemicals that are
hazardous to the environment. Always
take precautions to prevent fluids from
spilling and never use excessive
quantities.
✥
☛
☛
✳
✟
✡
✍
✝
✡
✧
✒
❙
✕
✞
☞
❚
❲
❳
▼
❲
◗
❲
❄
❘
❳
✸
❐
Washing your McLaren
place the key out of range (at least 9.8 feet
(3 meters) or greater distance) to ensure that
the doors do not open.
NOTE: Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or if it is hot to the touch, this
may cause water marks and streaks.
Do not wash the engine with hose pipe
or pressure washer.
Do not use household detergents, these
products will discolor painted surfaces
and remove protective wax finishes.
❧
▲
♦
❫
1. Pre-rinse the body thoroughly with a
hose pipe held at a shallow angle to
loosen any dirt and wet the paintwork
ready for washing, avoiding direct spray
on engine cover vents.
2. Prepare a bucket of warm water and a
good quality car shampoo. Refer to the
shampoo manufacturer!s instructions
for dilution ratios.
3. Working from the top of the vehicle
down, wash the vehicle, ideally using a
lambswool wash mitt rather than a
sponge, use generous quantities of
water paying particular attention to
areas where dirt can accumulate. Use
one wash mitt for the top of the vehicle
(roof, luggage compartment lid and
areas above the wheel arch line) and a
separate mitt for areas below the wheel
arch line.
NOTE: Do not clean the wheels with
these wash mitts.
NOTE: Do not allow the shampoo to dry,
it will leave streaks on the paint work.
4. Tar spots and stubborn grease marks
can be removed using white spirit or
denatured alcohol. After cleaning,
immediately wash the area with soapy
water to remove all traces of spirit or
alcohol.
5. Once the vehicle is clean, work from the
top of the vehicle down and rinse the
vehicle thoroughly using a hose pipe
held at a shallow angle, avoiding direct
spray on engine cover vents.
6. Dry the vehicle using a chamois leather
or drying towel.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
✟
☛
✥
✔
✳
✓
✠
✒
✵
✌
☛
✥
❋
✟
✡
✑
✌
❑
✑
✔
✥
✍
❑
✒
✹
✍
✸
✱
✴
✍
✟
☛
✒
✡
✳
✟
✧
✟
✤
✸
✠
✒
✵
✦
✬
✱
✠
✒
✻
❈
❀
❋
✫
✱
✌
☛
✥
✱
❀
✻
❑
✟
✪
✭
✡
✑
✌
✰
❈
✸
✌
✝
✡
✪
❈
✔
❑
✥
✹
❈
✻
✰
✠
✟
✍
✍
✴
❈
✸
✱
✓
✡
✳
❘
✡
✝
✥
✤
☛
✟
❋
✒
☛
✔
✍
✒
✠
✌
☛
✒
✸
✱
✹
✝
✒
✌
✔
✸
❈
❀
✼
✪
✤
✟
✒
✠
✰
✬
✮
☛
✒
✤
❤
✪
✭
✡
✔
✓
✰
➍
✸
✌
✍
✟
➦
▲
during the winter can collect on the vehicle!s
underbody, if this is not removed, corrosion
can occur. During the winter months,
regularly hose the underbody with water
paying particular attention to the wheel
arches and areas where dirt can accumulate.
♦
NOTE: Ensure the brakes are fully dried
after the wheels have been cleaned
before the vehicle is stored.
Any stone chips or deep scratches should be
repaired as soon as possible. Contact your
McLaren Retailer for advice.
❫
NOTE: Do not use acid based wheel
cleaners as these can damage the wheel
rim finish leading to corrosion.
❙
NOTE: Never apply polish to satin finish
wheels, this will result in localized glossy
patches on the surface of the wheel.
☛
✌
✓
✒
✭
✽
✤
☛
✟
✬
✭
✡
✭
✤
✥
✔
✱
✿
☛
✥
✔
✰
❈
✸
❋
✒
✽
✬
❣
✤
☛
❋
✥
✰
✍
✍
✸
✱
✐
❣
✟
☛
✟
✸
✡
✪
✪
✍
✝
✍
✴
✠
✭
❀
✽
✟
✍
✓
✰
❵
✸
✱
✡
✳
❘
➞
➜
➬
➝
➣
➙
➛
→
➛
➡
✃
➔
➝
➛
➛
➲
➢
➛
➢
➣
➢
➔
↔
➒
➑
Wash the wheels using warm water, a good
quality car shampoo and a wheel brush or
wash mitt that is used only on the wheels.
Apply polish to non-satin finished wheels to
assist in keeping them clean.
using a window cleaning solution. An
automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
After washing the vehicle with car shampoo
containing wax, clean the outside of the
windscreen with glass cleaner. Do not use
abrasive cleaning compounds as mirror glass
is particularly susceptible to damage.
✿
NOTE: Do not use cutting compound,
color restoration products or polishes
containing a harsh abrasive. These can
scratch the surface and permanently
damage the paint work.
✽
✼
✪
✪
❅
❣
✪
❅
✻
✸
✱
❅
✹
➐
➏
➎
not allow brake dust to become
ingrained in the wheel rim finish.
✥
✔
❅
✽
✱
✬
✼
✟
✝
✝
◗
☛
✥
✔
✳
✓
✔
✍
✼
✪
✽
❈
✟
✡
✔
✠
✭
✪
✡
❍
❤
❤
❍
✓
✠
✯
✤
☛
✟
✭
❈
✸
✰
✔
✡
✤
✟
✍
✽
❈
✪
✰
✠
✡
❍
❑
✥
✼
➭
❤
✭
❋
☛
✪
❵
✱
✟
✡
❁
✽
good quality polish, following up with a
protective wax.
warm water and a good quality car shampoo
only. Do not use petroleum or alcohol-based
cleaners.
❈
✽
❵
engine bay, it is advised to drive the
vehicle and warm the engine to
operating temperature to dry off any
excessive water from the engine.
✍
➛
➢
➣
➙
↕
➡
➛
➲
➣
↔
✃
➞
➔
➙
➟
↕
➔
✃
➞
➛
➔
↔
➤
➙
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
➷
❱
EHICLE CARE
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
❱
EHICLE CARE
➮
❆
❈
❈
✌
✦
✒
✔
✟
☛
✡
✌
✔
✥
✒
▼
✡
✠
✟
✝
✑
✌
✥
✍
❋
✟
✥
✠
✡
✌
✟
✭
✧
✡
✑
✻
❈
✸
✌
✌
Leave the material to dry overnight.
✴
❑
✟
✒
✔
✧
✠
✟
❋
✑
✌
✥
❋
☛
✟
✡
✍
✝
✤
☛
✟
✔
✌
✍
✡
❍
✻
✼
✪
✽
✡
✑
✌
✤
❤
☛
✻
❈
✡
✌
❏
❳
✪
➴
Once the material has dried, in order to
restore the material, brush it delicately with a
soft bristle brush.
➨
❖
♦
water only. Do not use any type of detergent
or chemical cleaning product. Allow the belts
to dry naturally while extended, preferably
away from direct sunlight.
❫
❀
❈
➭
❈
✿
✽
✸
✪
✪
✭
✽
✮
✼
✽
✱
✰
✰
✸
✽
✻
✸
✪
✯
✭
✻
✽
✧
✟
✤
✟
☛
✥
✔
✓
✠
✡
✌
✔
✓
✍
✝
✌
☛
✡
✧
✓
✠
✌
✔
☛
✥
✡
✑
✌
☛
✟
✡
❑
✳
✴
❋
♠
❍
❍
❁
✔
✟
✍
✟
✠
✡
✥
✦
☛
✒
✠
✟
✝
✡
✍
✥
❍
✳
✡
✑
✌
✌
✔
✡
✌
✔
✴
✟
❋
✍
✟
✠
♠
✡
✑
✌
✟
✡
✍
✳
☛
✥
☛
✟
✡
✍
✭
❅
✻
✪
✝
✡
✠
cleaning solution on a concealed area. Clean
with warm water and a non-detergent soap or
a proprietary leather cleaner. Dry with a dry,
clean, lint-free cloth. Do not use abrasive
cleaning products or polish.
Do not polish the upper surfaces of the
dashboard. Polished surfaces are reflective
and may interfere with the driver!s view. Clean
with diluted upholstery cleaner, then wipe
with a damp cloth.
✔
✥
◆
☛
✥
☛
✟
✡
✍
✝
✍
✭
✪
❤
✱
➉
✸
✬
❤
✡
✠
✒
✦
✡
❬
❛
✓
cloth or a sponge with water, wring it
thoroughly and run it over the whole
Alcantara® material. Make sure not to wet it
excessively; rinse the cloth or sponge and
repeat as necessary.
❈
✒
✦
✡
❬
✪
❃
❉
✔
✍
✔
✼
❀
❀
✒
✑
✓
❑
✳
☛
✥
☛
✟
✡
✍
✝
✡
✠
test the cleaning solution on a concealed
area. Clean with a propriety matt dashboard
cleaner. Contact your McLaren Retailer for
more information. Do not use abrasive
cleaning products or polish.
✽
✱
✭
❤
❈
✫
✰
❈
✸
✻
✪
➭
✭
✒
✦
tery, always test the
cleaning solution on a concealed area. Clean
with diluted upholstery cleaner and a clean
cloth.
✡
❬
✺
❈
to recommend products for cleaning the
interior of your vehicle.
✭
✺
✸
❈
✾
➛
➝
➮
↔
➛
➲
➝
➝
↕
➡
➛
➝
↕
✔
↔
➣
➛
➙
➛
➡
↔
✍
➤
◆
➡
→
➞
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
✓
Cleaning the interior
cloth. Do not use abrasive cleaning products
or polish.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
❱
EHICLE CARE
Car cover
✒
✦
✡
✍
✌
✥
✓
✟
❍
✔
✠
✡
◆
♠
✒
✝
✠
✟
✝
☞
r use inside a garage,
can be purchased from your McLaren Retailer.
McLaren recommends that the car is covered
if it is to be left in storage for periods over two
weeks. Clean the vehicle inside and out,
ensuring that it has fully dried, prior to fitting
the cover.
♥
❖
♦
❫
NOTE: Allow the engine to cool before
fitting the cover or the hot exhaust pipes
could cause damage to the cover.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
➀
➇
➆
➂
➻
➀
➀
➻
➸
➃
➂➁
➂➈
➄
❮
AISING THE VEHICLE
Vehicle lifting points
✡
✑
✌
☛
✒
✔
✍
✡
✍
✤
✟
❍
☛
✟
☛
✒
✥
♠
✌
✟
✠
✌
✔
✓
✍
✍
✥
✡
✑
✌
✒
✌
✠
✡
✦
❘
✡
WARNING: Ensure the vehicle is
correctly positioned on a jack or
vehicle lift before raising the vehicle
to a workable height. Always engage
vehicle lift safety locks or use
suitable stands to ensure your safety
before working under the vehicle.
vehicle, for correct lifting locations.
Make this information available to any third
parties who may be assisting in the recovery
of your McLaren.
NOTE: Lifting the vehicle at any other
points will damage the vehicle.
✷
❖
♦
❫
NOTE: Use a jack with a flat lifting
platform and a rubber pad to protect the
chassis from surface damage. Do not lift
under a body panel.
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
➀
✡
✝
✍
♠
✥
✑
✡
◆
✠
✓
✒
✌
✥
✑
✴
✡
✧
❋
✍
✠
✒
❍
✟
✦
❑
✒
✌
☛
✡
◆
✡
✡
✑
✌
☛
contact your McLaren Retailer. If your
McLaren Retailer is unavailable, contact the
Roadside Assistance Operator who is available
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
NOTE: The contact details of your
Roadside Assistance Operator can be
found in your Service and Warranty
booklet.
The McLaren Retailer or Roadside Assistance
Operator will verify your identity and that of
your vehicle, as well as determining your
exact location.
▲
They will then discuss the problem with you
and, with your agreement, determine the best
solution.
❖
❄
✒
✌
✡
✓
✤
✤
✡
★
✥
✍
✥
✧
✒
❍
✧
✥
☛
✡
✡
✟
✔
❍
✑
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
▼
✠
✓
✒
✦
a fault with the vehicle battery, the battery
must only be replaced with a lithium ion
battery of the correct specification.
♦
Refer to your Service and Warranty
documentation, this contains all the
information you need.
In the event of a breakdown
❫
attempt to make your own arrangements for
assistance.
❄
✌
✒
☛
✒
✤
✡
★
✤
♠
✥
✍
✥
✒
✧
Replacement battery
❍
✧
✥
✔
✥
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
▼
✠
✓
✒
✦
✴
❄
McLaren Assistance
✴
➆
➁
➄
➸
➂➈
➈
➈
➄
➁
➀
❮
➄
➇
✕
➾
cLAREN ASSISTANCE
MAINTAINING YOUR McLAREN
cLAREN ASSISTANCE
☛
✥
3. Remove the towing eye, stow it in the
luggage compartment and refit the
cover to the towing eye mounting as
soon as the vehicle has been recovered.
✳
✒
✌
✌
❋
☛
✒
✠
✦
✟
✑
✌
✥
✤
✡
❋
✓
✥
❑
➥
❑
✡
✔
✥
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
▼
✠
✓
✒
❴
Towing for recovery
eye mounting only.
NOTE: Do not tow the vehicle, doing so
could damage the gearbox. The towing
eye must only be used to winch the
vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for
recovery purposes.
✡
✑
✌
✦
✒
✌
☛
✒
✠
✦
✡
✑
✌
✸
✹
✌
✟
✱
✻
✤
✡
✸
✌
✯
✟
✝
✒
✬
✿
✍
✰
✔
✥
✴
✡
✸
❈
✪
✳
✡
✮
✪
☛
✹
❋
✥
✸
✒
✱
✌
❣
✡
✑
❚
✬
❡
Do not use a rigid bar to tow the vehicle.
luggage compartment.
1. Remove the cover from the towing eye
mounting in the front bumper.
2. Screw the towing eye clockwise into the
mounting hole, ensuring that it is
screwed in to the full extent of the
thread.
NOTE: To avoid damage to the towing
eye and the vehicle, it is important to
ensure that the towing eye is in full
contact with the mating surface of the
front structure.
❖
❖
♦
❫
NOTE: A winch cable/strap must be
secured to the towing eye only or the
vehicle could be damaged.
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY
✎
❼
✠
❍
✡
✉
✧
✓
❷
☛
☛
✉
✒
✥
②
✌
✉
✟
✝
✥
✦
✥
✌
☛
①
❶
✡
✥
✠
◆
⑩
✡
✉
✤
✥
✡
✍
✝
✥
①
⑨
❶
✉
✇
✑
................................................... 6.3
✏
❼
❋
✡
✥
◆
✠
✡
◆
◗
⑩
✡
①
❋
✡
◆
◗
GENUINE McLAREN PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
✎
✗
❼
③
①
✉
✉
❶
❺
❶
⑩
③
⑩
✉
❸
⑨
②
❙
③
✔
✌
✝
✓
✤
✒
✠
❶
❸
⑩
❷
⑥
❺
❑
✡
①
❶
✝
✥
✉
◆
✠
①
✡
❙
③
⑥
Vehicle operating temperatures ............................................................... 6.4
Engine .................................................................................................................. 6.5
Maximum speeds in each gear................................................................... 6.6
Gear ratios........................................................................................................... 6.6
Vehicle dimensions......................................................................................... 6.7
Vehicle weights................................................................................................. 6.8
Wheel and tire sizes ..................................................................................... 6.10
Turning circle.................................................................................................. 6.10
Tire pressures................................................................................................. 6.11
✏
✗
♥
♦
❢
❼
④
⑥
③
✴
✠
✟
③
❷
⑦
⑨
⑨
✔
✔
✒
✍
✍
✳
✟
❶
✉
✝
✥
☛
✇
✑
✝
①
✡
❚
❶
Engine oil specification .............................................................................. 6.12
Fuel ..................................................................................................................... 6.12
Coolant.............................................................................................................. 6.13
Power steering fluid..................................................................................... 6.13
Brake fluid ........................................................................................................ 6.13
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY
➈
➀
➂
❮
❾
➈
➈
➀
➆
➆
➄
➅
➁
➄
➈
➸
❮
➄
❿
➁
➀
❮
➄
➇
●
➾
➀
➂➁
➁
➀
➃
✕
ENUINE McLAREN PARTS AND ACCESSORIES
✡
✔
✓
☛
✒
✍
✴
✓
✒
✌
✟
✑
✴
✌
✔
✤
☛
✡
✧
✧
✒
✝
✡
✠
☛
✡
✠
✟
✞
✝
▼
Overview
genuine McLaren replacement parts and
accessories. The use of non-genuine parts
could have a detrimental effect on the
vehicle!s operation and safety. McLaren tests
replacement parts and accessories, for
reliability, safety and suitability. McLaren
accepts no responsibility for the use of
non-genuine parts on their vehicles, even if
they have been independently approved.
In many countries, replacement parts and
accessories are only officially approved for
installation if they comply with legal
requirements. All genuine McLaren
replacement parts and accessories meet
these requirements.
✷
♦
❢
Genuine McLaren parts and accessories can
be obtained from your McLaren Retailer
where the parts will be professionally fitted.
Ensure that any accessories are suitable for
your McLaren. Accessories which constitute a
modification to the vehicle could invalidate
the vehicle!s warranty. This applies if they:
• change the vehicle type approved in the
warranty
• could endanger road users
• adversely affect the vehicle!s emissions
and noise levels
Always quote the vehicle identification
number, you will find this on the vehicle
identification plate, and in the bottom lefthand corner of the windscreen.
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY
➁
❾
➂
➸
➄
➆
➂
➼
➂
➸
➁
➀
➅
❱
➀
➇
➆
➂
➻
➀
➂
EHICLE IDENTIFICATION
➭
❈
✪
✻
✼
❝
✡
✥
✌
✟
✝
✥
✦
✥
✌
☛
✡
✤
✥
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✡
• maximum permitted laden weight
• maximum permitted laden weight
▲
♦
including trailer
• maximum permitted front axle laden
weight
• maximum permitted rear axle laden
weight
❢
The number can also be found engraved on
the body behind the right-hand seat, stamped
on a plate at the base of the driver!s side
B-post and viewed in the Vehicle Info section
in the left-hand display, see Vehicle
Identification, page 3.11.
on number plate also
contains the following:
✑
found on the bottom left-hand corner of the
windscreen.
❚
✟
☛
❍
✝
✠
✡
✧
✓
❍
☛
☛
✒
✥
✌
✟
✝
✥
✦
✥
✌
☛
✡
✤
✥
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
✡
✑
❚
❱
✾
Vehicle identification number
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY
➄
➸
➄
➅
ATA
✠
✟
✔
✴
✔
✡
✝
✡
☛
✡
✑
✌
✍
✍
✟
✔
☛
✥
✟
✌
☛
✒
✝
Vehicle operating temperatures
☛
✒
✥
✌
✝
✡
✔
✔
✥
✑
❚
Overview
Minimum ambient
operating temperature
-4°F (-20°C)
Maximum ambient
operating temperature
+122°F (+50°C)
➛
➢
➣
➛
➜
↕
➔
➣
→
➞
➜
➛
➔
→
➔
↕
➛
➝
➤
↕
➢
➛
➛
➢
➣
✃
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
➷
technical data for your vehicle and applies to
the vehicle!s standard equipment. The data
may therefore differ for vehicles with optional
equipment. You can obtain further
information from your McLaren Retailer.
❖
♦
❢
minimum and maximum ambient
temperatures, performance degradation
may be experienced. McLaren disclaims
any liability of the stated engine power
not being achieved if the vehicle is being
used outside of the stated temperature
ranges or being used at altitude.
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY
ATA
❈
✼
✪
❤
✼
✸
✬
✱
✿
✽
✽
✱
✪
✪
✼
✱
❅
✪
➨
434
The label contains:
Acceleration
(0 to 100 kph) (s)
3.5 P Zero tires
Acceleration
(0 to 100 kph) (s)
3.2 Corsa tires
Acceleration
(0 to 60 mph) (s)
3.4 P Zero tires
Acceleration
(0 to 60 mph) (s)
3.1 Corsa tires
❍
❍
✤
Power to weight
ratio (PS/tonne)
☛
412
✓
Power to weight
ratio (PS/tonne)
✒
permanently affixed to the underside of the
service cover.
✦
8,500
✡
Maximum engine
speed (rpm)
☛
8,500
✟
Maximum engine
speed (rpm)
✝
3,799
✍
Displacement cm3
✡
3,799
✟
Displacement cm3
✍
Number of cylinders 8
☛
✒
Number of cylinders
✥
434 @ 5,000-6,500
✔
Rated torque (lb-ft)
@rpm
✔
398 @ 3,500-6,500
✥
Rated torque (lb-ft)
@rpm
✧
600 @ 5,000-6,500
✡
Rated torque (Nm)
@rpm
✡
540 @ 3,500-6,500
✍
Rated torque (Nm)
@rpm
✝
570 @ 7,500
✥
Rated output (PS)
@rpm
✑
540 @ 7,500
✡
Rated output (PS)
@rpm
◆
419 @ 7,500
✡
Rated output (kW)
@rpm
✑
397 @ 7,500
❚
Rated output (kW)
@rpm
• engine displacement;
• a statement of compliance with the
❫
❢
appropriate model year US EA
regulations;
• the exhaust emissions standard.
♦
❦
❫
✪
✸
✱
✹
✸
➳
➪
Engine - 540C
➴
❱
❀
Engine
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY
ATA
✗
✕
✗
✚
✛
❻
✠
✟
✡
✌
✳
➨
❦
48 (77)
1st gear (mph (kph))
48 (77)
2nd gear
2.613:1
2nd gear (mph (kph))
73 (117)
2nd gear (mph (kph))
73 (117)
3rd gear
1.905:1
3rd gear (mph (kph))
101 (162)
3rd gear (mph (kph))
101 (162)
4th gear
1.479:1
4th gear (mph (kph))
129 (208)
4th gear (mph (kph))
129 (208)
5th gear
1.161:1
5th gear (mph (kph))
165 (266)
5th gear (mph (kph))
165 (266)
6th gear
0.906:1
6th gear (mph (kph))
199 (320)
6th gear (mph (kph))
204 (328)
7th gear
0.686:1
7th gear (mph (kph))
186 (300)
7th gear (mph (kph))
191 (308)
Final drive
3.308:1
❢
1st gear (mph (kph))
♦
❢
❫
➴
✺
➨
❖
❫
✔
Gear ratios
✗
Maximum speeds in each gear
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY
ATA
Front
overhang
3 ft 7 in (1,074 mm)
Ground
clearance
4 in (93 mm)
Vehicle height
(doors closed)
4 ft (1,202 mm)
Vehicle height
(doors open)
6 ft 7 in (1,988 mm)
↕
➞
➡
➠
➠
↔
➛
➡
↔
➔
➙
➞
↕
➔
➙
➛
↕
➜
➝
➝
➓
➒
➑
➐
➏
➎
❞
➛
2 ft 7 in (786 mm)
❦
Rear overhang
♦
10 ft 7 in (3,225 mm)
❢
8 ft 10 in (2,670 mm)
Vehicle width
(doors open at
widest point)
➯
Wheelbase
6 ft 11 in (2,095 mm)
➣
Vehicle width
(doors closed,
including
mirrors)
↔
14 ft 11 in (4,530 mm)
➯
Vehicle length
➉
Vehicle dimensions
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY
ATA
3,188 (1,446)
Kerb weight (plus
165 lbs driver) (lbs
(kg))
3,364 (1,526)
Kerb weight
distribution - front
axle (lbs (kg))
1,435 (651)
Kerb weight
distribution - rear
axle (lbs (kg))
1,929 (875)
❧
Unladen weight (all
fluids and 90% fuel)
(lbs (kg))
♦
❢
Dry weight (lbs (kg)) 2,978 (1,351)
✺
➪
➨
❖
❫
✻
❅
✹
✱
✪
❵
✺
➨
➪
❖
❫
✻
❅
✹
✱
✪
❵
Vehicle weights
Maximum gross
vehicle weight
(GVW) (lbs (kg))
3,734 (1,694)
Maximum gross
vehicle weight
distribution - front
axle (lbs (kg))
1,728 (784)
Maximum gross
vehicle weight
distribution - rear
axle (lbs (kg))
2,006 (910)
Maximum load luggage
compartment
(kg (lbs))
110 (50)
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY
3,351 (1,520)
Kerb weight
distribution - front
axle (lbs (kg))
1,431 (649)
Kerb weight
distribution - rear
axle (lbs (kg))
1,920 (871)
➴
➪
➨
❦
❫
✻
❅
Maximum gross
vehicle weight
distribution - front
axle (lbs (kg))
1,722 (781)
Maximum gross
vehicle weight
distribution - rear
axle (lbs (kg))
1,997 (906)
Maximum load luggage
compartment
(kg (lbs))
110 (50)
➦
Kerb weight (plus
165 lbs driver) (lbs
(kg))
3,719 (1,687)
♦
3,174 (1,440)
Maximum gross
vehicle weight
(GVW) (lbs (kg))
❢
Unladen weight (all
fluids and 90% fuel)
(lbs (kg))
✹
❵
Dry weight (lbs (kg)) 2,965 (1,345)
✱
✪
➴
➨
➪
❦
❫
✻
❅
✹
✱
✪
❵
ATA
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY
ATA
Wheel and tire sizes
Rear wheels
✔
✡
✠
✥
✌
✌
☛
✒
✛
✗
✖
❏
❻
✔
✍
✡
✡
✑
✌
☛
❋
✒
➋
✠
➋
✠
✽
✪
➘
✱
✽
✼
✪
✪
❅
❵
Winter tires
10J x 20
Summer tires
- Pirelli SottoZero 3
- Pirelli P Zero MC1
225/35 R19
- Pirelli Corsa MC1
225/35 R19
- Pirelli Corsa MC1
285/35 R20
➨
285/35 R20
♥
- Pirelli P Zero MC1
285/35 R20
Turning circle
Turning circle
kerb-to-kerb
Rear tires
♦
225/35 R19
Rear tires
Front tires
❢
- Pirelli SottoZero 3
41 ft (12.4 meters)
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY
ATA
Tire pressures
Front
wheels
Rear
wheels
Bar Psi
Bar
Psi
Normal use
2.0
29
2.2
32
Speeds over 165
mph (270 kph)
2.6
38
2.8
41
NOTE: In some markets, the tire pressure
label is attached to the base of the
driver!s side B-post.
✍
✟
☛
✟
✝
✔
✡
✠
✓
✔
✔
✡
✠
♥
♥
♦
❢
✠
✥
✌
✡
❑
✡
so be found on a label
on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
✑
❚
Loading
condition
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY
➈
✷
♥
ENVIRONMENTAL: Dispose of service
products in an environmentally
responsible manner.
♦
❈
✪
✼
✿
❤
✿
❈
✼
✫
✮
✼
❅
✹
✱
❅
✽
✱
✼
✪
❞
✯
➉
❝
✾
❝
❜
❛
❊
✍
➬
WARNING: Do not allow fuel to come
into contact with skin or clothing.
➝
Mobil 1 New Life 0W-40 engine oil.
Allowing fuels to come into direct
contact with your skin or inhaling fuel
vapors is damaging to your health.
You may obtain further information from your
McLaren Retailer.
✍
✟
✳
✛
✗
✌
✴
✥
✝
❥
❑
✟
✻
✸
✟
✪
✯
✼
✟
✌
✒
➉
❈
For more information about fuel, see
Recommended fuel, page 2.49.
❚
NOTE: Do not use any lubricant
additives. These could lead to increased
wear and damage to the mechanical
assemblies. Damage caused by
additives, which are not approved, is not
covered by the McLaren warranty.
✝
➙
➞
➔
➜
➯
➙
➛
➞
➤
➛
➡
➙
➛
➡
↔
✍
➤
◆
➒
➑
➐
➏
➯
(9.0 liters)
✍
✟
Switch off the engine before
refuelling.
✏
✳
✎
✌
✥
✝
✟
✴
✟
✝
✍
❑
✥
✒
✡
☛
✥
☛
Fire, naked flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling fuels.
➎
WARNING: When handling, storing
and disposing of any service
products, please observe the relevant
regulations. Failure to do so could
endanger people and the
environment. Do not allow service
products to come into direct contact
with your eyes or open wounds.
Contact a doctor immediately if any
service product is swallowed.
♦
❵
✌
☛
✟
✍
✒
✒
✝
✍
✥
✒
and brake fluid. McLaren recommends that
you only use products tested and approved
for McLaren. Damage resulting from using
non-approved service products is not covered
by the liability for material defects.
❢
Fuel
♠
✡
☛
✥
✡
☛
✳
✡
✓
✍
♠
✦
✡
✠
✟
✔
✌
✝
✓
✤
✒
✠
✡
✝
✥
Engine oil specification
❳
➶
❑
◆
✠
✡
❙
Service products
✳
➀
➂
➂➸
➆
➄
❿
➄
➆
➅
➁
➄
➈
➅
➂
➇
➼
✗
➈
➸
➆
➅
❾
❿
➀
➆
➂
❮
➀
➈
❮
ERVICE PRODUCTS, FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
(72 liters)
Capacity remaining when
low level lamp illuminates
2.9 gal.
(11 liters)
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY
system
• offers anti-corrosion protection
NOTE: Use Mobil Extra Antifreeze in all
climates, all year round. If coolant is not
used, the cooling system will not be
sufficiently protected from corrosion
and the cooling system efficiency will be
reduced.
The antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor
concentration in the cooling system should
not exceed 55%, which provides antifreeze
protection down to -49°F (-45°C), as a higher
concentration will not dissipate heat as
effectively.
☛
✥
✠
✡
✳
✡
✌
✔
✠
✡
✒
❋
✎
✙
❑
✎
❩
➋
☛
✥
✔
❁
✒
✌
☛
✥
✔
☛
✡
✒
✌
✡
✔
✓
✍
☛
✴
✤
✥
✓
✍
✦
✡
✵
✟
✠
❬
✗
❚
➊
✒
❉
☛
✡
✡
✔
✓
✍
◗
☛
Over time, the brake fluid absorbs moisture
from the air, this reduces its boiling point.
WARNING: If the boiling point of the
brake fluid is reduced too much,
vapor pockets may form in the brake
system when the brakes are applied
hard (e.g. when driving downhill or
track driving) impairing the braking
efficiency. Therefore, the brake fluid
must be replaced at the
recommended service intervals.
If the vehicle is losing coolant, do not drive
your vehicle and contact your McLaren
Retailer.
▲
• increased efficiency of the cooling
Brake fluid
♥
• antifreeze protection
If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in
the correct concentration, the boiling point of
the coolant will be around 266°F (130°C). The
antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor
concentration in the cooling system should
be approximately 50% ±5%. This will protect
the cooling system against freezing in
temperatures of -40°F (-40°C).
fluid.
♦
and corrosion inhibitor. It performs the
following functions in the cooling system:
NOTE: To prevent damage to the engine,
only top up with a pre-mixed coolant
that provides the desired level of
antifreeze protection.
❢
✡
★
✡
✡
✠
✦
✥
✌
☛
✟
✡
✌
✠
♠
✟
✒
✦
❋
✡
✠
✓
✌
✥
✧
❏
✟
✔
✥
✌
☛
✟
✍
3.5 gal.
(13.0 liters)
✒
Antifreeze quantity for
protection to -4°F (-20°C)
✒
Mobil Extra
Antifreeze
✝
Antifreeze/corrosion
inhibitor
✡
6.8 gal.
(26.0 liters)
◗
Power steering fluid
Cooling system capacity
✑
❚
Coolant
✴
➶
ERVICE PRODUCTS, FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY
➽
❮
➄
➈
➈
❾
➇
➃
➇
❚
➆
➂
➁
➻
➆
➀
➸
➄
ECHNICAL GLOSSARY
➭
✡
❀
✡
✌
✟
✠
✡
✤
✒
✧
✌
✟
✌
✦
✥
✑
✔
✓
☛
❑
✟
✠
✒
✦
✻
✯
✭
✪
✰
✳
☛
✥
✍
✍
✟
✱
✼
✮
✺
✸
✝
☛
✡
✼
✼
➪
✱
✫
✪
➭
✭
❈
✪
❥
✭
❤
❀
✱
✸
✬
✭
✻
❀
✼
➳
✪
✍
✟
✤
✡
❖
♥
♦
❢
between the tires and the road surface.
☛
✒
✥
✌
✝
✟
✠
✌
✤
☛
✟
✼
✴
✌
✬
✭
✥
✍
✻
✸
❍
✥
✬
✟
✌
✺
✳
✔
✮
✻
☛
✥
✱
❈
✼
❤
✱
◆
✥
✠
✤
✔
✠
✻
➴
❀
✒
✸
✱
✌
✥
☛
✬
✒
✭
✻
✧
➳
❀
❑
✠
✒
✌
✟
✠
✡
✍
✡
✝
✝
✟
✡
✑
✌
✦
❄
is suddenly released,
the electronic brake pre-fill function
immediately brings the brake pads into
contact with the discs, making for more rapid
braking.
❁
❳
If the driver uses too much throttle exiting a
corner, the inside rear wheel increases speed,
which without brake steer could cause the car
to become unstable. In this situation, brake
✑
❯
✡
✓
➥
✠
✒
✌
✟
✦
✒
✔
✌
✥
✦
✡
☛
✡
✑
✌
✡
❍
✔
✠
✡
✦
✦
If the system detects that the car is starting to
understeer through a corner, the inside rear
brake is gently applied. This helps to increase
the yaw rate of the car, making the car feel
more resistant to understeer. The lateral "g!
force is also increased giving better handling
characteristics.
✪
✑
✌
☛
✡
✑
✔
✡
✌
❋
✟
✠
✡
❑
✒
✹
✸
✱
☛
✳
✥
✱
❀
❣
❑
✥
✽
✱
✔
✝
✭
✒
✪
✻
✪
✠
✡
✡
✌
✽
✔
✪
✡
❥
❈
✭
✟
✩
✴
✝
☛
✡
✠
✳
✡
✧
✡
☛
✥
✔
✡
✌
✟
✠
✡
✠
❬
✵
✳
☛
✥
✠
✡
✌
✽
✰
☛
✡
☛
✭
❈
❀
✬
✸
✒
✔
✠
✡
✱
❑
✿
❑
✒
✪
✻
✧
✽
✡
✮
✌
✔
✽
✴
✽
✱
✽
✻
✔
✌
✔
✥
✔
braking situations. If you depress the brake
pedal quickly, Brake assist system
automatically increases the force being
applied to the brakes and thus shortens the
stopping distance.
vectoring differential, but is integrated into
the braking system reducing weight and
providing excellent speed of response.
✼
✡
✑
✌
✔
✌
☛
✡
◆
✡
✠
❑
✧
✻
✱
✡
✸
✹
✑
✌
☛
✬
❀
✒
✡
✪
❜
✭
❍
✌
✪
✔
✲
✱
✓
✧
✭
❀
✶
✱
✑
✝
✥
✑
✻
❈
✿
✬
✤
✠
❋
❈
✽
✪
✔
✟
✡
❥
✭
✟
✩
❈
the vehicle or the Tracker system signals that
the vehicle is being moved without
authorization.
✠
engine speeds under hard acceleration within
Sport powertrain mode, the number of firing
engine cylinders are cut to rapidly decrease
the engine torque and engine speed allowing
faster upshifts to be achieved. This will make
the upshift more audibly noticeable than a
normal upshift. This also occurs in Track
powertrain mode, but at high engine speeds it
is replaced by inertia push. See Inertia push,
page 6.15.
❙
✿
✪
✡
✌
✴
✔
✻
➴
✽
✮
✳
❙
✹
☛
✵
✥
✸
✟
✱
✠
❬
❥
❈
✭
✩
✝
✒
✵
➩
✍
❥
❀
➪
✼
✱
✬
✥
☛
☞
✌
❛
✻
✸
✡
❚
✑
✻
✟
✝
☞
✯
❛
wheels from locking when you brake. This
allows the vehicle to be steered during
braking maneuvers.
❬
❋
✥
✰
❥
✪
✤
✭
✡
✟
✠
✡
✑
✌
✡
☛
✟
✑
✳
✝
✒
✌
✠
✡
◆
✥
✠
✤
✡
✑
✌
✔
❋
✒
✍
✍
✟
✌
✟
✑
✌
✧
✡
✌
✔
✔
✴
☞
✵
❬
✩
❈
✬
✭
✻
✼
windscreen wipers are switched on. It
prevents moisture build up on the brake discs
during periods of heavy rain, by applying the
brakes momentarily, so that the pads touch
the discs.
handling and performance characteristics of
the vehicle.
✵
steer will again gently apply the brake on the
inside rear wheel, thereby restoring traction
and stability.
❀
✸
✬
❀
✿
✽
❈
✱
✸
✮
✰
✪
✲
❀
✱
✻
❛
Technical glossary
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY
✠
✓
✒
✦
✔
✡
✔
✥
✠
✧
✒
❑
✝
✧
✡
✌
✍
✍
✥
❋
✑
✝
✥
✑
❋
✠
✒
♠
✌
✟
✺
➴
✝
✥
✤
✪
✺
✯
☛
✥
✌
✦
✥
✻
✫
✱
✑
✔
✡
✍
❍
✥
❅
➴
❀
✪
✤
✓
✸
❈
✿
✭
✟
☛
✟
✬
✔
✥
❈
☛
✥
✤
✡
✌
☛
✓
✒
✧
✔
✥
❁
✟
❘
➚
✠
✭
✡
✧
❁
✟
✪
✿
❈
✺
✡
❋
✥
❣
✱
❱
✪
✠
✟
✡
❘
●
✬
❤
✭
❈
✪
❊
✻
✫
✱
➴
❅
✽
✽
✪
✼
➴
✍
✟
✓
✤
✤
✡
✡
❑
✔
✘
✟
✔
✥
✒
❏
✟
✡
✌
✠
❍
♠
❫
♥
♦
provides timing data recording and graphical
visualization for track use, e.g. circuits and
hill-climbs.
clutch gearbox. Gear changes can be fully
automatic or driver controlled. The gear
changes are almost instantaneous. It is this
coupled with uninterrupted torque delivery
from the engine which provides the relentless
acceleration.
❢
✧
✡
✌
✔
✴
✔
✴
✠
✌
✮
✡
✭
✻
✧
✡
✍
✪
✿
✼
✪
✡
❚
✵
✝
✪
❡
✟
✠
❚
❥
❀
❈
☛
✡
✭
❡
✠
✸
✟
✞
✪
✝
▼
✡
✑
for an upshift at high engine speeds under
hard acceleration, inertia push delivers
greater acceleration. Under normal driving
conditions, outside of inertia push when
maximum performance is not called for, the
❚
✭
❈
❃
❀
❂
✳
☛
✥
✍
✍
✟
✝
☛
✡
✑
❋
✡
✤
✒
✧
☛
✥
✟
✠
✌
✠
✡
❋
❑
✒
✳
✦
✥
✑
✔
✔
✔
✡
✍
✧
✟
✡
✔
✡
✑
❚
❅
✵
✝
✟
✠
❚
☛
✥
✑
✌
✥
❯
✔
✴
✔
✭
✬
✽
✸
✪
✽
✠
✒
✔
☛
✡
✽
✔
✸
✹
✳
☛
✥
✟
✵
❑
✠
❈
✱
❥
✭
✡
✑
❚
✫
✭
✪
❜
✭
✪
✡
✑
❚
✡
✑
✌
✡
◆
✥
✳
✒
✌
✤
✡
☛
✥
✔
✡
✳
✤
✼
✔
✥
✬
✍
✭
✻
✒
✠
✸
✌
☛
✬
✒
✝
✑
❅
❀
✝
☛
✸
❈
❃
✯
✓
✟
✞
❀
✪
✿
✍
✍
✥
✑
☛
✒
✵
✝
✟
❍
✍
➩
✍
✒
✠
✔
✌
☛
✡
◆
✡
❑
✠
✼
✬
✭
✍
✒
✻
✠
✸
✌
✬
☛
✽
✯
➭
❈
✱
✻
maximum acceleration performance from a
standing start.
❈
the center of the rear grille. The live video
feed is displayed on the IRIS screen when the
function is active.
❀
✒
✝
✰
✼
❅
✬
✤
✍
✒
✼
✱
✼
✑
✍
✥
❩
✍
✭
✪
✸
✾
starts. The brake system automatically applies
the brakes until the accelerator is pressed.
❈
✡
✑
✌
✝
✒
✍
✵
☛
✓
✒
✌
✠
✡
◆
✥
✠
✤
✡
✑
✌
✔
vehicle and disarm the alarm by simply
opening the door when the key is within
5 feet (1.5 meters) of the door sensors.
• ESC settings
sound to indicate that an upshift is required
to maintain optimum performance.
✮
✭
✻
❋
✒
✍
✍
✸
✟
➳
✽
✽
✪
✼
✮
✴
✠
✌
☛
❳
✔
✔
✡
✍
➌
✴
❭
• Adaptive damping
✪
❁
✡
✑
✌
✔
✌
✝
✡
✦
✦
✟
✑
✝
✌
✥
✔
following vehicle characteristics:
❐
ultrasonic sensors in the front bumper, four
ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumper and two
sounders. When the parking sensors detect
an obstructions while maneuvering, the
sounders provide an audible warning.
❋
✍
✼
✒
✠
✌
✬
☛
✭
✻
✒
✸
✝
✳
☛
✬
❀
✥
✍
✹
✸
✼
✱
✤
☛
✟
✑
✰
❈
✡
✑
❚
✸
❐
satellite signals supply information on the
geographical position of the vehicle. These
signals are compared with a digital map and
used both to determine the position of the
vehicle and for its route guidance.
❙
✔
✠
✡
engine and transmission speeds are aligned
for a smooth seamless upshift. However, with
inertia push, the clutch holding the next gear
is engaged with greater force and the engine
speed is not allowed to decrease fully,
therefore utilizing the inertia of its internal
rotating masses. This in turn provides a
torque impulse as the gear is engaged aiding
acceleration and maximizing performance.
♠
◆
✥
✡
✝
✡
✠
✡
✌
✟
✥
✠
✒
✠
❑
✡
✟
❑
❑
✑
✌
✦
✒
✔
☛
✟
✡
✧
✴
❬
Global Positioning System
✡
❚
ECHNICAL GLOSSARY
VEHICLE DATA AND GLOSSARY
❚
ECHNICAL GLOSSARY
✑
✝
✥
✑
✔
❋
✟
✳
✠
✥
✟
✦
❍
✒
✠
✡
✧
✓
❍
☛
✟
✔
✡
✔
✥
✠
✧
✒
❑
✝
✧
✡
✌
✔
✴
❙
Supplementary Restraint System
✿
✴
✍
✌
☛
✟
✌
✔
☛
✒
✝
✪
✧
✻
➴
✽
✮
✡
✌
✴
✔
✹
❙
✸
✱
✭
✳
☛
✥
✬
✻
✠
✱
✒
✌
✥
✸
❂
✬
☛
✒
✪
▼
✭
✡
✯
✽
✠
✓
✔
✽
✪
✭
✔
✡
✠
✪
✭
✡
✠
✥
❚
✱
❡
are automatically deployed in an accident to
provide additional occupant protection.
✡
✓
➥
✥
☛
✓
✟
✔
✥
✠
✭
✡
✪
❍
✧
✓
❤
✿
☛
✯
❝
☛
✒
✸
✥
✬
✌
✱
✟
✝
✥
✻
❈
❀
✫
✱
✦
✥
✌
☛
✱
✻
✡
✸
✤
✥
✡
✍
✪
✾
✰
✝
✼
✱
✪
✥
✑
✡
◆
❅
✪
✡
✑
❚
❱
❀
checks the pressure and temperature in all
four tires. It warns if the pressure drops or the
temperature rises in one or more of the tires.
17 digit number which provides information
about your vehicle, as well as when and where
it was built.
❢
♥
♦
❢
Typical vehicle identification number =
SBM13AAA9GW005000
0
➊
✚
✚
✎
✎
✚
✙
➊
✚
✚
✚
✙
✙
✛
❻
✘
✎
✚
✘
✎
✎
♥
✗
✎
♦
✏
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✗
✗
✏
✗
✗
✎
✗
✗
✗
✏
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✎
➊
➊
❦
✎
✎
✎
✎
✎
✎
✎
✎
✎
✎
✏
✏
✎
✎
❼
❼
❼
✎
➊
❼
Anti-lock Braking System warning light
2.32
bedding-in
brake assist system
brake disc wiping
brake steer
electronic brake pre-fill
foot
hill hold control
parking
pedal
warning light
Brake-steer
Breakdown
Bulb replacement
Bulkhead stowage net
✌
☛
✒
✡
✌
✟
✧
✥
✍
✝
➩
✝
✠
✒
✍
Camera
McLaren track telemetry
rear view
Capacities
cooling system
engine oil
fuel tank
Car cover
✁✄
✘
✆
✢
☛
✒
✥
✌
✟
✠
❍
✥
✍
✟
❁
✚
✚
✗
✚
✚
➊
❻
✘
✚
✗
✗
✏
✛
✗
✏
✎
✎
✏
✎
✗
✎
✎
✎
✏
➊
➊
✗
✚
✚
✗
➊
➊
✚
❻
✙
❼
✎
✎
➊
✚
✗
✗
✗
✎
✎
✚
➊
✗
✚
✎
✗
✗
✚
✗
✏
✚
✎
✎
✗
✎
✎
✎
✏
❼
✗
✙
✗
✚
Anti-lock Braking System
Anti-trap protection - windows
Auto alarm
Auto door lock
Auto fold mirrors
Automatic light control
Automatic locking
Automatic mode - climate control
Automatic mode - transmission
Automatic wipe
❏
✒
❍
fuses
Battery replacement - key fob
Battery safety
Battery status
Belts - seat
Blower speed - climate control
Boost starting
Brake assist system
Brake disc wiping
Brake fluid
topping up
Brake pedal
Brakes
Anti-lock Braking System
✡
✔
✓
✦
✴
✠
✡
✌
✌
✟
❬
✏
➊
✏
✗
✏
✘
✏
✛
✚
➊
✏
✙
✎
✗
✎
✛
✎
❻
✙
✗
✙
✎
✚
✎
✚
✚
✏
✎
❼
✏
✎
✎
✎
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✎
✗
✎
✎
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✏
✏
✗
Accessories
Active dynamics panel
active button
handling control
launch control
powertrain control
Active speed limiter
setting an upper speed limit
Air bags
child passengers
deployment
front air bags
knee air bags
occupant classification system
Out Of Position (OOP) testing
replacement
side head air bags
system modification
Air distribution - climate control
Air recirculation mode - climate control
Air vents
Alarm
arming
disarming
panic
☛
✒
✥
✥
✔
✒
✍
✟
✤
❑
☞
✝
✝
✡
❑
✌
✡
✍
✡
✗
✗
✗
INDEX
✗
✟
✎
✎
✠
✗
✎
✎
✌
➊
✏
✗
✏
✒
✏
✗
✗
✗
✎
✠
✏
✏
✙
✎
✚
✘
✎
✏
✏
✛
✚
✗
✙
✎
✗
✛
✗
✎
✗
✚
✚
✚
✚
✗
✗
✚
✚
✚
✏
✗
✚
✗
Daytime running lamps
Defaults - vehicle settings
Defrosting - climate control
Demisting - climate control
Deployment - air bags
Dimensions
Discharged battery
Discharged key fob battery
starting the engine
unlocking
Display messages
Display screen cleaning
Display set-up
external lighting
internal lighting
language
lighting
time & date
units
Door mirror heating
Door stowage compartments
Door unlock
Doors
automatic locking
closing
✟
✌
✟
❉
✘
❼
❼
✙
✗
❻
✘
✘
✗
➊
✏
✗
✗
✚
✗
✗
✏
➊
➊
➊
✛
❻
❼
❻
✘
❻
❼
✙
✎
✎
✗
❻
✎
✎
✗
✚
✏
❼
✏
❼
➊
✚
✏
✗
❻
✘
❼
✎
✚
✘
❼
✏
✚
❼
✚
✎
✎
✘
✚
✗
✗
✙
✎
✗
❻
✚
✎
✎
✙
✗
✗
✗
✗
✏
✏
✏
✏
✏
✏
✗
✗
✗
✚
✏
✏
✗
✗
✏
✏
✏
✏
✗
➊
✏
✏
✗
✗
✎
✎
✗
✎
✎
✎
✏
✎
❼
✗
✗
✏
✏
calibration
controls
demisting
heated mirrors
heated seats
manual mode
MONO mode
switching on/off
temperature
Clock
Closing the luggage compartment
Closing the service cover
Closing the windows
Coolant
topping up
Copyright
Cover - service
closing
opening
Cruise control
canceling
decreasing speed
increasing speed
resuming speed
setting
Cup holders
➊
➊
✘
➊
➊
➊
✎
✚
✏
✎
❼
❻
❼
➊
➊
✎
❻
✘
✙
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
➊
✚
✚
✚
✏
✏
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
➊
➊
➊
➊
➊
✗
✡
✌
✒
☛
◆
✡
✠
✠
INDEX
✏
✏
✏
✛
✏
high temperature
Center console stowage compartment
Central display
Electronic Stability Control display
gear position indicator
handling and powertrain display
normal mode
sport mode
track mode
Changing wheels
Checking engine oil
Child passengers
Child restraint system
KISI child seat function
tether straps
Cleaning
exterior
instruments and display screens
interior
wheels
Climate control
air conditioning controls
air distribution
air recirculation mode
air vents
automatic mode
blower speed
➊
✗
✏
✏
✏
✗
✗
✗
✙
✗
➊
✚
✚
✚
✙
✚
✚
✚
✏
✎
✎
❻
➊
✏
✛
✙
✚
✚
✗
✗
✗
✝
✝
✥
✌
✴
✍
✟
✌
✟
❁
✷
❦
♦
➊
❻
➊
✙
✛
✛
❻
✛
✗
✏
❻
✏
✎
✎
✛
✙
✎
✘
➊
➊
✏
✘
✗
✛
✎
▲
♦
✏
✗
✚
✗
✚
✚
✚
✎
✚
✗
✗
✗
➊
➊
✎
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✎
✏
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
❦
✏
✎
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✚
✗
✏
✏
✏
✏
✏
✏
✏
✏
✏
✏
➊
✎
✒
❼
✏
➊
✏
✚
✏
✗
➊
➊
✎
✎
✚
✚
✚
✎
✟
✝
✡
✤
❁
❁
➋
✏
➊
✗
✎
➊
➊
➊
✙
➊
➊
✎
✚
✗
✏
✗
➊
✛
✙
✗
✗
➊
❼
✏
✎
✗
✎
➊
✚
✏
✎
❼
✗
➊
✎
✎
✎
✗
❼
✎
✎
✗
✎
✍
❼
✗
✎
➊
✗
✗
✎
✎
✠
✎
✎
✟
✗
✏
✗
✗
✗
✎
✌
✚
✥
✚
☛
Features
12V socket
cup holders
entry lighting
exit lighting
interior lighting
stowage compartments
stowage net
sun visors
USB sockets
Filling with fuel
Fire extinguisher
temperature monitoring
Exit lighting
Exterior lighting
Exterior mirrors
heating
memory
mirror automatic fold
mirror fold
reverse dip
External lighting settings
Extinguisher
Eye - towing
Electronic brake pre-fill
Electronic Stability Control
deactivating
dynamic modes
reactivating
Emergency fuel filling funnel
Engine
Eco Start-Stop System
immobilizer
power output
running in
starting
stopping
technical data
warning light
Engine oil
capacity
checking
level warnings
specification
temperature warnings
topping up
usage
Entry lighting
Equipment
luggage compartment
Error messages
Exhaust
locking and unlocking from inside
manual opening from inside
opening from inside
opening from inside - discharged battery
5.26
opening from outside
opening from outside - discharged battery
❼
❻
❻
✗
INDEX
✳
☛
✥
✵
✍
✒
✝
✗
✗
✧
✡
✔
➊
✴
❙
✎
✌
✏
✎
✗
✎
✎
✗
✎
✗
✗
✗
✎
✗
✎
✎
✗
✙
✙
✗
✎
✎
✛
✛
✗
✗
➊
✎
✎
✏
Economical driving
Electric seats
backrest rake adjustment
forward and rearward adjustment
height adjustment
lumbar adjustment
Electric seats and mirror memory
Electrical status
✚
✚
✎
✏
stowage compartment
Drink holders
Driving away
Driving in winter
Driving precautions
Driving safety systems
Dynamic ESC modes
✏
✎
➊
➊
✗
✚
✗
✗
✏
➊
✗
✗
✙
✎
✗
✏
❻
➊
✛
✗
❼
❑
✒
✌
❙
➩
❳
✝
✒
❙
✌
✟
✠
✌
+
✚
✚
✏
❼
❻
✛
✏
✏
✛
❻
❼
✙
✎
✎
➊
✘
➊
✘
✎
✏
✘
❼
✎
✎
✏
✡
✝
✥
✡
◆
✡
❍
✓
☛
☛
✒
✌
✟
✝
✥
✦
✥
✌
☛
✡
✤
❄
✘
➊
✥
✧
✠
➩
✚
✚
✑
✚
✍
✗
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
➊
✚
✎
✚
✗
➊
✗
✚
✚
✎
Ignition - switching on
Immobilizer
In gear speeds
Increasing nose ground clearance
Increasing nose ride height
Individual unlock settings
Inspecting tires
Inspecting wheels
Instruments
central display
cleaning
defaults
display messages
display window
Electronic Stability Control mode display
3.35
fuel level display
fuel range display
gear position indicator
handling and powertrain display
home screen
left-hand display
normal mode
nose lift
oil temperature display
✚
➊
✗
✏
✚
✗
❼
✚
✎
✏
✗
❼
✏
❼
✚
➊
✗
✙
✙
✏
❼
✎
✗
➊
✏
✚
✙
✗
✎
✎
✎
❼
✎
✚
✎
✎
✎
✗
✎
✎
✏
✗
✏
✏
✎
✚
✏
✗
✗
✏
✎
❼
❼
✎
➊
✚
✎
✎
✎
✒
✌
✟
✥
✤
☛
☛
✚
✒
❑
✠
✟
✡
♣
✚
✚
❻
✗
✒
✠
❻
✙
✘
✎
✗
✎
✝
✚
✎
✗
✏
➊
✏
✗
✗
✎
✗
❼
✎
✥
✍
✤
☛
✟
❩
✘
✘
✗
✎
✗
✘
✘
✗
✙
✎
✗
✎
✗
✙
✗
✗
✎
➊
➊
➊
➊
➊
➊
➊
➊
➊
✵
✥
✌
Fluid - brake
topping up
Fluid - power steering
topping up
Foot brake
Force limiters - seat belts
Front air bags
Fuel
funnel
quality
safety
tank
Fuel level display
Fuel range display
Funnel - fuel
Fuse box
battery
main
secondary
Fuses
battery fuse box
main fuse box
replacement
secondary fuse box
☛
✳
✚
✚
❼
✎
✚
✚
✗
➊
✎
✗
✒
☛
✌
✘
✘
✎
✛
✍
❼
INDEX
❼
✗
➊
➊
✘
✗
✗
✔
✌
✥
✗
✗
✥
✒
✎
✚
✛
✱
✱
✥
✝
✗
✎
✗
✏
✏
✗
✗
✠
✗
✗
✎
Hazard warning lamps
Headlamps
flash
hi beam
Heated mirrors
Heated seats
Hi beam
Hill hold control
Horn
❼
Gear positions
Gear ratios
Gear shift indicator
Gearbox
gear positions
gearshift paddles
kickdown
manual/automatic mode
oil topping up
Genuine McLaren parts and accessories
Glossary - technical
Ground clearance
✎
✎
✎
✤
✥
✟
✌
✔
✠
✥
➋
❖
❦
♦
✏
✚
✏
✎
✚
➊
✏
✎
✙
✎
✏
✎
❻
✗
❼
✏
✎
❻
✚
❼
✙
✘
✘
✘
✚
✎
✙
✎
❫
♦
✏
✏
✏
✏
✗
✏
✏
✏
✏
✏
✗
✏
✏
✏
✗
✗
✗
✗
✏
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✚
✗
✗
✗
✎
✗
➊
➊
➊
✏
✗
✗
✗
✗
✎
✎
❦
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✏
courtesy lighting
day time running lamps
exterior
hazard warning lamps
headlamp flash
hi beam
interior
lo beam
parking lights
rear fog lamp
sidelamps
switch
turn signals
Lighting settings
Limphome
Lo beam headlamps
Locking
automatic
from inside
from outside
mislock
Lo-Jack vehicle tracking system
Luggage compartment
closing
equipment
manual opening
opening - discharged battery
unlocking and opening
✚
❻
➊
➊
✚
✗
✗
✗
➊
➊
✛
✗
✗
✗
✗
✏
➊
✗
✏
✏
✏
✚
✙
✗
✎
✚
✚
✚
✛
✚
✎
❻
✗
✚
❼
✗
✎
✚
✎
✎
✚
✚
✗
✏
❻
✘
✎
✎
✗
✏
✚
✎
❼
✏
✘
✗
✎
✚
✗
✗
➊
✎
✎
❼
✗
✎
battery replacement
discharged battery
entry
stowing
Keyless entry
Kickdown
Kit - first aid
Kit - tire repair
Knee air bags
✡
✚
❼
❻
✎
➩
✔
❑
✧
✟
✞
✏
✙
❼
✎
✛
✏
✎
❻
✏
❼
✛
✔
❼
✏
✚
✥
❼
✤
✎
Language settings
Launch control
Left-hand display
defaults
home screen
messages
nose lift
overview
settings
trip computer
vehicle info
Lifting points - vehicle
Light switch
Lighting
automatic control
✚
✘
✚
✚
✚
✗
✚
✚
✚
✗
✗
✎
✏
✗
✗
✗
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✗
✚
✚
✚
✏
➊
✏
✏
✗
➊
right-hand display
settings
speedometer
sport mode
tachometer
track mode
trip computer
vehicle info
water temperature display
Interchanging wheels
Interior accessory power socket
Interior lighting
courtesy lighting
Interior mirror
Interior motion sensor
Internal lighting settings
Introduction
✡
✍
✝
✥
✑
✡
◆
INDEX
❋
Journey trip
Jump starting
✒
◆
✡
✠
◆
✡
➊
✚
✗
✥
✚
✚
✡
✑
✌
✳
☛
✥
✖
✟
✝
✵
❍
✒
✦
✴
❭
✡
➊
✛
✙
✎
✛
✗
✏
➊
➊
➊
❼
✛
✏
✗
❼
✗
✚
✎
✚
✗
➊
✏
✘
✗
❼
❼
✎
✘
✗
✗
✚
➊
➊
✎
❼
✏
✚
✗
✗
✎
✚
✏
✗
➊
✎
✏
✗
✚
❼
✏
✛
✗
✘
✗
✗
✗
✏
✎
✗
✗
➊
❼
✎
✱
➊
✱
➊
✗
✚
➊
✚
❼
❼
✘
✠
✟
✍
✟
✝
✥
☛
✟
✏
✎
✘
✚
✛
✎
✎
✎
✎
✚
✚
✚
✚
✗
➊
➊
➊
➊
❼
➊
➊
✚
✚
✚
✚
✗
❼
✏
✙
➊
➊
✚
❼
✎
✗
✗
✗
✗
✎
✏
✗
✚
✗
✧
✗
✗
✎
✎
✗
✏
✗
✚
✛
Parking brake
Parking lights
Parking sensors
Parts
Passenger!s footwell stowage net
Passengers - child
Performance shift cue
Power output
engine
Power steering fluid
topping up
Powertrain control
Precautions - driving
Pressures - tire
Opening a door
from inside
from outside
Opening and closing
Opening and closing the vents
Opening the service cover
Opening the windows
Operating temperatures - vehicle
Outside temperature display
Owner documentation
✱
✛
✏
✗
reverse dip
Mislock
MONO mode - climate control
Motion sensor - interior
☛
✠
✟
✳
✥
◆
✟
❲
✘
✘
✚
✏
❼
✗
➊
➊
✡
✧
✒
✤
◗
✘
❻
✗
✗
✏
✎
✚
❻
✏
✙
✎
❻
❻
✛
✗
✗
❻
✗
✛
✗
✎
✌
✗
✗
✘
❻
✗
➩
✡
✌
✒
✥
Nose lift
accessing
lower
operation
raise
Oil - engine
capacity
checking
level
level warnings
specification
status
temperature display
temperature warnings
top up
Oil - gearbox
✗
✗
✗
✗
✏
✎
➊
➊
✚
✚
✚
✎
✎
❼
✚
✗
✚
✎
✌
✗
✎
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✚
✏
✏
✏
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✓
❍
✱
❻
✛
✱
✡
✗
✚
✔
✟
✌
☛
✌
☛
✡
✧
✌
✠
❑
✡
✝
❍
✡
✔
✳
✓
✦
✟
✳
☛
ton
INDEX
✗
✒
✳
✒
✧
✞
❏
✓
✟
✎
✠
☛
✍
✠
✥
✡
✟
fuses
Main instruments overview
Manual mode - climate control
Manual mode - transmission
Manual seat backrest adjustment
Manual seats
backrest rake adjustment
forward and rearward adjustment
height adjustment
Manual unlocking
McLaren Assistance
McLaren parts and accessories
McLaren track telemetry
USB sockets
Media USB sockets
Mirror
automatic exterior mirror fold
exterior
exterior mirror fold
heating
interior
memory
✡
✍
✡
▼
✟
✥
❢
❦
♦
.
❻
✘
✛
✗
❻
❻
✘
❻
✘
✙
✛
✙
✗
❻
❻
❻
✘
✙
✗
✙
✛
✘
✛
❦
✙
manual/automatic mode
Seat belt warning light
Seat belts
force limiters
safety
tensioners
wearing
Seat stowage pocket
Seats
backrest - electric rake adjustment
backrest - manual rake adjustment
electric adjustment
electric backrest rake adjustment
electric forward and rearward adjustment
1.19
electric height adjustment
electric seat and mirror memory
electric seat lumbar adjustment
heating
manual adjustment
manual backrest rake adjustment
manual forward and rearward adjustment
1.17
manual height adjustment
racing seat adjustment
safety
stowage pocket
Secondary fuse box
♦
✎
✎
✎
✗
✎
✎
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✎
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✎
✗
✏
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✎
✎
✗
✗
✗
✗
✏
✗
✎
✗
✗
✎
✎
✎
✎
✏
✗
✗
✗
✗
➊
✗
✱
✱
✱
❻
✏
✗
✗
✏
✎
✗
✚
❻
✏
✘
✚
✎
❼
✘
❼
❼
➊
✘
❼
✚
✚
✚
✎
✎
✚
✚
✗
✎
✗
✎
✎
✎
➊
✗
✎
✎
✎
✎
❻
✦
✟
❙
✏
❼
✚
❼
✘
✗
✗
✚
❻
✚
✏
✏
✏
✚
✘
✎
➊
➊
✙
✘
❼
✛
✛
➊
✚
✏
✎
✗
➊
➊
➊
✚
✚
✚
✎
✎
✏
✗
✗
➊
✎
✎
✘
✏
✏
✗
✛
✗
❼
➊
✏
✏
✗
✗
✏
❻
✚
❼
✴
✡
✌
❻
❼
✎
Rev counter
Reverse mirror dip
Reverse select tone
Right-hand display
fuel level
fuel range
oil temperature
overview
water temperature
Running in
air bag system modification
air bags
air bags Out Of Position (OOP)
battery
fuel
mirrors
replacement of air bags
seat belts
seats
Sealant - tire
Seamless Shift Gearbox
gear positions
gearshift paddles
kickdown
✎
➊
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✥
◆
✠
✡
✔
➩
Puncture repair kit
✝
✡
✳
☛
✥
✝
✟
❘
✔
✟
✌
✔
✡
adjustment
Rain sensor
Ratios - gear
Reading lights
Rear fog lamp
Rear view camera
Recirculation mode - climate control
Recommended fuel quality
Recovery of your vehicle
Refuelling
Replacement battery
Replacing
bulbs
fuse
key fob battery
vehicle battery
wiper blade
Restraint system
child
KISI child seat function
supplementary
tether straps
INDEX
✚
✙
✙
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✎
✗
✒
✚
❼
➊
✠
✘
✘
✙
✚
✗
✗
✗
✤
✗
✎
✓
❻
✎
✗
✚
✚
✝
✚
✚
✚
✌
✚
✎
✎
✎
✚
✔
✛
✚
✏
✚
✗
✚
✏
✙
✚
❦
INDEX
➊
✓
✦
✡
✔
✔
Sensors
interior motion
parking
Service and Warranty
Service cover
closing
opening
Service interval
Service products
Setting up warning triangle
Settings
display set-up
external lighting
internal lighting
language
lighting
time & date
units
vehicle
Settings - individual unlock
Side head air bags
Sidelamps
Silent lock
Snow socks
Specification - engine oil
Speedometer
Speeds - in gear
Start button pulse
START/STOP button
Starting and driving
foot brake
gear positions
gearshift paddles
instruments and warning lights
main instruments
parking brake
starting the engine
switching on the ignition
warning lights
Starting the engine
discharged key fob battery
Steering column
electrical adjustment
manual adjustment
Steering wheel
electrical adjustment
horn
manual adjustment
Stopping the engine
Stowage compartments
center console
door
seat
Stowage net
Stowing the key fob
✛
✗
✎
❼
✏
✏
✎
✗
✚
✗
✎
✚
✎
✙
✎
✗
✘
✎
❼
✗
✎
✚
✙
✎
✎
❼
✗
✏
➊
✘
✎
❻
✗
✗
✛
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✏
✏
✎
✎
✎
✗
✗
✠
✡
✌
✡
✧
✒
✑
✝
✟
❚
✎
✛
✎
✗
✗
✗
✛
❼
✎
✗
✗
✗
➊
Technical data
engine
gear ratios
speeds - in gear
tire pressures
turning circle
vehicle dimensions
vehicle operating temperatures
vehicle weights
wheel and tire sizes
Technical glossary
Temperature - climate control
Temperature display
Tensioners - seat belt
Time & date settings
Tire monitoring
Tire pressures
✛
✗
Summer tires
Sun visors
Supplementary Restraint System
Switch - lighting
Switching air conditioning on/off
Switching on the ignition
Symbols
✏
✙
✏
✗
✎
✚
✏
❼
✎
✚
✎
❼
➊
➊
✗
✗
✎
❼
❼
❼
❼
❼
✎
➊
✚
✗
❼
❼
✗
✗
✗
✗
✚
✚
✚
✚
❻
✛
✗
✙
✗
✗
❼
❼
✘
✗
✗
✗
✚
✚
❻
✚
✘
✏
❼
❼
✎
✗
✏
✏
✏
✏
✏
✎
✎
✎
✎
✎
✗
✗
✗
✗
✗
✘
❼
✗
✗
✚
✚
❼
❻
✛
✙
✏
❼
✎
✗
✗
✗
❼
✏
❼
✏
✎
✗
✗
✎
❻
✗
❻
✗
✗
✚
✎
✏
✗
✚
✘
✚
✎
✗
✘
✘
✗
✗
✏
✏
❻
✏
✎
✙
✎
➊
✘
✗
✏
❻
✙
✗
✗
✗
✗
✚
✚
❼
✛
✗
✗
✏
✏
➊
✎
✗
✚
❼
✚
❼
➊
✗
✱
✏
❻
❼
❦
❧
♦
✙
✛
✗
✛
✙
✙
✙
✚
✏
✏
✚
✚
✛
✎
❼
✏
✏
➊
➊
❼
❼
❼
✎
✚
✗
❻
❻
➊
➦
♦
✗
✏
✗
✗
✗
✗
✚
✎
✗
✚
✎
✎
✎
✎
✎
✎
✎
✎
✎
✎
✚
✗
❼
✏
✎
✗
✎
❼
❦
✚
➊
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✏
➊
✎
➊
✎
error messages
McLaren track telemetry
MTT
oil status
service interval
tire monitoring
vehicle identification
Vehicle lifting points
Vehicle settings
auto alarm
auto door lock
auto fold mirrors
defaults
door unlock
reverse mirror dip
silent lock
start button pulse
tire type
valet mode
wiper modes
wiper sensitivity
Vehicle speeds
Vehicle starting
discharged key fob battery
Vehicle tracking
Vehicle use
Vehicle washing
Vehicle weights
✏
✘
✙
✏
❼
✙
✏
➊
✗
✘
✗
✗
✏
✗
✗
✎
✎
✗
✚
✏
✗
✗
❼
✎
✚
✚
✚
✚
✛
✗
❼
✏
✏
✱
✎
✎
✗
✚
✎
➊
❼
✗
✎
✎
✗
➊
✗
✎
✏
✎
✗
✚
✏
✏
❻
✎
✗
Unlocking - discharged battery
Unlocking and opening the luggage compartment
Unlocking from inside
Unlocking from outside
Upper speed limit
setting
USB sockets
McLaren track telemetry
media
✚
✗
Triangle - warning
Trip
Turn signals
Turning circle
✚
➊
✔
✌
✥
☛
✚
✏
❪
✘
✘
✚
✡
✤
✒
✛
✗
✙
✙
❻
❼
✎
➊
✧
✌
✡
✍
✟
✏
✛
❼
➊
✘
✚
❼
✗
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle electrical status
Vehicle identification
Vehicle identification number
Vehicle info
battery status
❻
✚
✏
❼
✎
✚
✚
✎
✚
✚
✚
✚
✚
✗
✚
✗
✏
✗
✗
✗
✚
✏
✗
✗
✗
➊
➊
➊
➊
➊
➊
➊
➊
➊
➊
➊
➊
➊
➊
➊
✚
✎
❼
✎
❼
✗
❼
✎
✏
✎
✎
✎
✱
➊
✚
➊
✠
❚
✴
❑
✡
Tires
asymmetric
inspecting
markings
monitoring system
pressure monitoring
pressures
repair kit
sealant
summer
temperature monitoring
winter
Topping up
brake fluid
coolant
engine oil
gearbox oil
power steering fluid
windscreen washers
Tow-away protection
Towing
eye
Track driving
Track telemetry
Track use
Tracking system
Traction control system
✥
✡
✌
INDEX
✏
✙
✙
✘
❼
✎
✚
✎
✚
✚
✚
❼
✘
❼
✛
✏
➊
➊
✏
✏
➊
➊
✚
❼
✙
✗
➊
❼
✙
✙
➊
✎
✎
✗
✗
✏
✏
✙
✏
✏
➊
✏
➊
✘
✚
❼
❼
✎
✎
✗
✗
✚
✗
✚
✎
✚
➊
❼
✎
✎
✚
➊
✗
✚
Wheel and tire sizes
Wheel sizes
Wheels
inspecting
interchanging
Wheels and tires
Window demisting - climate control
Windows
anti-trap protection
opening and closing
Windscreen washers
Windscreen wipers
rain sensor
single wipe
wash/wipe
wiper blade replacement
wiper modes
wiper sensitivity
Winter driving
Winter tires
Wiper blade replacement
Wiper modes
Wiper sensitivity
✏
❼
✙
✎
➊
✍
✥
✔
✌
☛
✡
Volumetric alarm
✳
✡
☛
✥
☛
✡
✒
✍
✡
◆
✡
✍
Warning - engine oil temperature
Warning light
Anti-lock Braking System
brakes
engine
seat belt
Supplementary Restraint System
Warning lights
left-hand side
right-hand side
Warning triangle
Washers
windscreen
Washing
exterior
wheels
Water temperature display
Wearing seat belts
Weights
Wheel - steering
electrical adjustment
manual adjustment
✗
✗
✗
✎
❼
✗
✎
✎
➊
✚
➊
✏
✏
✎
➊
✏
❻
❻
✚
✚
✛
✚
✚
➊
❼
❻
➊
➊
❻
✛
✎
✗
INDEX
✛
✙
✎
✗
✎
❼
✗
✎
✗
✎
➊
✚
✎
✗
✏
✚
➊
✗
✛
✗
✏
✏
✙
✎
✗
➩
❯
✟
✠
☛
✥
☛
✳
❦
♦
♥
➨
CARS.McLAREN.COM

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2015:11:30 09:25:48Z
Modify Date                     : 2015:11:30 09:25:48Z
Author                          : pthomps
Subject                         : 
Page Count                      : 254
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseNone
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:d70ae533-999f-11e5-0000-bd3d3e425782
Producer                        : PDFCreator 2.1.1.0
Keywords                        : 
Creator Tool                    : PDFCreator 2.1.1.0
Document ID                     : uuid:d70ae533-999f-11e5-0000-bd3d3e425782
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Owner Manual - P13 - US - English
Creator                         : pthomps
Description                     : 

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools